Kia, THE COMPANY
Thank you for becoming the owner of a new Kia vehicle.
As a global car manufacturer focused on building high-quality vehi-
cles with exceptional value, Kia Motors is dedicated to providing you
with a customer service experience that exceeds your expectations.
All information contained in this Owner’s Manual was accurate at the
time of publication. However, Kia reserves the right to make changes
at any time so that our policy of continual product improvement can
be carried out.
This manual applies to all models of this vehicle and includes descrip-
tions and explanations of optional as well as standard equipment. As a
result, you may encounter material in this manual that is not applica-
ble to your specific Kia vehicle.
Drive safely and enjoy your Kia!
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
Foreword
Thank you for choosing a Kia vehicle.
When you require service, remember that your Kia dealer
knows your vehicle best. Your dealer has factory-trained tech-
nicians, recommended special tools and genuine Kia replace-
ment parts. It is dedicated to your complete customer satisfac-
tion.
Because subsequent owners require this important information
as well, this publication should remain with the vehicle if it is
sold.
This manual will familiarize you with operational, mainte-
nance and safety information about your new vehicle. It is sup-
plemented by a Warranty and Consumer Information manual
that provides important information on all warranties regarding
your vehicle.
We urge you to read these publications carefully and follow the
recommendations to help assure enjoyable and safe operation
of your new vehicle.
Kia offers a great variety of options, components and features
for its various models. Therefore, some of the equipment
described in this manual, along with the various illustrations,
may not be applicable to your particular vehicle.
The information and specifications provided in this manual
were accurate at the time of printing. Kia reserves the right to
discontinue or change specifications or design at any time
without notice and without incurring any obligation. If you
have questions, always check with your Kia dealer.
We assure you of our continuing interest in your motoring
pleasure and satisfaction in your Kia vehicle.
© 2015 Kia MOTORS AMERICA, Inc.
All rights reserved. May not be reproduced or translated in
whole or in part without the written consent of Kia Motors
America, Inc.
Printed in Korea
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
We want to help you get the greatest
possible driving pleasure from your
vehicle. Your Owner’s Manual can
assist you in many ways. We strong-
ly recommend that you read the
entire manual. In order to minimize
the chance of death or injury, you
must read the WARNING and CAU-
TION sections in the manual.
Illustrations complement the words
in this manual to best explain how to
enjoy your vehicle. By reading your
manual, you will learn about fea-
tures, important safety information,
and driving tips under various road
conditions.
The general layout of the manual is
provided in the Table of Contents.
Use the index when looking for a
specific area or subject; it has an
alphabetical listing of all located in
the back of this manual.
Sections: This manual has eight sec-
tions plus an index. Each section
begins with a brief list of contents so
you can tell at a glance if that section
has the information you want.
You will find various types of safety
instructions in this manual. These
instructions were prepared to
enhance your personal safety.
Carefully read and follow ALL proce-
dures and recommendations provid-
ed in these instructions.
✽✽
NOTICE
A NOTICE indicates interesting or
helpful information is being provided.
WARNING
A WARNING indicates a situation
in which harm, serious bodily
injury or death could result if the
warning is ignored.
CAUTION
A CAUTION indicates a situation
in which damage to your vehicle
could result if the caution is
ignored.
How To Use This Manual
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
2
1
Table of contents
3
4
5
6
7
8
I
Introduction
Vehicle data collection and event data recorders
Electric Vehicle Guide
Review of Electric Vehicle / High voltage battery / Charge / Driving Electric Vehicle / Etc.
Your vehicle at a glance
Exterior overview / Interior overview / Instrument panel overview / Motor room compartment
Safety features of your vehicle
Seats / Seat belts / Child restraint system / Air bag
Features of your vehicle
Smart key / Door locks / Tailgate / Windows / Steering wheel / Mirrors / Instrument cluster / Lighting / Etc.
Driving your vehicle
Before driving / POWER button / Active ECO system / Reduction gear / Brake system / Etc.
What to do in an emergency
Road warning / Emergency while driving / Emergency starting / Vehicle overheat / TPMS / Flat tire / Towing / Etc.
Maintenance
Motor room compartment / Maintenance service / Coolant / Brake fluid / Washer fluid / Lights bulbs / Etc.
Specifications, Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
Index
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
Electric Vehicle Guide
❈ This is an electric vehicle guide to assist drivers with
understanding their vehicle.
Refer to the following content for electric vehicle details
and precautions
Review of Electric Vehicle ........................................................2
Main Components of Electric Vehicle.......................................4
High voltage battery .................................................................5
EV Mode ..................................................................................7
■
Available Range .................................................................7
■
Near by stations .................................................................8
■
Energy Information.............................................................8
■
ECO Driving .......................................................................9
■
Setting Charging Times.....................................................9
■
Setting Climate Times ......................................................10
■
EV Setting ........................................................................11
Charge Types for Electric Vehicle...........................................12
Charge Indicator Lamp for Electric Vehicle ............................14
Reserved Charging ................................................................15
Reserved Climate Control.....................................................17
Precautions for Charging Electric Vehicle ..............................18
Charging Electric Vehicle (Normal Charge) ...........................21
■
How to Connect Normal Charger.....................................21
■
Unlock Charging Door in Emergency...............................24
■
Emergency Release of the Charging connector
lock system.......................................................................25
■
Checking Charging Status................................................25
■
How to Disconnect Normal Charger ................................26
Charging Electric Vehicle (Quick Charge)..............................27
■
How to Connect Quick Charger .......................................27
■
Unlock Charging Door in Emergency...............................30
■
Checking Charging Status................................................30
■
How to Disconnect Quick Charger...................................31
Charging Electric Vehicle (Trickle Charge).............................33
■
How to Connect Portable Charging Cable
(ICCB: In-Cable Control Box) ...........................................33
■
Unlock Charging Door in Emergency...............................37
■
Emergency Release of the Charging connector
lock system.......................................................................38
■
Checking Charging Status................................................38
■
Charging Status Indicator Lamp for Portable Charging
Cable ................................................................................39
■
How to Disconnect Portable Charging Cable
(ICCB: In-CableControl Box) ............................................40
■
Precautions for Portable Charging Cable
(ICCB: In-Cable Control Box) ...........................................42
Driving Electric Vehicle...........................................................43
■
How to Start the Vehicle...................................................43
■
How to Stop the Vehicle ...................................................44
■
Pedestrian Warning System .............................................45
■
Active ECO system ..........................................................45
■
Range...............................................................................46
■
Tips for Improving Distance to Empty ..............................47
■
Motor Operation Gauge....................................................47
■
State of charge (SOC) gauge for high voltage battery.....48
■
Warning Message on LCD Display (related to charge)....49
■
Warning Lamp and Indicator Lamp
(related to electric vehicle) ...............................................52
Safety Precautions for Electric Vehicle...................................55
■
Service Plug .....................................................................58
Environmental Friendliness Mark...........................................58
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
2
An electric vehicle is driven using a
battery and an electric motor. While
general vehicles use an internal
combustion engine and gasoline as
fuel, electric vehicles use electrical
energy that is stored inside the high
voltage battery. As a result, electric
vehicles are eco-friendly in that they
do not require fuel and do not emit
exhaust gases.
1. It is driven using the electrical ener-
gy that is stored inside the high
voltage battery. This method pre-
vents air pollution since fuel, like
gasoline, is not required, negating
the emission of exhaust gases.
2. A high performance motor is used
in the vehicle as well. Compared
to standard, internal combustion
engine vehicles, engine noise and
vibrations are much more minimal
when driving.
3. When decelerating or driving down-
hill, regenerative braking is utilized
to charge the high voltage battery.
This minimizes energy loss and
increases the distance to empty.
4. When the battery charge is not
sufficient, normal charge, quick
charge and trickle charge are
available. (Refer to “Charge Types
for Electric Vehicle” for details.)
REVIEW OF ELECTRIC VEHICLE
Review of Electric Vehicle Characteristics of Electric
Vehicles
What does regenerative braking
do?
It uses an electric motor when
decelerating and braking and
transforms kinetic energy to elec-
trical energy in order to charge the
high voltage battery. (Torque is
applied in the opposite direction
when decelerating to generate
braking force and electric energy.)
Note
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
3
• The vehicle is composed of a high
voltage battery that drives the
motor and air-conditioner, and an
auxiliary battery (12 V) that drives
the lamps, wipers, and audio sys-
tem.
• The auxiliary battery is automati-
cally charged when the vehicle is
in the ready ( ) mode or the high
voltage battery is being charged.
REVIEW OF ELECTRIC VEHICLE
Battery Information
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
4
• High Voltage Junction Block: Supplies power from the high voltage bat-
tery to the inverter, LDC, air-conditioner compressor, and PTC heater.
• On-Board Charger (OBC): External device (low speed) to charge the high
voltage battery.
• Inverter: Transforms direct current into alternating current to supply power
to the motor, and transforms alternating current into direct current to
charge the high voltage battery.
• LDC: Transforms power from the high voltage battery to low voltage (12 V)
to supply power to the vehicle (DC-DC).
• Motor: Uses electrical energy stored inside the high voltage battery to
drive the vehicle (functions like an engine in a standard vehicle).
• Reduction Gear : Delivers rotational force of the motor to the tires at
appropriate speeds and torque.
• High voltage battery (lithium-
ion polymer) : Stores and sup-
plies power necessary for the
electric vehicle to operate (12 V
auxiliary battery provides power to
the vehicle features such as lights
and wipers).
❈ OBC : On-Board Charger
❈ LDC : Low Voltage DC-DC Converter
MAIN COMPONENTS OF
ELECTRIC VEHICLE
Main Components of Electric Vehicle
OPSE0Q4002
High Voltage
Junction Block
On-Board Charger
(OBC)
High Voltage
Battery
EPCU
(Inverter + LDC)
Motor/
Reduction Gear
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
5
• The charge amount of the high volt-
age battery may gradually decrease
when the vehicle is not driving.
• The battery capacity of the high
voltage battery may decrease
when the vehicle is stored in
high/low temperatures.
• Distance to empty may vary
depending on the driving conditions,
even if the charge amount is the
same. The high voltage battery may
expend more energy when driving at
quick speed or uphill. These actions
may reduce the distance to empty.
• The high voltage battery is used
when using the air-conditioner /
heater. This may reduce the dis-
tance to empty. Make sure to set
moderate temperatures when
using the air-conditioner/heater.
• Natural degradation may occur
with the high voltage battery
depending on the number of years
the vehicle is used. This may
reduce the distance to empty.
• When the charge capacity and
distance to empty keep falling, we
recommend that you contact an
authorized Kia dealer for inspec-
tion and maintenance.
• If the vehicle will not be in use for
an extended period of time,
charge the high voltage battery
once every three months to pre-
vent it from discharging. Also, if
the charge amount is not enough
to store the vehicle for an extend-
ed period of time, immediately
charge to enough state of charge
and store the vehicle.
High Voltage Battery (lithium-ion polymer)
MAIN COMPONENTS OF
ELECTRIC VEHICLE
OPSE0Q44001
WARNING - Repair of
high voltage components
The high voltage battery in your
system in very dangerous and
can cause severe burns and
electric shock. Never inspect,
remove or disassemble any of
the high voltage components in
your vehicle. Kia recommends
that all inspections and repairs
be performed by an authorized
and trained Kia dealer.
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
6
• Normal charge is recommended
to keep the high voltage battery in
optimal condition.
If the high voltage battery charge
amount is below 20%, you can
keep the high voltage battery per-
formance in optimal condition if
you charge the high voltage bat-
tery to 100%. (Once a month or
more is recommended.)
• If the vehicle is in a collision, we
recommend that you contact an
authorized Kia dealer to inspect
whether the high voltage battery
is still connected.
The high voltage battery warmer
system prevents reduction of battery
output when battery temperature is
low. If the charging connector is con-
nected, the warmer system automat-
ically operate according to the bat-
tery temperature.
Charging time may shorten compare
to vehicles without the high voltage
battery warmer system. But, electric-
ity charge may increase because of
high voltage battery warmer system
operation.
The high voltage battery warmer sys-
tem operates when the charging con-
nector is connected to the vehicle.
However, the high voltage warmer
system may not operate when bat-
tery temperature drops below -31°F
(-35°C)
High Voltage Battery
Warmer System
MAIN COMPONENTS OF
ELECTRIC VEHICLE
CAUTION - Damaging
high voltage battery
• Make sure to use a designated
charger when charging the
high voltage battery. Using dif-
ferent types of chargers may
have a serious impact on vehi-
cle durability.
• Make sure that the high volt-
age battery charger gauge
does not reach SOC 0% on
cluster gauge. If the vehicle is
kept at SOC 0% for a long peri-
od, it may damage the high
voltage battery and the high
voltage battery may have to be
replaced depending on the
level of degradation.
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
7
If you select the "EV" menu at the
AVN home screen or press the "EV"
button on the left side of the air-con-
ditioning button panel, you can enter
EV mode.
❈ Refer to the AVN manual for details.
The EV mode has a total of 6 menus
including Available Range, Near by
stations, Energy information, ECO
driving, Set timings for Charging
/Climate and EV settings.
■■
Available Range
EV MODE
EV Mode (if equipped)
OPSE0Q4003N
Name Description
Green Circle
Reachable area
Red Circle
Risky area (depending on
circumstances)
Grey Area
Unreachable area
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
8
■■
Near by stations
Stations around the current location
is searched. Depending on the sym-
bol color of the station, it is catego-
rized as Reachable area, Risky area
and Unreachable area.
■■
Energy Information
You can check battery information
and power consumption.
Battery Information
You can check the available range,
battery charge amount that can be
used, and approximate expected
charging time for each charge type.
More accurate time will be
appeared while charging.
Power Consumption
Power that is consumed by the
drive system, climate and electri-
cal components are displayed
respectively.
You can check how far the vehicle
can drive currently, and how much
more the vehicle can drive if the
climate is turned OFF.
EV MODE
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
9
■■
ECO Driving
You can check ECO level information
and ECO driving history.
ECO Level
A total of 8 ECO levels and the
average energy consumption are
displayed depending on vehicle
driving style.
Driving History
You can check the driving date ,
driving distance , and the aver-
age energy consumption rating
for previous driving trips. The date
with the highest ECO level is
marked with a star shaped icon.
■■
Set Charging Times
This is a feature that starts charging
the battery on the date and time that
is designated by the user. Two sepa-
rate reservations can be set.
Name Description
Start Charging
Select the time that you
wish to start charging
the battery
Charging
Ratio
Select the maximum
charge ratio.
Repeat Day
of Week
Select the day of the
week you wish to reserve
for automatic charging.
EV MODE
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
10
Setting is saved and setting informa-
tion is displayed on the screen.
■■
Set Climate Times
This is a feature that automatically
starts climate control on the reserved
day and time along with the tempera-
ture designated by the user. Two sep-
arate reservations can be set.
Description
When selecting the list again, change
the setting.
If you do not want to use the reserved
setting, select OFF.
Description
When selecting the list again, change
the setting.
If you do not want use the reserved
setting, select OFF.
Name Description
Vehicle
Departure Time
Enter the anticipated depar-
ture time for the vehicle.
Set
Temperature
Enter the temperature that
you desire.
Repeat Day of
Week
Select the day of the week
you wish to reserve for
automatic air conditioning.
EV MODE
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
11
■■
EV Setting
You can change the EV warning alarm.
Warning Settings
– Low battery warning : You can
select several battery levels at
which to display an alarm mes-
sage.
– Frequency : You can select the
repetition interval to display the
Low battery warning.
– Destination Unreachable
Warning : If the destination set
in the navigation cannot be
reached with the remaining bat-
tery charge, a warning message
is displayed.
EV Route Settings
Displays the EV route on the map.
Non-drivable and drivable sections
across start point, current position,
waypoint and destination are sepa-
rately marked.
EV MODE
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
12
• Normal Charge :
We recommend using normal
charging for usual charging of the
vehicle.
(Refer to “Normal Charge.“ in this
chapter)
• Quick Charge (if equipped) :
You can charge at high speeds at
public charging stations. Refer to
the respective company's manual
that is provided for each quick
charger type.
Battery performance and durability
can deteriorate if the quick charger
is used constantly.
Use of quick charge should be
minimized in order to help prolong
high voltage battery life.
• Trickle Charge :
Trickle Charge can be used when
Normal Charge or Quick Charge
is not available by using house-
hold electricity.
• Normal Charge :
Takes about 4-5 hours at room tem-
perature (depending on charger ) for
a full charge (208V - 5.5kW: 5h
10min, 240V - 6.3kW: 4h 30min.)
(Can be charged to 100%.)
• Quick Charge (if equipped) :
Takes about 33 minutes at room
temperature. (50 kW charger)
(Can be charged to 83%.)
If you charge a second time after
the initial quick charge (up to
83%), it will charge up to 94%.
(Takes an additional 15 minutes at
room temperature.)
During cold weather, quick charg-
ing may not be available to prevent
battery degradation.
• Trickle Charge :
Takes up to 24 hours at room tem-
perature. (120V-12A : 24hours)
(Can be charged to 100%.)
Depending on the condition and dura-
bility of the high voltage battery, charg-
er specifications, and ambient temper-
ature, the time required for charging
the high voltage battery may vary.
CHARGE TYPES FOR ELECTRIC
VEHICLE
Charging Information Charging Time Information
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
13
CHARGE TYPES FOR ELECTRIC
VEHICLE
Charging Types
Category
Charging Inlet
(Vehicle)
Charging Connector Charging Outlet How to Charge Charging Time
Normal
Charge
Use the normal
charger that is
installed in your
home or public
charging station
Approx. 4-5 hours
(208V - 5.5kW: 5h
10min, 240V - 6.3kW:
4h 30min. room tem-
perature) (Can be
charged to 100% )
Quick
Charge
(if equipped)
Use the quick
charger at public
charging station
Approx. 33 min
(50 kW, room tem-
perature) (Can be
charged to 83%)
Trickle
Charge
Use household
electricity
Approx. 24hours
(120V-12A: 24hours,
room temper-ature)
(Can be charged to
100%)
OPSE0Q4035
OPSE0Q4036
OPSE0Q4035
OPSE0Q4005
OPSE0Q4006
OPSE0Q4005
OPSE0Q4057N
OPSE0Q4004
OPSE0Q4007
❈ Shape of charger and how to use the charger may be different for each manufacturer.
❈ Depending on the condition and durability of the high voltage battery, charger specifications, and ambient temper-
ature, the time required for charging the high voltage battery may vary.
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
14
When charging the high voltage bat-
tery, the charge level can be checked
from outside the vehicle.
■■
Normal charging and trickle
charging
■■
Quick charge
Charging Status
Information
OPSE0Q4008
CHARGE INDICATOR LAMP FOR
ELECTRIC VEHICLE
Operation of Charging
Indicator Lamp
Details
(1) (2) (3)
(OFF) (OFF) (OFF)
Not Charged
Blinking
(OFF) (OFF)
Charging
0~33%
(ON)
Blinking
(OFF)
34~66%
(ON) (ON)
Blinking 67~99%
(ON) (ON) (ON)
Charging complete
(100%)(turns OFF
in 3 seconds)
Blinking Blinking Blinking
Error while charg-
ing /If charging
cables are con-
nected when the
vehicle is in the
ready mode or the
POWER button is
in the ON position.
(OFF) (OFF)
Blinking
Charging 12 V aux-
iliary battery or
reserved air condi-
tioner is operating
(OFF)
Blinking
(OFF)
Reserved charging
is operating
(turns OFF after 3
minutes)
Operation of Charging
Indicator Lamp
Details
(1) (2) (3)
(OFF) (OFF) (OFF)
Not Charged
Blinking
(OFF) (OFF)
Charging
0~33%
(ON)
Blinking
(OFF)
34~66%
(ON) (ON)
Blinking 67~94%
Blinking Blinking Blinking
Error while charg-
ing /If charging
cables are con-
nected when the
vehicle is in the
ready mode or the
POWER button is
in the ON position.
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
15
• You can set-up a charging sched-
ule for your vehicle through the
UVO audio control unit, the UVO
EV Services App, or by logging
into MyUVO.com.
Refer to the AVN manual or the
UVO manual for detailed informa-
tion about setting reserved charg-
ing.
• Reserved charging can only be
done when using a normal charg-
er or the portable charging cable
(ICCB: In-Cable Control Box).
• When reserved charging is set and
the normal charger or the portable
charging cable (ICCB: In-Cable
Control Box) is connected for
charging, the indicator lamp in the
middle blinks (for 3 minutes) to indi-
cate that reserved charging is set.
• When reserved charging is set,
charging is not initiated immedi-
ately when the normal charger or
portable charging cable (ICCB: In-
Cable Control Box) is connected.
When immediate charging is
required, use the AVN to deacti-
vate the reserved charge setting
or press the Deactivate Reserved
Charge button [ ].
RESERVED CHARGING
Reserved Charging
(if equipped)
OPSE0Q4027
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
16
RESERVED CHARGING
To immediately charge the battery
(not at reserved time only) first con-
nect the charging cables. Then, the
Deactivate Reserved Charge button
[ ] should be pressed within three
minutes after the cable connection.
If the battery does not charge after
the Deactivate Reserved Charge
button [ ] has been pressed,
remove the charging cable and
reconnect it.
After the Deactivate Reserved
Charge button [ ] has been pressed
(pressed position), you can charge
the battery at any given time.
To change the status to reserved
charging, please press the
Deactivate Reserved Charge button
[ ] again (not pressed position).
❈ Refer to "Normal Charge, Trickle
Charge" for details about connect-
ing the normal charger and the
portable charging cable (ICCB: In-
Cable Control Box).
OPSE0Q40013
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
17
• You can set reserved climate con-
trol using the AVN.
Refer to the AVN for detailed infor-
mation about the reserved climate
control setting.
• Reserved climate control can only
be done when using the normal
charger or portable charging cable
(ICCB: In-Cable Control Box).
• If reserved climate control is set
and the charging cable is connect-
ed, reserved climate control starts
operating 30 minutes prior to the
set time (departure time).
❈ Refer to "Normal Charge, Trickle
Charge" for details about connect-
ing the normal charger and the
portable charging cable (ICCB: In-
Cable Control Box).
• If you press the Set Reserved cli-
mate control button [ ], the indi-
cator lamp on the button blinks
three times and the reserved cli-
mate control setting screen is dis-
played on the AVN.
Refer to the AVN manual for
details about setting reserved cli-
mate control.
❈ Lamp ON Conditions
1. Blinks three times: When you
press the set button and enter the
AVN reserved climate control set-
ting screen.
2. ON: When reserved air condition-
ing is set.
3. Blinking: Reserved climate control
is operating (only operates when
the charging cable is connected).
RESERVED CLIMATE CONTROL
Reserved Climate Control
(if equipped)
OPSE0Q4010N
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
18
❈ Shape of charger and how to use
the charger may be different for
each manufacturer.
PRECAUTIONS FOR CHARGING
ELECTRIC VEHICLE
Charging Precautions
OPSE0Q4057N
■ Normal Charger
OPSE0Q4004
■ Quick Charger
WARNING - Fires caused
by dust or water
Do not connect the charging
cable connector plug to the
vehicle if there is water or dust
on the charging inlet.
Connecting while there is water
or dust on the charging cable
connector and plug may cause
a fire or electric shock.
WARNING - Interference
with electronic medical
devices
When using medical electric
devices such as an implantable
cardiac pacemaker, make sure
to ask the medical team and
manufacturer whether charging
your electric vehicle will impact
the operation of the medical
devices. In some instances,
electromagnetic waves that are
generated from the charger can
seriously impact medical elec-
tric devices such as an
implantable cardiac pacemaker.
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
19
• Comply with the following in order
to prevent electrical shock when
charging:
– Use a waterproof charger.
– Make sure to not touch the
charging connector and charg-
ing plug when your hand is wet.
Do not stand in water or snow
when connecting the charging
cable.
– Do not charge when there is
lightning.
– Do not charge when the charg-
ing connector and plug is wet.
PRECAUTIONS FOR CHARGING
ELECTRIC VEHICLE
WARNING - Touching the
charging connector
Do not to touch the charging
connector, charging plug, and
the charging inlet when con-
necting the cable to the charger
and the charging inlet on the
vehicle. Doing so may result in
electrocution.
WARNING - Charging
cable
• Immediately stop charging
when you find abnormal
symptoms (smell, smoke).
• Replace the charging cable if
the cable coating is damaged
to prevent electrical shock.
• When connecting or removing
the charging cable, make sure
to hold the charging connec-
tor handle and charging plug.
If you pull the cable itself
(without using the handle), the
internal wires may disconnect
or get damaged.This may lead
to electric shock or fire.
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
20
• Always keep the charging connec-
tor and charging plug in clean and
dry condition. Be sure to keep the
charging cable in a condition
where there is no water or mois-
ture.
• Make sure to use the designated
charger for charging the electric
vehicle. Using any other charger
may cause failure.
• Before charging the battery, turn
the vehicle [OFF].
• Be careful not to drop the charging
connector. The charging connec-
tor can be damaged.
PRECAUTIONS FOR CHARGING
ELECTRIC VEHICLE
WARNING - Cooling fan
Do not touch the cooling fan
while vehicle is charging. When
the vehicle is switched [OFF]
while charging, the cooling fan
inside the motor compartment
may automatically operate.
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
21
We recommend using normal charg-
ing for usual charging of the vehicle.
■■
How to Connect Normal
Charger
1. While the brake pedal is pressed,
engage the parking brake.
2. Turn OFF all switches, place the
shift lever in P (Park), and turn
OFF the vehicle.
3. Press the charging door open
switch [ ] to open the charging
door. Charging door open switch
can be operated only when vehi-
cle is turned off.
4. If you cannot open the charging
door due to freezing weather :
1) Remove any ice near the charg-
ing door.
2) Pull the emergency cable to
open the charging door.
(When the charging door does not
open, refer to “How to Unlock
Charging Door in Emergencies.”)
CHARGING ELECTRIC VEHICLE
(NORMAL CHARGE)
Normal Charge
OPSE0Q4057N
OPSE0Q4011
■ Normal Charger
❈❈
Shape of charger and how to use the charger may be different for each manufacturer.
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
22
5. Open the charging door and press
the normal charging inlet cover
release tab (1) to open the normal
charging inlet cover.
6. Before connecting the charging
connector, make sure the door
lock is released.
When the door is locked, the
charging connector lock system
will be triggered. And the charging
connector will not be connected.
7. Remove any dust on the charging
connector and charging inlet.
8. Hold the charging connector han-
dle and connect it to the vehicle
normal charging inlet. Push the
connector until you hear a "click-
ing" sound.
CHARGING ELECTRIC VEHICLE
(NORMAL CHARGE)
OPSE0Q4013OPSE0Q4012
CAUTION - Charging
Connector Door
To avoid damage to your vehi-
cle, do not attempt to connect
the charging connector to your
vehicle without first opening the
door to the charging connector.
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
23
9. Check if the charge indicator lamp
of the high voltage battery in the
instrument cluster is turned ON.
Charging is not done when the
charging indicator lamp is OFF.
When the charging connector is
not connected properly, reconnect
the charging cable to charge.
• You can start charging when the
Power button is in the OFF posi-
tion and the shift lever is in P
(Park). After charging has started,
you can use electrical compo-
nents such as the radio by press-
ing the Power button to the ACC or
ON position.
• If you move the shift lever from P
(Park) to R (Rear), N (Neutral), D
(Drive), charging stops immedi-
ately. If you want to start charging
again, place the shift lever to P
(Park) and press the Power button
to the OFF position. Unplug and
reconnect the charging cable to
start charging again.
10.After charging has started, the
estimated charging time is dis-
played on the instrument cluster
for about 1 minute.
If you open the driver seat door
while charging, the estimated
charging time is also displayed on
the instrument cluster for about 1
minute.
When reserved charging is set,
the estimated charging time is
displayed as “--" .
OPSE0Q4014
CHARGING ELECTRIC VEHICLE
(NORMAL CHARGE)
OPSE044044L
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
24
Depending on the condition and
durability of the high voltage battery,
charger specifications, and ambient
temperature, the time required for
charging the battery may vary.
11.You may prevent possible charg-
ing cable theft by taking the fol-
lowing steps. Lock the door after
the charging cable is connected,
by pressing the lock button on the
smart key or on the central door
lock switch.
When the door is locked, the
charging connector will become
locked and this will prevent possi-
ble theft.
So, after charging is complete,
you must release the door lock in
order to disconnect the charging
connector.
■■
Unlock Charging Door in
Emergency
If the charging door does not open
due to battery discharge and failure
of the electric wires, open the hood
and slightly pull the emergency cable
as shown above. The charging door
will then open.
CHARGING ELECTRIC VEHICLE
(NORMAL CHARGE)
OPSE0Q4016
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
25
■■
Emergency Release of the
Charging connector lock
system
Use this function if the charging con-
nector lock does not unlatch even
after the door lock has been
released. You can release the charg-
ing connector lock system by using
the emergency release lever.
Open the hood, and then fully lift the
charging connector emergency
release cover after turning it. Then,
pull on the emergency release lever
to disconnect the charging connector.
■■
Checking Charging Status
When charging the high voltage bat-
tery, the charge level can be checked
from outside the vehicle.
CHARGING ELECTRIC VEHICLE
(NORMAL CHARGE)
OPSE0Q4008
Operation of Charging
Indicator Lamp
Details
(1) (2) (3)
(OFF) (OFF) (OFF)
Not Charged
Blinking
(OFF) (OFF)
Charging
0~33%
(ON)
Blinking
(OFF)
34~66%
(ON) (ON)
Blinking 67~99%
(ON) (ON) (ON)
Charging complete
(100%)(turns OFF
in 3 seconds)
Blinking Blinking Blinking
Error while charging
/If charging cables
are connected when
the vehicle is in the
ready mode or the
POWER button is in
the ON position.
(OFF) (OFF)
Blinking
Charging 12 V aux-
iliary battery or
reserved air condi-
tioner is operating
(OFF)
Blinking
(OFF)
Reserved charging
is operating
(turns OFF after 3
minutes)
OPSE075034
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
26
■■
How to Disconnect Normal
Charger
1. Before disconnecting the charging
connector, make sure the door
lock is released. When the door is
locked, the charging connector
lock system will be triggered. And
the charging connector will not be
disconnected.
2. Hold the charging connector han-
dle and pull it while pressing the
release button (1).
3. Make sure to completely close the
normal charging inlet cover.
4. Make sure to completely close the
charging door.
CHARGING ELECTRIC VEHICLE
(NORMAL CHARGE)
OPSE0Q4034
OPSE0Q4015
CAUTION
In order to disconnect the
charging connector, release the
door lock to unlatch the charg-
ing connector lock system. If
not, the charging connector and
the vehicle's charging inlet may
be damaged.
CAUTION - Disconnecting
charging plug
When disconnecting the charg-
ing connector, do not try to dis-
connect it by force while not
pressing the release button. This
may damage the charging con-
nector and vehicle charging inlet.
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
27
You can charge at high speeds at pub-
lic charging stations. Refer to the
respective company's manual that is
provided for each quick charger type.
Battery performance and durability can
deteriorate if the quick charge is used
constantly in hot weather conditions
(heat wave, etc.)
Use of quick charge in hot weather
condition should be minimized in order
to help prolong high voltage battery life.
❈ Shape of charger and how to use
the charger may be different for
each manufacturer.
❈ If you use a quick charger when
the vehicle is already fully
charged, some quick chargers will
send out an error message. When
the vehicle is fully charged, do not
charge the vehicle.
■■
How to Connect Quick
Charger
1. While the brake pedal is pressed,
engage the parking brake.
2. Turn OFF all switches, place the
shift lever in P (Park), and turn
OFF the vehicle.
Quick Charge (if equipped)
CHARGING ELECTRIC VEHICLE
(QUICK CHARGE)
OPSE0Q4004
OPSE0Q4011
■ Quick Charger
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
28
3. Press the charging door open
switch [ ] to open the charging
door. Charging door open switch
can be operated only when vehi-
cle is turned off.
4. If you cannot open the charging
door due to freezing weather :
1) Remove any ice near the
charging door.
2) Pull the emergency cable to
open the charging door.
(When the charging door does not
open, refer to “How to Unlock
Charging Door in Emergencies.”)
5. Open the charging door and press
the quick charging inlet release
tab (1) to open the quick charging
inlet cover.
6. Remove any dust or foreign sub-
stances inside the charging con-
nector and charging inlet.
7. Hold the charging connector han-
dle and connect it to the vehicle
quick charging inlet. Push the con-
nector until you hear a "clicking"
sound.
CHARGING ELECTRIC VEHICLE
(QUICK CHARGE)
OPSE0Q4017 OPSE0Q4018
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
29
❈ Refer to the manual for each type
of quick charger for how to charge
and remove the charger.
❈ The shape of the charging con-
nector may vary depending on the
manufacturer.
8. Check if the charge indicator lamp
of the high voltage battery in the
instrument cluster is turned ON.
Charging is not done when the
charging indicator lamp is OFF.
When the charging connector is
not connected properly, reconnect
the charging cable to charge it
again.
9. If you charge a second time after
the initial quick charge (up to
83%), it will charge up to 94%.
(Takes an additional 15 minutes at
room temperature.)
Additional charging can be done
by removing the charging connec-
tor and then reconnecting, or the
quick charger screen is reinitial-
ized after completing the initial
charge (83%).
❈ If you use a quick charger when
the vehicle is already fully
charged, some quick chargers will
send out an error message. When
the vehicle is fully charged, do not
charge the vehicle.
CHARGING ELECTRIC VEHICLE
(QUICK CHARGE)
OPSE0Q4014
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
30
❈ During cold weather, quick charg-
ing may not be available to prevent
high voltage battery degradation.
• You can start charging when the
Power button is in the OFF posi-
tion and the shift lever is in P
(Park).
After charging has started, you
can use electrical components
such as the radio by pressing the
Power button to ACC or ON posi-
tion.
• If you move the shift lever from P
(Park) to R (Reverse), N (Neutral),
D (Drive), charging stops immedi-
ately. If you want to start charging
again, place the shift lever to P
(Park) and press the Power button
to the OFF position. Unplug and
reconnect the charging cable to
start charging again.
■■
Unlock Charging Door in
Emergency
If the charging door does not open
due to battery discharge and failure
of the electric wires, open the hood
and slightly pull the emergency cable
as shown above. The charging door
will then open.
■■
Checking Charging Status
When charging the high voltage bat-
tery, the charge level can be checked
from outside the vehicle.
OPSE0Q4016 OPSE0Q4008
CHARGING ELECTRIC VEHICLE
(QUICK CHARGE)
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
31
■■
How to Disconnect Quick
Charger
1. Remove the charging connector
when quick charging is completed,
or after you stop charging using
the quick charger. Refer to each
respective quick charger manual
for details about how to discon-
nect the charging connector.
CAUTION
Depending on the condition and
durability of the high voltage
battery, charger specifications,
and ambient temperature, the
time required for charging the
battery may vary.
Operation of Charging
Indicator Lamp
Details
(1) (2) (3)
(OFF) (OFF) (OFF)
Not Charged
Blinking
(OFF) (OFF)
Charging
0~33%
(ON)
Blinking
(OFF)
34~66%
(ON) (ON)
Blinking 67~94%
Blinking Blinking Blinking
Error while charging
/If charging cables
are connected when
the vehicle is in the
ready mode or the
POWER button is in
the ON position.
OPSE0Q4019
CHARGING ELECTRIC VEHICLE
(QUICK CHARGE)
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
32
2. Make sure to completely close the
quick charging inlet cover.
3. Make sure to completely close the
charging door.
CHARGING ELECTRIC VEHICLE
(QUICK CHARGE)
OPSE0Q4020
CAUTION - Disconnecting
charging plug
When disconnecting the charg-
ing connector, do not try to dis-
connect it by force while not
pressing the release button.
This may damage the charging
connector and vehicle charging
inlet.
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
33
Trickle Charge can be used when
Normal Charge or Quick Charge is
not available by using household
electricity.
■■
How to Connect Portable
Charging Cable
(ICCB: In-Cable Control Box)
1. Connect the plug to a household
electric outlet.
2. Check if every LED lamp on the
control box is turned on for 0.5
seconds. Then, check if the power
lamp (green) turns ON.
Trickle Charge
CHARGING ELECTRIC VEHICLE
(TRICKLE CHARGE)
OPSE0Q4021 OPSE0Q4022N
Charging Connector
Charging Cable
Control Box
Code and Plug
(code set)
Plug
Electric Outlet
OPSE0Q4023
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
34
3. While the brake pedal is pressed,
engage the parking brake.
4. Turn OFF all switches, place the
shift lever in P (Park), and turn
OFF the vehicle.
5. Press the charging door open
switch [ ] to open the charging
door. Charging door open switch
can be operated only when vehi-
cle is turned off.
6. If you cannot open the charging
door due to freezing weather :
1) Remove any ice near the charg-
ing door.
2) Pull the emergency cable to
open the charging door.
(When the charging door does not
open, refer to “How to Unlock
Charging Door in Emergencies.”)
7. Open the charging door and press
the normal charging inlet release
tab (1) to open the normal charg-
ing inlet cover.
8. Before connecting the charging
connector, make sure the door
lock is released.
When the door is locked, the
charging connector lock system
will be triggered. And the charging
connector will not be connected.
CHARGING ELECTRIC VEHICLE
(TRICKLE CHARGE)
OPSE0Q4011
OPSE0Q4012
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
35
9. Open the protective cover of the
charging connector and remove
any dust on the charging connec-
tor and charging inlet.
10.Hold the charging connector han-
dle and connect it to the vehicle
normal charging inlet. Push the
connector until you hear a "click-
ing" sound.
11.Charging starts automatically.
Check if the power lamp and
charging lamp (orange) are ON.
CAUTION - Charging
Connector Door
To avoid damage to your vehi-
cle, do not attempt to connect
the charging connector to your
vehicle without first opening the
door to the charging connector.
OPSE0Q4013 OPSE0Q4044
CHARGING ELECTRIC VEHICLE
(TRICKLE CHARGE)
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
36
12.Check if the charge indicator
lamp of the high voltage battery in
the instrument cluster is turned
ON. Charging is not done when
the charging indicator lamp is
OFF.
When the charging connector is
not connected properly, recon-
nect the charging cable to charge
it again.
• You can start charging when the
Power button is in the OFF posi-
tion and the shift lever is in P
(Park).
After charging has started, you
can use electrical components
such as the radio by pressing the
Power button to ACC or ON posi-
tion.
• If you move the shift lever from P
(Park) to R (Reverse), N (Neutral),
D (Drive), charging stops immedi-
ately. If you want to start charging
again, place the shift lever to P
(Park) and press the Power button
to the OFF position. Unplug and
reconnect the charging cable to
start charging again.
13.After charging has started, the
estimated charging time is dis-
played on the instrument cluster
for about 1 minute.
If you open the driver seat door
while charging, the estimated
charging time is also displayed on
the instrument cluster for about 1
minute.
When reserved charging is set,
the estimated charging time is
displayed as “--" .
CHARGING ELECTRIC VEHICLE
(TRICKLE CHARGE)
OPSE0Q4014
OPSE044044L
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
37
Depending on the condition and
durability of the high voltage battery,
charger specifications, and ambient
temperature, the time required for
charging the battery may vary.
14.You may prevent possible charg-
ing cable theft by taking the fol-
lowing steps. Lock the door after
the charging cable is connected,
by pressing the lock button on the
smart key or on the central door
lock switch.
When the door is locked, the
charging connector will become
locked and this will prevent possi-
ble theft.
So, after charging is complete,
you must release the door lock in
order to disconnect the charging
connector.
■■
Unlock Charging Door in
Emergency
If the charging door does not open
due to battery discharge and failure
of the electric wires, open the hood
and slightly pull the emergency cable
as shown above. The charging door
will then open.
CHARGING ELECTRIC VEHICLE
(TRICKLE CHARGE)
OPSE0Q4016
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
38
■■
Emergency Release of the
Charging connector lock
system
Use this function if the charging con-
nector lock does not unlatch even
after the door lock has been
released. You can release the charg-
ing connector lock system by using
the emergency release lever.
Open the hood, and then fully lift the
charging connector emergency
release cover after turning it. Then,
pull on the emergency release lever
to disconnect the charging connector.
■■
Checking Charging Status
When charging the high voltage bat-
tery, the charge level can be checked
from outside the vehicle.
CHARGING ELECTRIC VEHICLE
(TRICKLE CHARGE)
OPSE0Q4008
Operation of Charging
Indicator Lamp
Details
(1) (2) (3)
(OFF) (OFF) (OFF)
Not Charged
Blinking
(OFF) (OFF)
Charging
0~33%
(ON)
Blinking
(OFF)
34~66%
(ON) (ON)
Blinking 67~99%
(ON) (ON) (ON)
Charging complete
(100%)(turns OFF
in 3 seconds)
Blinking Blinking Blinking
Error while charging
/If charging cables
are connected when
the vehicle is in the
ready mode or the
POWER button is in
the ON position.
(OFF) (OFF)
Blinking
Charging 12 V aux-
iliary battery or
reserved air condi-
tioner is operating
(OFF)
Blinking
(OFF)
Reserved charging
is operating
(turns OFF after 3
minutes)
OPSE075034
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
39
Charger Status
Control Box
ON/OFF Status
Power Charge Fault Status / Diagnosis / Countermeasure
Initial Preparation Mode
OPSE0Q4045
When applying power to the initial ICCB wall
Charging Preparation
Mode
OPSE0Q4046
--
When ICCB charging connector is not connected
to the vehicle, or connected but charging status
is in Standby mode
Charging Mode
OPSE0Q4048
-
Charging
Failure
Detects Leakage
OPSE0Q4047
-
Stop charging immediately when a leak is detect-
ed on the ICCB output terminal (we recommend
that you contact an authorized Kia dealer)
ICCB Failure
-
When a failure is detected inside the ICCB (we
recommend that you contact an authorized Kia
dealer)
Category Lamp ON Lamp OFF Blinking
LED Status
-
CHARGING ELECTRIC VEHICLE
(TRICKLE CHARGE)
■■
Charging Status Indicator Lamp for Portable Charging Cable
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
40
■■
How to Disconnect Portable
Charging Cable
(ICCB: In-Cable Control Box)
1. Before disconnecting the charging
connector, make sure the door
lock is released.
When the door is locked, the charg-
ing connector lock system will be
triggered. And the charging con-
nector will not be disconnected.
2. Hold the charging connector han-
dle and pull it while pressing the
release button (1).
CHARGING ELECTRIC VEHICLE
(TRICKLE CHARGE)
OPSE0Q4034
CAUTION - Disconnecting
charging plug
When disconnecting the charg-
ing connector, do not try to dis-
connect it by force while not
pressing the release button. This
may damage the charging con-
nector and vehicle charging inlet.
CAUTION
In order to disconnect the
charging connector, release the
door lock to unlatch the charg-
ing connector lock system.
If not, the charging connector
and the vehicle's charging inlet
may be damaged.
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
41
3. Make sure to completely close the
normal charging inlet cover.
4. Make sure to completely close the
charging door.
5. Disconnect the plug from the
household electric outlet. Do not
pull the cable when disconnecting
the plug.
6. Close the protective cover for the
charging connector so that foreign
substances do not flow into the
terminal.
7. Put the charging cable inside the
cable compartment to protect it.
CHARGING ELECTRIC VEHICLE
(TRICKLE CHARGE)
OPSE0Q4022N
Plug
Electric Outlet
OPSE0Q4015
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
42
■■
Precautions for Portable
Charging Cable
(ICCB: In-Cable Control Box)
• Use the portable charging cable
that is certified by Kia Motors.
• Do not try to repair, disassemble,
or adjust the portable charging
cable.
• Do not use an extension cord or
adapter.
• Stop using immediately when fail-
ure occurs.
• Do not touch the plug and charg-
ing connector with wet hands.
• Do not touch the terminal part of
the normal charging connector
and the normal charging inlet on
the vehicle.
• Do not connect the charging con-
nector to voltage that does not
comply with regulations.
• Do not use the portable charging
cable if it is worn out, exposed, or
there exists any type of damage
on the portable charging cable.
• If the ICCB case and normal
charging connector is damaged,
cracked, or the wires are exposed
in any way, do not use the portable
charging cable.
• Do not let kids operate or touch
the portable charging cable.
• Keep the control box free of water.
• Keep the normal charging connec-
tor or plug terminal free of foreign
substances.
• Do not step on the cable or cord.
Do not pull the cable or cord and
do not twist or bend it.
• Do not charge when there is light-
ning.
• Do not drop the control box or
place a heavy object on the con-
trol box.
• Do not place an object that can
generate high temperatures near
the charger when charging.
• Charging with the worn out or
damaged household electric outlet
can result in a risk of electric
shock. If you are in doubt to the
household electric outlet condi-
tion, have it checked by licensed
electrician and charge again.
• Stop using the portable charging
cable immediately if the house-
hold electric outlet or any compo-
nents is overheated or you notice
burnt odors.
CHARGING ELECTRIC VEHICLE
(TRICKLE CHARGE)
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
43
1. With the smart key, sit in the dri-
ver's seat.
2. Fasten the safety belt before start-
ing the vehicle.
3. Make sure to engage the parking
brake for your safety.
4. Turn OFF all electrical devices.
5. Make sure the accelerator and
brake pedal have clearance with
your right foot.
6. Make sure to press and hold the
brake pedal.
7. While pressing the brake pedal,
place the shift lever in P (Park).
Vehicle only starts when the shift
lever is placed in P (Park).
8. Press and hold the brake while
pressing the POWER button.
9. When (indicator lamp) is ON,
you can drive the vehicle.
When (indicator lamp) is OFF,
you cannot drive the vehicle. Start
the vehicle again.
10.Press and hold the brake pedal
and place the shift lever in the
desired position.
How to Start the Vehicle
DRIVING ELECTRIC VEHICLE
OPSE0Q4049
OPSE0Q4050
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
44
❈ For vehicles with Shift Lock, you
have to press the POWER button
to the ON position, press and
hold the brake pedal, then press
the unlock button on the shift
lever while it is placed in P (Park)
in order to move the shift lever to
R (Reverse).
• While the charging cable is con-
nected, you cannot use the shift
lever for safety reasons.
11.Release the parking brake and
slowly release the brake pedal.
Check if the vehicle slowly moves
forward, then press the accelera-
tor pedal.
1. Hold down the brake pedal while
the vehicle is parked.
2. While pressing the brake pedal,
place the shift lever in P (Park).
3. While pressing the brake pedal,
engage the parking brake.
4. While pressing the brake pedal,
press the POWER button and stop
the vehicle.
5. Check if (indicator lamp) is
turned OFF on the instrument
cluster.
When (indicator lamp) is ON
and the shift lever is in a position
other than P (Park), the driver can
accidently press the accelerator
pedal, causing the vehicle to move
unexpectedly.
How to Stop the Vehicle
DRIVING ELECTRIC VEHICLE
OPSE0Q4051
OPSE0Q4052
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
45
The Pedestrian Warning System
generates engine sound for pedestri-
ans to hear vehicle sound because
there is little sound while the Electric
Vehicle (EV) is operating.
If the vehicle is moving at a slow
speed, the Pedestrian Warning
System will be operated.
- When the reduction gear is shifted
to [R], the Pedestrian Warning
System will be operated immedi-
ately.
• The vehicle generates little sound.
Be aware of your driving environ-
ment and drive safely.
• After you park the vehicle or while
you are waiting at a traffic light,
check whether there are kids or
obstacles around the vehicle.
• Check if there is something behind
the vehicle when driving in
reverse. Pedestrians may not hear
the sound of the vehicle.
Active ECO helps improve energy
efficiency by controlling certain
motor and climate contol system
operating parameters. Energy effi-
ciency depends on the driver's driv-
ing habit and road condition.
• When the Active ECO button is
pressed the ECO indicator (green)
will illuminate to show that the
Active ECO is operating.
• When the Active ECO is activated,
it will remain on until the Active
ECO button is pressed again.
Active ECO does not turn off when
the vehicle is restarted. To turn off
Active ECO, press the Active ECO
button again.
• If Active ECO is turned off, the sys-
tem will return to normal mode.
Pedestrian Warning System Active ECO system
DRIVING ELECTRIC VEHICLE
OPSE0Q4043N
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
46
On average, a vehicle can drive
about 93miles (148km) when the
high voltage battery is 100%
charged.
Under certain circumstances where
the air conditioner/heater is ON, the
distance to empty is impacted,
resulting in a possible distance range
from 62~143mi. (100~230km). When
using the heater during cold weather
or driving at high speed, the high
voltage battery consumes a lot more
electricity. This may reduce the dis-
tance to empty significantly.
After “---” has been displayed, the vehi-
cle can drive an additional 3.1~9.3mi.
(5~15km) (depending on driving
speed, heater/air conditioner, weather,
driving style, and other factors).
Distance to empty that is displayed
on the instrument cluster after com-
pleting a recharge may vary signifi-
cantly depending on previous operat-
ing patterns.
When previous driving patterns
include high speed driving, resulting
in the driving battery using more
electricity than usual, the estimated
distance to empty is reduced. When
the high voltage battery uses a little
electricity in ECO mode, the estimat-
ed distance to empty increases.
Distance to empty may depend on
many factors such as the charge
amount of the high voltage battery,
weather, temperature, durability of
the battery, geographical features,
and driving style.
Natural degradation may occur with
the high voltage battery depending
on the number of years the vehicle is
used. This may reduce the distance
to empty.
Range
DRIVING ELECTRIC VEHICLE
OPSE0Q4026N
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
47
• If you operate the air conditioner
/heater too much, the driving battery
uses too much electricity. This may
reduce the distance to empty.
Therefore, it is recommended that
you set the cabin temperature to
(73°F (23°C)) AUTO. This setting
that has been certified by various
assessment tests to maintain opti-
mal energy consumption rates while
keeping the temperature fresh.
Turn OFF the heater and air con-
ditioner if you do not need them.
• Press and hold the accelerator
pedal to maintain speed and drive
economically.
• Gradually press and release the
accelerator pedal when accelerat-
ing or decelerating.
• Always maintain specified tire
pressures.
• Do not use unnecessary electrical
components while driving.
• Do not load unnecessary items in
the vehicle trunk.
• Do not mount parts that may
increase air resistance.
It shows the energy consumption
rate of the vehicle and the
charge/discharge status of the
regenerative brakes.
• POWER : It shows the energy
consumption rate of the vehicle
when driving uphill or accelerat-
ing. The more electric energy is
used, the higher the gauge level.
• ECO GUIDE : It shows the energy
consumption rate during normal
driving condition.
• CHARGE : It shows the charging
status of the battery when it is
being charged by the regenerative
brakes (decelerating or driving on
a downhill road).The more electric
energy is charged, the lower the
gauge level.
Motor Operation Gauge
DRIVING ELECTRIC VEHICLE
OPSE044302
Tips for Improving Distance
to Empty
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
48
State of charge (SOC) gauge
for high voltage battery
• It shows the charging status of the
high voltage battery.
[MIN] position on the indicator
indicates that there is not enough
energy in the high voltage battery.
[MAX] position indicates that the
driving battery is fully charged.
• When driving on highways or
motorways, make sure to check in
advance if the driving battery is
charged enough.
When there are 4 gauge bars (near
the "MIN" area) on the high voltage
charge indicator, the warning lamp
turns ON to alert you of the battery
level.
When the warning lamp turns ON, the
vehicle can drive an additional
12.4~24.8 miles (20~40 km) (depend-
ing on the driving speed, heater/air
conditioner, weather, driving style, and
other factors). Charging is required.
When there are 1-2 gauge bars left
for the high voltage battery, the vehi-
cle speed is limited and then eventu-
ally the vehicle will be turned OFF.
Charge the vehicle immediately.
OPSE044305
DRIVING ELECTRIC VEHICLE
OPSE044303
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
49
■■
Low Battery
When the high voltage battery level
reaches below 20%, this warning
message illuminates.
In this case, the warning lamp on the
instrument cluster ( ) turns ON
simultaneously.
Charge the high voltage battery
immediately.
■■
Low Battery. Charge imme-
diately
When the high voltage battery level
reaches below 10%, this warning
message illuminates .
In this case, the warning lamp on the
instrument cluster ( ) turns ON
simultaneously and the distance to
empty gauge will be displayed as “---”.
Charge the high voltage battery
immediately.
■■
Charge immediately. Power
limited
When the high voltage battery level
reaches below 7%, this warning
message illuminates.
In this case, the warning lamp on the
instrument cluster ( ) and the
power down warning lamp ( )turn
ON simultaneously and the distance
to empty gauge will be displayed as
“---”.
The vehicle’s power will be reduced
to minimize the energy consumption
of the high voltage battery. Charge
the battery immediately.
Warning Message on LCD Display
(related to charge)
DRIVING ELECTRIC VEHICLE
OPSE044213L
OPSE044214L OPSE044215L
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
50
■■
Power limited
In the following cases, this warning
message illuminates when the vehi-
cle’s power is limited for the safety.
– When the high voltage battery is
below a certain level, or voltage is
decreasing.
– When the temperature of the
motor or high voltage battery is
too high or too low.
– When there is a problem with the
cooling system or a failure that
may interrupt normal driving.
• When this warning messages is
displayed, do not accelerate or
start the vehicle suddenly.
• Charge the battery immediately
when the high voltage battery
level is not enough.
■■
Unplug vehicle to start
When the vehicle is started while the
charging connector is connected,
this warning message illuminates.
Remove the charging connector and
start the vehicle.
DRIVING ELECTRIC VEHICLE
OPSE044264L
OPSE044223L
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
51
■■
Charging Door Open
When the vehicle is started while the
charging door is opened, this warn-
ing message illuminates. Make sure
to close the charging door after
charging is complete.
■■
Charger Error!
This message is displayed when the
charging failed by external normal
charger error.
You should change and charge with
the other external charger immediately.
■■
Quick Charger Error!
This message is displayed when the
charging failed by external quick
charger error.
You should change and charge with
the other external charger immediately.
DRIVING ELECTRIC VEHICLE
OPSE044224L
OPSE045323L
OPSE045324L
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
52
DRIVING ELECTRIC VEHICLE
■■
Ready indica-
tor light
This warning light illuminates :
When the vehicle is ready to drive.
– ON: Normal driving is available.
– OFF: Normal driving is not avail-
able, or a failure has occurred.
– Blinking: Emergency driving.
When ready indicator light is OFF or
blinking, there is a failure. In this
case, have your vehicle inspected by
an authorized Kia dealer
■■
Service
Warning Light
This warning light illuminates :
• Once you set the POWER Button
to the ON position.
– It illuminates for approximately 3
seconds
• There is a failure with a sensor,
actuator, or the electric compres-
sor for the air conditioner related
to the electric vehicle control sys-
tem. When the warning light turns
ON while driving, or does not turn
OFF after vehicle has started,
have your vehicle inspected by an
authorized Kia dealer.
■■
Power Down
Warning Light
This warning light illuminates :
• when the power is limited for the
safety of the electric vehicle.
- When the high voltage battery
level is below a certain threshold,
the voltage is decreasing, the
temperature of the motor or driv-
ing battery is too high or too low,
there is a failure in the cooling
system, or a failure that is dis-
rupting normal driving.
Warning Lamp and Indicator Lamp
(related to electric vehicle)
WPSE002G WPSE001Y
WPSE-301Y
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
53
■■
Charging Indicator Light
This warning light illuminates :
This indicator light shows the charg-
ing status of the high voltage battery.
When it is charging, the red light
turns ON. When charging is com-
plete, the green light turns ON.
■■
High voltage
battery level
warning light
This warning light illuminates :
• When the high voltage battery
level is not enough.
When the warning light turns ON,
Charge the battery immediately
■■
Regenerative Brake Warning
Light
This warning light illuminates :
• The regenerative brake does not
operate and the brake does not
perform well. This causes the
brake warning lamp (red) and
regenerative brake warning lamp
(yellow) to turn ON simultaneously.
In this case, drive safely and have
your vehicle inspected by an
authorized Kia dealer.
In this case, operation of the brake
pedal may be more difficult than
normal and the braking distance
can increase.
DRIVING ELECTRIC VEHICLE
WPSE-302GWPSE-302R
■ Charging ■ Charging Complete
WPS-128YW-128R
WPSE-303Y
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
54
■■
ECOMINDER
®
indicator
Active ECO system
This indicator light illuminates:
• The Active ECO system alw
ays
remembers the previous status
before the vehicle was turned off.
• When the Active ECO button is
pressed the ECOMINDER
®
indica-
tor (green) will illuminate to show
that the Active ECO is operating.
To turn off the Active ECO system,
press the button again.
For more details, refer to "Active
ECO systme" in the chapter 5 or
"Electric Vehicle Guide".
DRIVING ELECTRIC VEHICLE
ECO
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
55
When a vehicle accident occurs,
move the vehicle to a safe place, turn
OFF the vehicle and remove the aux-
iliary battery (12 V) terminal to pre-
vent high voltage electricity from
flowing. Remove the auxiliary battery
(12 V) terminal and turn it OFF.
When you suspect leakage of inflam-
mable gas and other harmful gases,
open the windows and evacuate to a
safe place. If any leaked fluid comes
in contact with your eyes or skin,
immediately clean the affected area
thoroughly with tap water or saline
solution and have doctors inspect it
as soon as possible.
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS FOR
ELECTRIC VEHICLE
Responding to Vehicle Accidents in your
Electric Vehicle
WARNING - Exposed
Wires & Electrical
Components
Do not touch electric wires that
may become exposed from
inside or outside the vehicle,
high voltage electric wires
(orange), connectors and all
electric components and
devices. Doing so may result in
electric shock and lead to
injuries.
WARNING - Damaged
battery
Do not touch harmful gas and
electrolytes which may leak if
the high voltage battery is dam-
aged in an accident.
WARNING - Vehicle fires
• If a vehicle fire occurs, use a
powder extinguisher for an
electric fire. If there is no pow-
der extinguisher for the electric
fire, use plenty of water to put
out the fire. If you do not use
enough water or use an inap-
propriate fire extinguisher, you
might get injured due to electric
shock.
• When a vehicle fire occurs due
to the battery, there is a risk of a
second fire. Contact the fire
department when towing the
vehicle.
OPSE0Q4031
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
56
If the vehicle is flooded with water,
immediately turn OFF the vehicle
and evacuate to a safe place.
Contact the fire department or an
authorized Kia dealer.
If towing is required, lift all four
wheels off the ground and tow the
vehicle. If you must tow the vehicle
using only two wheels, lift the front
wheels off the ground and tow the
vehicle.
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS FOR
ELECTRIC VEHICLE
OPSE0Q4054
• Flatbed Towing
• Tires Locked Towing
Dolly
Dolly
• Tires Lock
ed Towing
WARNING
If you cannot put out the fire
immediately, the high voltage
battery may explode. Evacuate
to a safe place and do not let
other people approach the site.
Contact the fire department and
notify them of an electric vehi-
cle fire.
CAUTION
If you tow the vehicle while the
front wheels are touching the
ground, the vehicle motor may
generate electricity and the
motor components may be
damaged or a fire may occur.
OPSE0Q4037
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
57
• When you paint or apply heat
treatment to the vehicle as a result
of an accident, the performance of
the high voltage battery can be
reduced.
If heat treatment is required, we
recommend that you contact an
authorized Kia dealer.
• An air inlet is installed under the
front seat for cooling the driving
battery. Do not block the air inlet
with a foreign substance.
Other Precautions for
Electric Vehicle
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS FOR
ELECTRIC VEHICLE
OPSE0Q4053
CAUTION - Non-genuine
parts
Do not use, remodel, or install
non-genuine parts.
This may damage the electric
power system.
WARNING - Damaging
Battery
When you clean the motor com-
partment, do not use high pres-
sure water to wash. This may
cause an electric shock due to a
discharge in high voltage elec-
tricity.
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
58
Kia Motors 'Soul Electric Vehicle' uses
eco-friendly bioplastics, fiber, and
board for the interior materials and
has passed close inspection and vali-
dation. The plastic is validated
20,450g biomaterial where 9% is plant
derived carbon (14C). (Leather Seat)
The plastic is validated 23,942g bio-
material where 10% is plant derived
carbon (14C). (Fabric Seat). The
plastic is validated 19,890g biomate-
rial where 9% is plant derived carbon
(14C). (Sun-roof, Leather Seat)
The plastic is validated 23,382g bio-
material where 10% is plant derived
carbon (14C). (Sun-roof, Fabric Seat).
It has been awarded the UL Bio envi-
ronmental friendliness mark for the
first time in vehicle industry.
The 'Soul Electric Vehicle' not only
uses eco-friendly interior materials,
but it also does not emit exhaust
gases, using regenerative biomass
to prevent the generation of carbon
dioxide (a major cause of global
warming). This also helps curb the
depletion of oil resources.
Environmental Friendliness
Mark
Service Plug
OPSE0Q4042
OPSE0Q4033L
Leather Seat
Fabric Seat
ENVIRONMENTAL
FRIENDLINESS MARK
WARNING - Service plug
Do not touch the service plug
installed at the rear seat
footrest. The service plug is
designed to block high voltage
electricity when repairing the
vehicle. If you are careless
when handling the service plug,
an electric shock may occur.
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
59
ENVIRONMENTAL
FRIENDLINESS MARK
List of Parts with Environmental
Friendliness Mark
NO. NO.
Bio Materials
Part
1 SKIN-C/PAD MAIN
2 SKIN - DR TRIM UPR
3 NON WOVEN - HEADLINER
4 THREAD - FLOOR CARPET
5 THREAD - FLOOR MAT
6
FLOOR CONSOLE - MAIN, REAR
FLOOR CONSOLE - UPPER
7
PILLAR TRIM - FRONT
PILLAR TRIM - REAR
PILLAR TRIM - CENTER LWR
8
DOOR SCUFF - FRONT
DOOR SCUFF - REAR
9 DOOR TRIM - FRONT LWR, REAR MAIN
10 COWL SIDE TRIM
11 SKIN-SUNVISOR
12 COVERING SHELF
13 REAR TRANVERS TRIM
14 LUGG SIDE TRIM
15 SEAT FABRIC
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
Introduction
21
This vehicle is equipped with an
event data recorder (EDR). The
main purpose of an EDR is to
record, in certain crash or near
crash-like situations, such as an
air bag deployment or hitting a
road obstacle, data that will assist
in understanding how a vehicle's
systems performed. The EDR is
designed to record data related to
vehicle dynamics and safety sys-
tems for a short period of time,
typically 30 seconds or less. The
EDR in this vehicle is designed to
record such data as:
* How various systems in your
vehicle were operating;
* Whether or not the driver and
passenger safety belts were
buckled/ fastened;
* How far (if at all) the driver was
depressing the accelerator
and/or brake pedal; and,
* How fast the vehicle was travel-
ing.
These data can help provide a bet-
ter understanding of the circum-
stances in which crashes and
injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data
are recorded by your vehicle only
if a non-trivial crash situation
occurs; no data are recorded by
the EDR under normal driving con-
ditions and no personal data (e.g.,
name, gender, age, and crash loca-
tion) are recorded. However, other
parties, such as law enforcement,
could combine the EDR data with
the type of personally identifying
data routinely acquired during a
crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR,
special equipment is required, and
access to the vehicle or the EDR is
needed. In addition to the vehicle
manufacturer, other parties, such
as law enforcement, that have the
special equipment, can read the
information if they have access to
the vehicle or the EDR.
Your rights with respect to the
information discussed above may
vary from state to state. In some
states, such information is consid-
ered private, is exclusively owned
by the owner of the motor vehicle,
and is not retrievable or usable by
another person or entity.
VEHICLE DATA COLLECTION AND EVENT DATA RECORDERS
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
Your vehicle at a glance
Exterior overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Interior overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Instrument panel overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Motor room compartment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
2
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
Your vehicle at a glance
22
EXTERIOR OVERVIEW
1. Hood .....................................................4-22
2. Head lamp...................................4-83, 7-64
3. Fog lamp .....................................4-86, 7-67
4. Wheel and tire ......................................7-36
5. Outside rearview mirror........................4-36
6. Front windshield wiper blades .....4-87, 7-29
7. Windows ...............................................4-17
8. Parking assist system..........................4-76
9. Charging door ...................EV Guide-21, 24
OPSE014001
■ Front view
❈ The actual shape may differ from the illustration.
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
23
Your vehicle at a glance
10. Door locks...........................................4-11
11. Rear combination lamp.......................7-68
12. High mounted stop lamp ....................7-70
13. Rear window wiper blade..........4-87, 7-31
14. Tailgate................................................4-15
15. Rear camera display...........................4-80
16. Antenna ............................................4-127
17. Parking assist system.........................4-76
OPSE014002
■ Rear view
❈ The actual shape may differ from the illustration.
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
Your vehicle at a glance
42
INTERIOR OVERVIEW
1. Inside door handle ................................4-12
2. Power window switch ............................4-17
3. Central door lock switch........................4-13
4. Power window lock switch.....................4-20
5. Outside rearview mirror control.............4-37
6. Outside rearview mirror folding.............4-38
7. Instrument panel illumination control
switch ....................................................4-41
8. Charging door open button......EV Guide-21
9. Charging timer OFF button......EV Guide-16
10. Steering wheel heater On/Off button ..4-32
11. ESC Off button....................................5-24
12. Speaker lighting ................................4-130
13. Steering wheel ....................................4-30
14. Tilt and telescopic steering control
lever.....................................................4-31
15. Inner panel fuse panel ........................7-53
16. Hood release lever..............................4-22
17. Seat.......................................................3-2
OPSE014004
❈ The actual shape may differ from the illustration.
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
25
Your vehicle at a glance
INSTRUMENT PANEL OVERVIEW
1. Audio remote control buttons..............4-128
2. Driver’s front air bag .............................3-46
3. Horn......................................................4-32
4. Instrument cluster.................................4-40
5.Wiper and washer control lever.............4-87
6. Cruise control button ............................5-32
7. POWER button .......................................5-5
8. AVN(Audio/Video/Navigation)
9. Hazard warning flasher...........................6-2
10. Climate control system .......................4-94
11. Front seat warmer /
Seat air ventilation.................4-119, 4-121
12. Power outlet......................................4-122
13. Shift Lever...........................................5-11
14. Center console storage box..............4-116
15. Glove box..........................................4-116
16. Passenger’s front air bag....................3-46
17. Electric parking brake.........................5-18
18. Parking assist system button..............4-76
19. Active ECO button..............................5-10
OPSE014003N
❈ The actual shape may differ from the illustration.
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
Your vehicle at a glance
62
MOTOR ROOM COMPARTMENT
OPSE015005
1. Coolant reservoir ..................................7-21
2. Brake fluid reservoir ..............................7-24
3. Fuse box................................................7-51
4. Positive battery terminal........................7-33
5. Negative battery terminal ......................7-33
6. Radiator cap..........................................7-23
7. Windshield washer fluid reservoir ........7-26
❈ The actual motor compartment in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
Safety features of your vehicle
Seats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
• Front seat adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
• Seatback pocket. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
• Rear seat adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
• Seat belt restraint system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
• Pre-tensioner seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
• Seat belt precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
• Care of seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
Child restraint system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
• Using a child restraint system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27
• Tether anchor system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31
• Lower anchor system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32
Air bag -
advanced supplemental restraint system. . . . . . 3-34
• How does the air bag system operate . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35
• Do not installing a child restraint on a front
passenger's seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37
• Air bag warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37
• SRS components and functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38
• Occupant Detection System (ODS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41
• Driver's and passenger's front air bag . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46
• Side air bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-49
• Curtain air bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-50
• Inflation and non-inflation conditions of the air bag. 3-51
• SRS Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-56
• Adding equipment to or modifying your
air bag-equipped vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-57
• Air bag warning label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-57
3
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
33
Safety features of your vehicle
WARNING - Uprighting
seat
Do not press the release lever
on a manual seatback without
holding and controlling the
seatback. The seatback will
spring upright possibly impact-
ing you or other passengers.
WARNING - Loose
objects
Do not place anything in the dri-
ver's foot well or under the front
seats. Loose objects in the dri-
ver's foot area could interfere
with the operation of the foot
pedals.
WARNING - Driver respon-
sibility for passengers
The driver must advise the pas-
senger to keep the seatback in
an upright position whenever
the vehicle is in motion. If a seat
is reclined during an accident,
the occupant's hips may slide
under the lap portion of the seat
belt, applying great force to the
unprotected abdomen.
1KMN3662
WARNING - Driver’s seat
• Never attempt to adjust the
seat while the vehicle is mov-
ing. This could result in loss
of control of your vehicle.
• Do not allow anything to inter-
fere with the normal position of
the seatback and seatback
adjustment.
• Sit as far back as possible from
the steering wheel while still
maintaining comfortable con-
trol of the your vehicle. A dis-
tance of at least 10" from your
chest to the steering wheel is
recommended. Failure to do so
can result in airbag inflation
injuries to the driver.
WARNING - Seat cushion
Occnpants should never sit on
aftermarket seat cushions or sit-
ting cushions. The passenger's
hips may slide under the lap por-
tion of the seat belt during an
accident or a sudden stop.
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
Safety features of your vehicle
43
WARNING - Unexpected
Seat Movement
After adjusting a manual seat,
always check that it is locked by
shifting your weight to the front
and back. Sudden or unexpect-
ed movement of the driver's
seat could cause you to lose
control of the vehicle.
WARNING - Rear
seatbacks
Always lock the rear seatback
before driving. Failure to do so
could result in passengers or
objects being thrown forward
injuring vehicle occupants.
WARNING - Luggage and
Cargo
Do not stack pile or stack lug-
gage or cargo higher than the
seatback in the cargo area. In an
accident the cargo could strike
and injury a passenger. If
objects are large, heavy or must
be piled, they must be secured
in the cargo area.
WARNING - Seat
adjustment
• Do not adjust the seat while
wearing seat belts. Moving the
seat forward will cause strong
pressure on the abdomen.
• Do not place your hand near
the seat bottom or seat track
while adjusting the seat. Your
hand could get caught in the
seat mechanism.
WARNING - Cargo Area
Do not allow passengers to ride
in the cargo area under any cir-
cumstance. The cargo area is
solely for the purpose of trans-
porting luggage or cargo.
WARNING - Small
Objects
Use extreme caution when pick-
ing small objects trapped under
the seats or between the seat
and the center console. Your
hands might be cut or injured
by the sharp edges of the seats
mechanism.
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
35
Safety features of your vehicle
Front seat adjustment
Forward and backward
To move the seat forward or back-
ward:
1. Pull the seat slide adjustment
lever up and hold it.
2. Slide the seat to the position you
desire.
3. Release the lever and make sure
the seat is locked in place.
Adjust the seat before driving, and
make sure the seat is locked securely
by trying to move forward and back-
ward without using the lever. If the
seat moves, it is not locked properly.
Seatback angle
To recline the seatback:
1. Lean forward slightly and lift up the
seatback recline lever.
2. Carefully lean back on the seat
and adjust the seatback of the
seat to the position you desire.
3. Release the lever and make sure
the seatback is locked in place.
(The lever MUST return to its orig-
inal position for the seatback to
lock.)
Seat height (for driver’s seat)
To change the height of the seat,
push the lever upwards or down-
wards.
• To lower the seat cushion, push the
lever down several times.
• To raise the seat cushion, pull the
lever up several times.
OPS033002
OPS033003 OPS033004
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
Safety features of your vehicle
63
Headrest (for front seat)
The driver's and front passenger's
seats are equipped with a headrest
for the occupant's safety and comfort.
The headrest not only provides com-
fort for the driver and front passenger,
but also helps protect the head and
neck in the event of a rear collision.
For maximum effectiveness in case of
an accident, the headrest should be
adjusted so the middle of the headrest
is at the same height of the center of
gravity of an occupant's head.
Generally, the center of gravity of most
people's head is similar with the height
of the top of their eyes. Also, adjust the
headrest as close to your head as pos-
sible. For this reason, the use of a
cushion that holds the body away from
the seatback is not recommended.
Forward and rearward adjustment
The headrest may be adjusted for-
ward to 4 different positions by
pulling the headrest forward to the
desired detent. To adjust the head-
rest to it’s furthest rearward position,
pull it fully forward to the farthest
position and release it. Adjust the
headrest so that it properly supports
the head and neck.
OPS034058N
WARNING - Headrest
removal/adjustment
• Do not operate the vehicle
with the headrests removed.
Headrests can provide critical
neck and head support in a
crash.
• Do not adjust the headrest
height while the vehicle is in
motion. Driver may lose con-
trol of the vehicle.
OPS033009
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
37
Safety features of your vehicle
Adjusting the height up and down
To raise the headrest, pull it up to the
desired position (1). To lower the
headrest, push and hold the release
button (2) on the headrest support
and lower the headrest to the desired
position (3).
✽✽
NOTICE
If you recline the seatback towards
the front with the headrest and seat
cushion raised, the headrest may
come in contact with the sunvisor or
other parts of the vehicle.
Removal and installation
To remove the headrest:
1. Recline the seatback (2) with the
recline lever (1).
2. Raise headrest as far as it can go.
3. Press the headrest release button
(3) while pulling the headrest up (4).
OPS033010
OYFH034205 OPS033047L
WARNING
NEVER allow anyone to ride in a
seat with the headrest removed.
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
Safety features of your vehicle
83
To reinstall the headrest :
1. Put the headrest poles (2) into the
holes while pressing the release
button (1).
2. Recline the seatback (4) with the
recline lever (3).
3. Adjust the headrest to the appro-
priate height.
Seatback pocket
The seatback pocket is provided on
the back of the front passenger’s
seatbacks.
WARNING - Headrest
Reinstallation
To reduce the risk of injury to
the head or neck, always make
sure the headrest is locked into
position and adjusted properly
after reinstalling.
OPS033048L
OPS033016
WARNING - Seatback
pockets
Do not put heavy or sharp
objects in the seatback pocket.
An occupant could contact such
objects in a crash. Heavy objects
in the front passenger seatback
could also interfere with the
airbag sensing system.
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
39
Safety features of your vehicle
Rear seat adjustment
Folding the rear seat
The rear seatbacks can be folded to
facilitate carrying long items or to
increase the luggage capacity of the
vehicle.
To fold down the rear seatback
1. Insert the rear seat belt webbing in
the guide to prevent the seat belt
from being damaged.
2. Set the front seatback to the
upright position and if necessary,
slide the front seat forward.
3. Lower the rear headrests to the
lowest position.
4.Pull on the seatback folding lever,
then fold the seat toward the front
of the vehicle. When you return the
seatback to its upright position,
always be sure it has locked into
position by pushing on the top of
the seatback.
5.To use the rear seat, lift and pull
the seatback backward by pulling
on the folding lever.
Pull the seatback firmly until it
clicks into place.
Make sure the seatback is locked
in place.
6.Return the rear seat belt to the
proper position.
WARNING - Folded down
seatback
Never allow passengers sit on top
of the folded down seatback while
the vehicle is moving.This is not a
proper seating position and no
seat belts are available for use.
This could result in serious injury
or death in case of an accident or
sudden stop.
WARNING
- Objects
Objects carried on the folded
down seatback should not extend
higher than the top of the front
seatbacks.This could allow cargo
to slide forward and cause injury
or damage during sudden stops.
OPSE034018OPS033015
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
Safety features of your vehicle
103
WARNING - Headrest
removal/adjustment
• Do not operate the vehicle
with the headrests removed.
Headrests can provide critical
neck and head support in a
crash.
• Do not adjust the headrest
height while the vehicle is in
motion. Driver may lose con-
trol of the vehicle.
Make sure the vehicle is off, the
reduction gear is in P (Park) position,
and the parking brake is securely
applied whenever loading or unload-
ing cargo. Failure to take these steps
may allow the vehicle to move if the
shift lever is inadvertently moved to
another position.
Headrest
The rear seat(s) is equipped with
headrests in all the seating positions
for the occupant's safety and comfort.
The headrest not only provides com-
fort for passengers, but also helps
protect the head and neck in the
event of a collision.
For maximum effectiveness in case of
an accident, the headrest should be
adjusted so the middle of the head-
rest is at the same height as the cen-
ter of gravity of an occupant's head.
Generally, the center of gravity of
most people's head is similar with
the height of the top of their eyes.
Also adjust the headrest as close to
your head as possible. For this rea-
son, the use of a cushion that holds
the body away from the seatback is
not recommended.
OPA039053
WARNING - Cargo
Do not place heavy objects in
the rear seats, since they can-
not be properly secured and
may hit vehicle occupants in a
frontal collision.
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
311
Safety features of your vehicle
Adjusting the height up and down
To raise the headrest :
1. Pull it up to the desired position (1).
To lower the headrest :
1. Push and hold the release button
(2) on the headrest support
2. Lower the headrest to the desired
position (3).
Removal and installation
To remove the headrest :
1. Raise it as far as it can go then
press the release button (1) while
pulling the headrest up (2).
To reinstall the headrest :
1. Put the headrest poles (3) into the
holes while pressing the release
button (1).
2. Adjust it to the appropriate height.
OPS033033 OPS033034
WARNING - Headrest
installation
After installing the headrest,
make sure that it is installed in
the right direction.
A headrest installed reversely
could increase whiplash injury
during rear impact.
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
Safety features of your vehicle
123
SEAT BELTS
Seat belt restraint system
• For maximum restraint system pro-
tection, the seat belts must always
be used whenever the vehicle is
moving. A properly positioned
shoulder belt should be positioned
midway over your shoulder across
your collarbone.
• Never allow children to ride in the
front passenger seat. See child
restraint system section for further
discussion.
Seat belts are designed to bear upon
the bony structure of the body, and
should be worn low across the front
of the pelvis or the pelvis, chest and
shoulders, as applicable; wearing the
lap section of the belt across the
abdominal area must be avoided.
Seat belts should be adjusted as
firmly as possible, consistent with
comfort, to provide the protection for
which they have been designed.
A slack belt will greatly reduce the
protection afforded to the wearer.
Care should be taken to avoid con-
tamination of the webbing with pol-
ishes, oils and chemicals, and partic-
ularly battery acid. Cleaning may
safely be carried out using mild soap
and water. The belt should be
replaced if webbing becomes frayed,
contaminated or damaged.
WARNING - Damaged
seat belt
Replace the entire seat belt
assembly if any part of the web-
bing or hardware is damage as
you can no longer be sure that a
damage seat belt will provide
protection in a crash.
WARNING - Shoulder Belt
• Never wear the shoulder belt
under your arm or behind
your back. An improperly
positioned shoulder belt can-
not protect the occupant in a
crash.
• Always wear both the shoul-
der portion and lap portion of
the lap/shoulder belt.
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
313
Safety features of your vehicle
• No modifications or additions
should be made by the user which
will either prevent the seat belt
adjusting devices from operating to
remove slack, or prevent the seat
belt assembly from being adjusted
to remove slack.
• When you fasten the seat belt, be
careful not to latch the seat belt in
buckles of other seat. It's very dan-
gerous and you may not be pro-
tected by the seat belt properly.
• Do not unfasten the seat belt and
do not fasten and unfasten the seat
belt repeatedly while driving. This
could result in loss of control, and
an accident causing death, serious
injury, or property damage.
• When fastening the seat belt,
make sure that the seat belt does
not pass over objects that are hard
or can break easily.
Seat belt warning
Driver’s seat belt warning (1)
The driver's seat belt warning light
and chime will activate pursuant to
the following table when the POWER
button is in "ON" position.
OAM032161L
WARNING - Seat belt
buckle
Do not allow foreign material
(gum, crumbs, coins, etc.) to
obstruct the seat belt buckle.
This may prevent the seat belt
from fastening securely.
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
Safety features of your vehicle
143
*
1
Warning pattern repeats 11 times with
an interval of 24 seconds. If the driver's
seat belt is buckled, the light will stop
within 6 seconds and chime will stop
immediately.
*
2
The light will stop within 6 seconds and
chime will stop immediately.
Front passenger’s seat belt warning (2)
The front passenger's seat belt warn-
ing light will activate to the following
table when the POWER button is in
"ON" position.
*
1
The seat belt warning light will go
off if the vehicle speed decreases
below 3 mph (5 km/h). If the vehi-
cle speed increases above 3 mph
(5 km/h), the warning light will blink
again.
Conditions Warning Pattern
Seat Belt
Vehicle
Speed
Light-Blink
Chime-
Sound
Unbuckled 6 seconds
Buckled 6 seconds None
Buckled →
Unbuckled
Below 3 mph
(5 km/h)
6 seconds None
3 mph~
6 mph
6 seconds
Above 6 mph
(10 km/h)
6 sec. on / 24 sec. off
(11 times)
Unbuckled
Above 6 mph
(10 km/h)
↓
Below 3 mph
(5 km/h)
6 seconds *
1
↓
Stop *
2
OPSE035033N
Conditions Warning Pattern
Seat Belt
Vehicle
Speed
Light-Blink
Unbuckled 6 seconds
Unbuckled
Above 6mph
(10 km/h)
Continuously
Buckled 6 seconds
Buckled →
Unbuckled
Above 6mph
(10 km/h)
Continuously *
1
Below 6mph
(10 km/h)
None
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
315
Safety features of your vehicle
Riding in an improper position
adversely affects the front passen-
ger's seat belt warning system. It is
important for the driver to instruct the
passenger as to the proper seating
instructions as contained in this
manual.
• You can find the front passenger's
seat belt warning light on the cen-
ter fascia panel.
• Although the front passenger seat
is not occupied, the seat belt warn-
ing light will blink for 6 seconds.
• The seat belt warning light can
blink when a briefcase or purse is
placed on the front passenger
seat.
Seat belt - Driver's 3-point system
with emergency locking retractor
To fasten your seat belt:
To fasten your seat belt, pull it out of
the retractor and insert the metal tab
(1) into the buckle (2). There will be
an audible "click" when the tab locks
into the buckle.
The seat belt automatically adjusts to
the proper length only after the lap
belt portion is adjusted manually so
that it fits snugly around your hips. If
you lean forward in a slow, easy
motion, the belt will extend and let
you move around. If there is a sud-
den stop or impact, however, the belt
will lock into position. It will also lock
if you try to lean forward too quickly.
If you are not able to pull out the seat
belt from the retractor, firmly pull the
belt out and release it. Then you will
be able to pull the belt out smoothly.
B180A01NF-1
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
Safety features of your vehicle
163
Height adjustment
You can adjust the height of the shoul-
der belt anchor to one of the 3 posi-
tions for maximum comfort and safety.
The height of the adjusting seat belt
should not be too close to your neck.
The shoulder portion should be
adjusted so that it lies across your
chest and midway over your shoulder
near the door and not your neck.
To adjust the height of the seat belt
anchor, lower or raise the height
adjuster into an appropriate position.
To raise the height adjuster, pull it up
(1). To lower it, push it down (3) while
pressing the height adjuster button (2).
Release the button to lock the
anchor into position. Try sliding the
height adjuster to make sure that it
has locked into position.
You should place the lap belt portion
as low as possible and snugly across
your hips, not on your waist. If the lap
belt is located too high on your waist,
it may increase the chance of injury in
the event of a collision. Both arms
should not be under or over the belt.
Rather, one should be over and the
other under, as shown in the illustra-
tion.
Never wear the seat belt under the
arm that is near the door.
B200A02NF
OXM039026
Front seat
WARNING - Shoulder belt
positioning
Never position the shoulder belt
across your neck or face.
WARNING - Seat belt
replacement
Replace your seat belts after
being in an accident. Failure to
replace seat belts after an acci-
dent could leave you with dam-
aged seat belts that will not pro-
vide protection in the event of
another collision.
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
317
Safety features of your vehicle
Seat belts - Front passenger and
rear seat 3-point system with
combination locking retractor
To fasten your seat belt:
Combination retractor type seat belts
are installed in the rear seat posi-
tions to help accommodate the
installation of child restraint systems.
Although a combination retractor is
also installed in the front passenger
seat position, it is strongly recom-
mended that children always be
seated in the rear seat. NEVER
place any infant restraint system in
the front seat of the vehicle.
This type of seat belt combines the
features of both an emergency lock-
ing retractor seat belt and an auto-
matic locking retractor seat belt. To
fasten your seat belt, pull it out of the
retractor and insert the metal tab into
the buckle. There will be an audible
"click" when the tab locks into the
buckle. When not securing a child
restraint, the seat belt operates in the
same way as the driver's seat belt
(Emergency Locking Retractor Type).
It automatically adjusts to the proper
length only after the lap belt portion
of the seat belt is adjusted manually
so that it fits snugly around your hips.
When the seat belt is fully extended
from the retractor to allow the instal-
lation of a child restraint system, the
seat belt operation changes to allow
the belt to retract, but not to extend
(Automatic Locking Retractor Type).
Refer to “Using a child restraint sys-
tem” in this section.
✽✽
NOTICE
Although the combination retractor
provides the same level of protection
for seated passengers in either emer-
gency or automatic locking modes,
have the seated passengers use the
emergency locking feature for
improved convenience. The auto-
matic locking function is intended to
facilitate child restraint installation.
To convert from the automatic lock-
ing feature to the emergency locking
operation mode, allow the unbuck-
led seat belt to fully retract.
Do NOT fold down the left portion of
the rear seat back when the rear
center seat belt is buckled. ALWAYS
UNBUCKLE the rear center seat belt
before folding down the left portion of
the rear seat back. If the rear center
seat belt is buckled when the left por-
tion of the rear seat back is folded
down, distortion and damage to the
top portion of the seat back and seat
belt garnish may result, causing the
seat back to lock into the folded
down position.
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
Safety features of your vehicle
183
To release the seat belt:
The seat belt is released by pressing
the release button (1) on the locking
buckle. When it is released, the belt
should automatically draw back into
the retractor.
If this does not happen, check the
belt to be sure it is not twisted, then
try again.
Stowing the rear seat belt
Routing the seat belt webbing
through the rear seat belt guides will
help keep the belts from being
trapped behind or under the seats.
After inserting the seat belt, tighten
the belt webbing by pulling it up.
CAUTION - Seat belt guide
Remove the seat belt from the
guides before using. If you pull
on the seat belt when it is stored
in the guides, it may damage the
guides and/or belt webbing.
B210A01NF-1
OPS033015
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
319
Safety features of your vehicle
3 Point rear center belt
To fasten the rear center belt
1.Insert the mini tongue (A) into the
open end of the anchor connector
(C) until an audible “click" is heard,
indicating the latch is locked. Make
sure the belt is not twisted.
2.Pull the tongue plate (B) and insert
the tongue plate (B) into the open
end of the buckle (D) until an audi-
ble “click” is heard, indicating the
latch is locked. Make sure the belt
is not twisted.
When using the rear center seat
belt, the buckle with the “CENTER”
mark must be used.
OPSE034020
ORP032074
WARNING - Rear center
seat belt
Do not separate mini tongue and
mini buckle even if there is not
an occupant.
If it is separated, It may hit the
rear seat occupants in a collision
or sudden stops.
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
Safety features of your vehicle
203
There will be an audible “click” when
the tab locks in the buckle. The seat
belt automatically adjusts to the
proper length only after the lap belt is
adjusted manually so that it fits snug-
ly around your hips, if you lean for-
ward in a slow, easy motion, the belt
will extend and let you move around.
If there is a sudden stop or impact,
the belt will lock into position. It will
also lock if you try to lean forward too
quickly.
When using the rear seat center belt,
you must lock all tongue plates and
buckles.
To unfasten the rear center belt
Press the release button on the
buckle (D) and remove the tongue
plate (B) from the buckle (D).
Pre-tensioner seat belt
Your vehicle is equipped with driver's
and front passenger's pre-tensioner
seat belts (retractor pretensioner and
EFD (Emergency Fastening Device)).
The pre-tensioner seat belts may be
activated, when a frontal collision is
severe enough, together with the air
bags.
When the vehicle stops suddenly, or
if the occupant tries to lean forward
too quickly, the seat belt retractor
may lock into position. In certain
frontal collisions, the pre-tensioner
will activate and pull the seat belt into
tighter contact against the occu-
pant's body.
OPS033055L
OXMA033101
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
321
Safety features of your vehicle
(1) Retractor Pretensioner
The purpose of the retractor pre-
tensioner is to make sure that the
shoulder belts fit in tightly against
the occupant's upper body in cer-
tain frontal collisions.
(2) EFD (Emergency Fastening Device)
The purpose of the EFD is to
make sure that the pelvis belts fit
in tightly against the occupant's
lower body in certain frontal colli-
sions.
If the system senses excessive ten-
sion on the driver or passenger's
seat belt when the pre-tensioner sys-
tem activates, the load limiter inside
the retractor pre-tensioner will release
some of the pressure on the affected
seat belt.
The seat belt pre-tensioner system
consists mainly of the following com-
ponents. Their locations are shown in
the illustration:
(1) SRS air bag warning light
(2) Retractor pre-tensioner assembly
(3) SRS control module
(4) Emergency fastening device (EFD)
• Both the driver's and front passen-
ger's seat belt pre-tensioner sys-
tem may be activated not only in
certain frontal collision but also in
certain side collision or rollover, if
the vehicle is equipped with a side
or curtain air bag.
• Because the sensor that activates
the SRS air bag is connected with
the pre-tensioner seat belt, the
SRS air bag warning light on
the instrument panel will illuminate
for approximately 6 seconds after
the POWER button has been
turned to the ON position, and then
it should turn off.
ODMESA2024/Q
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
Safety features of your vehicle
223
If the pre-tensioner seat belt system
are not working properly, this warn-
ing light will illuminate even if there is
no malfunction of the SRS air bag. If
the SRS air bag warning light does
not illuminate when the POWER but-
ton is turned ON, or if it remains illu-
minated after illuminating for approx-
imately 6 seconds, or if it illuminates
while the vehicle is being driven,
have an authorized Kia dealer
inspect the pre-tensioner seat belt
and SRS air bag system as soon as
possible.
Pre-tensioners are designed to oper-
ate only one time. After activation,
pre-tensioner seat belts must be
replaced. If the pre-tensioner must
be replaced, contact an authorized
Kia dealer.
Seat belt precautions
Infant or small child
All 50 states have child restraint
laws. You should be aware of the
specific requirements in your state.
Child and/or infant seats must be
properly placed and installed in the
rear seat. For more information
about the use of these restraints,
refer to “Child restraint system” in this
section.
WARNING - Hot preten-
sioner
Do not touch the pre-tensioner
seat belt assemblies for several
minutes after they have been
activated. When the pre-ten-
sioner seat belt mechanism
fires during a collision the pre-
tensioner becomes hot and can
burn you.
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
323
Safety features of your vehicle
✽✽
NOTICE
Small children are best protected
from injury in an accident when
properly restrained in the rear seat
by a child restraint system that
meets the requirements of the
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards. Before buying any child
restraint system, make sure that it
has a label certifying that it meets
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard 213. The restraint must be
appropriate for your child's height
and weight. Check the label on the
child restraint for this information.
Refer to “Child restraint system” in
this section.
Larger children
Children who are too large for child
restraint systems should always
occupy the rear seat and use the
available lap/shoulder belts. The lap
portion should be fastened and
snugged on the hips and as low as
possible. Check if the belt fits period-
ically. A child's squirming could put
the belt out of position. Children are
given the most safety in the event of
an accident when they are restrained
by a proper restraint system in the
rear seat. If a larger child (over age
12) must be seated in the front seat,
the child should be securely
restrained by the available lap/shoul-
der belt and the seat should be
placed in the rearmost position.
Children age 12 and under should be
restrained securely in the rear seat.
NEVER place a child age 12 and
under in the front seat. NEVER place
a rear facing child seat in the front
seat of a vehicle.
If the shoulder belt portion slightly
touches the child’s neck or face, try
placing the child closer to the center of
the vehicle. If the shoulder belt still
touches their face or neck they need to
be returned to a child restraint system.
WARNING - Small children
Do not allow small children to
ride in the vehicle without an
appropriate child restraint sys-
tem. If the shoulder belt comes
in contact with your child's neck
or face your child is too small to
ride in the vehicle. In a crash the
seat belt will inflict injury to your
child's neck, throat and face.
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
Safety features of your vehicle
243
Restraint of pregnant women
Pregnant women should wear
lap/shoulder belt assemblies when-
ever possible according to specific
recommendations by their doctors.
The lap portion of the belt should be
worn AS SECURELY AND LOW AS
POSSIBLE.
Injured person
A seat belt should be used when an
injured person is being transported.
When this is necessary, you should
consult a physician for recommenda-
tions.
One person per belt
Two people (including children)
should never attempt to use a single
seat belt. This could increase the
severity of injuries in case of an acci-
dent.
Do not lie down
To reduce the chance of injuries in
the event of an accident and to
achieve maximum effectiveness of
the restraint system, all passengers
should be sitting up and the front and
rear seats should be in an upright
position when the vehicle is moving.
A seat belt cannot provide proper
protection if the person is lying down
in the rear seat or if the front and rear
seats are in a reclined position.
WARNING - Pregnant
women
Pregnant women must never
place the lap portion of the seat
belt above or on the abdomen
where the fetus is located. The
force of the seat belt during a
collision will crush the fetus.
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
325
Safety features of your vehicle
Care of seat belts
Seat belt systems should never be
disassembled or modified. In addi-
tion, care should be taken to assure
that seat belts and belt hardware are
not damaged by seat hinges, doors
or other abuse.
Periodic inspection
All seat belts should be inspected
periodically for wear or damage of
any kind. Any damaged parts should
be replaced as soon as possible.
Keep belts clean and dry
Seat belts should be kept clean and
dry. If belts become dirty, they can be
cleaned by using a mild soap solu-
tion and warm water. Bleach, dye,
strong detergents or abrasives
should not be used because they
may damage and weaken the fabric.
When to replace seat belts
The entire in-use seat belt assembly
or assemblies should be replaced if
the vehicle has been involved in an
accident. This should be done even if
no damage is visible. Additional
questions concerning seat belt oper-
ation should be directed to an
authorized Kia dealer.
WARNING - Pinched seat
belt
Make sure that the webbing
and/or buckle does not get
caught or pinched in the rear
seat when returning the rear
seatback to its upright position.
A caught or pinched
webbing/buckle may become
damaged and could fail during a
collision or sudden stop.
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
Safety features of your vehicle
263
CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM
Children riding in the vehicle should
sit in the rear seat and must always
be properly restrained to minimize
the risk of injury in an accident, sud-
den stop or sudden maneuver.
According to accident statistics, chil-
dren are safer when properly
restrained in the rear seats than in
the front seat. Larger children not in
a child restraint should use one of
the seat belts provided.
You should be aware of the specific
requirements in your country. Child
and/or infant safety seats must be
properly placed and installed in the
rear seat. You must use a commer-
cially available child restraint system
that meets the requirements of the
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards (FMVSS).
Child restraint systems are designed
to be secured in vehicle seats by the
lap belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt,
or by a tether anchor and/or LATCH
anchors.
Children could be injured or killed in
a crash if their restraints are not
properly secured. For small children
and babies, a child seat or infant seat
must be used. Before buying a par-
ticular child restraint system, make
sure it fits your vehicle seat and seat
belts, and fits your child.
Follow all the instructions provided
by the manufacturer when installing
the child restraint system.
When the child restraint system is
not in use, store it in the luggage
area or fasten it with a seat belt so
that it will not be thrown forward in
case of a sudden stop or an acci-
dent.
WARNING - Restraint
location
Never install a child or infant
seat on the front passenger's
seat. A child riding in the front
passenger seat can be forceful-
ly struck by an inflating airbag.
WARNING - Hot child
restraint
A child restraint system can
become very hot if it is left in a
closed vehicle on a sunny day.
Be sure to check the seat cover,
buckles and latches before
placing a child in the restraint
system.
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
327
Safety features of your vehicle
After an accident, have an author-
ized Kia dealer check the child
restraint system, seat belt, tether
anchor and lower anchor.
Using a child restraint system
For small children and babies, the use
of a child seat or infant seat is required.
The child seat or infant seat should be
of appropriate size for the child and
should be installed in accordance with
the manufacturer's instructions.
WARNING - Holding chil-
dren
Never hold a child in your arms
or lap when riding in a vehicle.
The violent forces created dur-
ing a crash will tear the child
from your arms and throw the
child against the car’s interior.
Always use a child restraint
system which is appropriate for
your child's height and weight.
WARNING - Unattended
Children
Never leave children unattended
in a vehicle.The car can heat up
very quickly, resulting in injuries
to the child in the vehicle.
WARNING - Seat belt use
Do not use one seat belt for two
occupants at the same time.
This will eliminate any safety
benefit provided by the seat belt
to the occupants.
CRS09
OTQ037038
Forward-facing child restraint system
Rearward-facing child restraint system
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
Safety features of your vehicle
283
For safety reasons, we recommend
that the child restraint system be
used in the rear seats.
Never place a rear-facing child
restraint in the front passenger seat,
because of the danger an inflating
passenger-side air bag could impact
the rear-facing child restraint and kill
the child.
Since all passenger seat belts move
freely under normal conditions and
only lock under extreme or emer-
gency conditions (emergency lock
mode), you must manually change
these seat belts to the auto lock
mode to secure a child restraint.
If the seat belt does not operate as
described in this section, have the
system checked immediately by your
authorized Kia dealer.
✽✽
NOTICE
If the vehicle headrest prevents
proper installation of a child seat (as
described in the child seat system
manual), the headrest of the respec-
tive seating position shall be read-
justed or entirely removed.
Placing a passenger seat belt
into the auto lock mode
The auto lock mode will help prevent
the normal movement of the child in
the vehicle from causing the seat belt
to loosen and compromise the child
restraint system. To secure a child
restraint system, use the following
procedure.
E2MS103005
WARNING - Child seat
installation
• Always follow the instructions
provided by the child restraint
system manufacturer. Child
restraint system manufactur-
ers know their products best.
• Failure to observe this manu-
al's instructions regarding
child restraint system and the
instructions provided with the
child restraint system could
result in the improper installa-
tion of the child restraint sys-
tem which may reduce the
protection to your child in a
crash or a sudden stop.
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
329
Safety features of your vehicle
To install a child restraint system on
the outboard or center rear seats, do
the following:
1. Place the child restraint system in
the seat and route the lap/shoul-
der belt around or through the
restraint, following the restraint
manufacturer’s instructions. Be
sure the seat belt webbing is not
twisted.
2. Fasten the lap/shoulder belt latch
into the buckle. Listen for the dis-
tinct “click” sound.
Position the release button so that it
is easy to access in case of an emer-
gency.
If the vehicle headrest prevents prop-
er installation of a child seat (as
described in the child seat system
manual), the headrest of the respec-
tive seating position shall be read-
justed or entirely removed.
3. Pull the shoulder portion of the
seat belt all the way out. When the
shoulder portion of the seat belt is
fully extended, it will shift the
retractor to the “Auto Lock” (child
restraint) mode.
OEN036101
OEN036102
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
Safety features of your vehicle
303
4. Slowly allow the shoulder portion
of the seat belt to retract and listen
for an audible “clicking” or “ratchet-
ing” sound. This indicates that the
retractor is in the “Auto Lock”
mode. If no distinct sound is
heard, repeat steps 3 and 4.
5. Remove as much slack from the
belt as possible by pushing down
on the child restraint system while
feeding the shoulder belt back into
the retractor.
6. Push and pull on the child restraint
system to confirm that the seat
belt is holding it firmly in place. If it
is not, release the seat belt and
repeat steps 2 through 6.
7. Double check that the retractor is
in the “Auto Lock” mode by
attempting to pull more of the seat
belt out of the retractor. If you can-
not, the retractor is in the “Auto
Lock” mode.
The lap/shoulder belt automatically
returns to the “emergency lock
mode” whenever the belt is allowed
to retract fully. Therefore, the preced-
ing seven steps must be followed
each time a child restraint is
installed.
To remove the child restraint, press
the release button on the buckle and
then pull the lap/shoulder belt out of
the restraint and allow the seat belt
to retract fully.
When the seat belt is allowed to
retract to its fully stowed position,
the retractor will automatically
switch from the “Auto Lock” mode
to the emergency lock mode for
normal adult usage.
OEN036104OEN036103
WARNING - Auto lock
mode
Set the retractor to Automatic
Lock mode when installing any
child restraint system. If the
retractor is not in the Automatic
Locking mode, the child
restraint can move when your
vehicle turns or stops suddenly.
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
331
Safety features of your vehicle
Securing a child restraint seat
with tether anchor system
Child restraint hook holders are
located on the back of the rear seat-
backs.
This symbol indicates the
position of the tether anchor.
1.Route the child restraint seat strap
over the seatback.
For vehicles with adjustable head-
rests, route the tether strap under
the headrest and between the
headrest posts, otherwise route
the tether strap over the top of the
seatback. In case of interference
between the child restraint seat
and the headrest remove the par-
ticular head restraint for better fit-
ment of the child restraint seat.
2.Connect the tether strap hook to
the appropriate child restraint hook
holder and tighten to secure the
child restraint seat.
Check that the child restraint system
is secure by pushing and pulling it in
different directions. Incorrectly fitted
child restraints may swing, twist, tip
or separate causing death or serious
injury.
OXM039034N
OPS033019
WARNING - Tether strap
Never mount more than one
child restraint to a single tether
or to a single lower anchorage
point. The increased load
caused by multiple seats may
cause the tethers or anchorage
points to break.
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
Safety features of your vehicle
323
Securing a child restraint seat with
child seat lower anchor system
Some child seat manufacturers
make child restraint seats that are
labeled as LATCH or LATCH-com-
patible child restraint seats. LATCH
stands for "Lower Anchors and
Tethers for Children". These seats
include two rigid or webbing mount-
ed attachments that connect to two
LATCH anchors at specific seating
positions in your vehicle. This type of
child restraint seat eliminates the
need to use seat belts to attach the
child seat in the rear seats.
Child restraint symbols are located
on the left and right 2nd row seat
backs to indicate the position of the
lower anchors for child restraints.
Install the child restraint seat fully
rearward against the seatback with
the seatback reclined two positions
from the most upright latched posi-
tion.
OPS034059N
OXM039060N
Lower Anchor
Lower Anchor
Position Indicator
WARNING - Unused rear
seatbelts
Always fasten the seatbelts
behind the child restraint seat
when they are not used to
secure the child seat. Failure to
do so may result in child stran-
gulation.
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
333
Safety features of your vehicle
LATCH anchors have been provided
in your vehicle. The LATCH anchors
are located in the left and right out-
board rear seating positions. Their
locations are shown in the illustra-
tion. There is no LATCH anchor pro-
vided for the center rear seating
position.
The LATCH anchors are located
between the seatback and the seat
cushion of the 2nd row seat left and
right outboard seating positions.
Follow the child seat manufacturer’s
instructions to properly install child
restraint seats with LATCH or
LATCH-compatible attachments.
Once you have installed the LATCH
child restraint, assure that the seat is
properly attached to the LATCH and
tether anchors.
Also, test the child restraint seat
before you place the child in it. Tilt
the seat from side to side. Also try to
tug the seat forward. Check to see if
the anchors hold the seat in place.
✽✽
NOTICE
The recommended weight for the
LATCH system is under 65 lb (30
kg).
How to calculate the child restraint
weight :
Child restraint weight =
65 lb (30 kg) - Child weight
OXM039036N
WARNING - LATCH lower
anchors
Never attempt to attach a
LATCH equipped seat in the
center seating position. LATCH
lower anchors are only to be
used with the left and right rear
outboard seating positions.You
may damage the anchors or the
anchors may fail and break in a
collision.
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
Safety features of your vehicle
343
(1) Driver’s front air bag
(2) Passenger’s front air bag
(3) Side air bag
(4) Curtain air bag
Even in vehicles with air bags, you
and your passengers must always
wear the safety belts provided in
order to minimize the risk and sever-
ity of injury in the event of a collision
or rollover.
AIR BAG - ADVANCED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
❈ The actual air bags in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.
OAM032026
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
335
Safety features of your vehicle
How does the air bag system
operate
• Air bags are activated (able to
inflate if necessary) only when the
POWER button is turned to the ON
or the vehicle is in the ready ( )
mode.
• The appropriate air bags inflate
instantly in the event of a serious
frontal collision or side collision in
order to help protect the occupants
from serious physical injury.
• There is no single speed at which
the air bags will inflate.
Generally, air bags are designed to
inflate based upon the severity of a
collision and its direction. These
two factors determine whether the
sensors produce an electronic
deployment/ inflation signal.
• Air bag deployment depends on a
number of factors including vehicle
speed, angles of impact and the
density and stiffness of the vehi-
cles or objects which your vehicle
hits in the collision. The determin-
ing factors are not limited to those
mentioned above.
• The front air bags will completely
inflate and deflate in an instant.
It is virtually impossible for you to
see the air bags inflate during an
accident.
It is much more likely that you will
simply see the deflated air bags
hanging out of their storage com-
partments after the collision.
• In addition to inflating in serious
side collisions, side and/or curtain
air bags will inflate if the sensing
system detects a rollover.
• When a rollover is detected, cur-
tain air bags will remain inflated
longer to help provide protection
from ejection, especially when
used in conjunction with the seat
belts.
• In order to help provide protection,
the air bags must inflate rapidly.
The speed of the air bag inflation is
a consequence of extremely short
time in which to inflate the air bag
between the occupant and the
vehicle structures before the occu-
pant impacts those structures. This
speed of inflation reduces the risk
of serious or life-threatening
injuries and is thus a necessary
part of the air bag design.
However, air bag inflation can also
cause injuries which can include
facial abrasions, bruises and bro-
ken bones because the inflation
speed also causes the air bags to
expand with a great deal of force.
• There are even circumstances
under which contact with the
steering wheel or passenger air
bag can cause fatal injuries,
especially if the occupant is
positioned excessively close to
the steering wheel or passenger
air bag.
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
Safety features of your vehicle
363
Noise and smoke
When inflated, the air bags make a
loud noise and leave smoke and
powder in the air inside the vehicle.
This is normal and is a result of the
ignition of the air bag inflator. After
the air bag inflates, you may feel sub-
stantial discomfort in breathing due
to the contact of your chest with both
the seat belt and the air bag, as well
as from breathing the smoke and
powder. Open your doors and/or
windows as soon as possible after
impact in order to reduce discom-
fort and prevent prolonged expo-
sure to the smoke and powder.
Though smoke and powder are non-
toxic, it may cause irritation to the
skin (eyes, nose and throat, etc). If
this is the case, wash and rinse with
cold water immediately and consult a
doctor if the symptom persists.
WARNING - Hot compo-
nents
Do not touch the air bag storage
area's internal components
immediately after airbag infla-
tion.The air bag related parts in
the steering wheel, instrument
panel and the roof rails above
the front and rear doors are
very hot. Hot components can
result in burn injuries.
WARNING - Airbag infla-
tion
Sit as far back as possible from
the steering wheel while still
maintaining comfortable con-
trol of your vehicle. A distance
of at least 10" from your chest
to the steering wheel is recom-
mended. Failure to do so can
result in airbag inflation injuries
to the driver.
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
337
Safety features of your vehicle
Do not install a child restraint on
the front passenger’s seat.
Never place a rear-facing child
restraint in the front passenger’s
seat. If the air bag deploys, it would
impact the rear-facing child restraint,
causing serious or fatal injury.
In addition, do not place front-facing
child restraints in the front passen-
ger’s seat either. If the front passen-
ger air bag inflates, it could cause
serious or fatal injuries to the child.
Air bag warning light
The purpose of air bag warning light
in your instrument panel is to alert
you of a potential problem with your
air bag system, which could include
your side and/or curtain air bags
used for rollover protection.
1JBH3051
W7-147
WARNING - Air bag
deployment
When children are seated in the
rear outboard seats of a vehicle
equipped with side and/or cur-
tain air bags, install the child
restraint system as far away
from the door side as possible.
Inflation of the side and/or cur-
tain air bags could impact the
child.
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
Safety features of your vehicle
383
When the POWER button is turned
ON, the warning light should illumi-
nate for approximately 6 seconds,
then go off. Have the system
checked by an authorized Kia dealer-
ship if:
• The light does not turn on briefly
when you turn the POWER button
ON.
• The light stays on after illuminating
for approximately 6 seconds.
• The light comes on while the vehi-
cle is in motion.
• The light blinks when the POWER
button is in ON position.
SRS components and functions
The SRS consists of the following
components:
1. Driver's front air bag module
2. Passenger's front air bag module
3. Side air bag modules
4. Curtain air bag modules
5. Retractor pre-tensioner assemblies
6. Air bag warning light
7. SRS control module (SRSCM)/
Rollover sensor
8. Front impact sensors
9. Side impact sensors
10. PASSENGER “AIR BAG OFF”
indicator (Front passenger’s seat
only)
11. Occupant detection system
(Front passenger’s seat only)
12. Driver’s and front passenger’s
seat belt buckle sensors
13. Emergency fastening device
(EFD)
14. Side pressure impact sensor
The SRSCM continually monitors all
SRS components while the POWER
button is ON to determine if a crash
impact is severe enough to require
air bag deployment or pre-tensioner
seat belt deployment.
,
,,
OPSE034036N/Q
,
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
339
Safety features of your vehicle
If the air bag warning light illuminat-
ed for more than, 6 seconds after the
POWER button is turned on, or of it
illuminates during vehicle operation,
an SRS component may not be func-
tioning properly and you should have
your vehicle checked by an author-
ized Kia dealer.
If any of the following conditions
occurs, this indicates a malfunction
in the air bag system. Have an
authorized Kia dealer inspect the air
bag system as soon as possible.
• The light does not turn on briefly
when you turn the POWER button
ON.
• The light stays on after illuminating
for approximately 6 seconds.
• The light comes on while the vehi-
cle is in motion.
• The light blinks when the POWER
button is in ON position.
The front air bag modules are locat-
ed both in the center of the steering
wheel and in the front passenger's
panel above the glove box. When the
SRSCM detects a sufficiently severe
impact to the front of the vehicle, it
will automatically deploy the front air
bags.
W7-147
B240B01L
Driver’s front air bag (1)
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
Safety features of your vehicle
403
Upon deployment, tear seams mold-
ed directly into the pad covers will
separate under pressure from the
expansion of the air bags. Further
opening of the covers then allows full
inflation of the air bags.
A fully inflated air bag, in combina-
tion with a properly worn seat belt,
slows the driver's or the passenger's
forward motion, reducing the risk of
head and chest injury.
After complete inflation, the air bag
immediately starts deflating, enabling
the driver to maintain forward visibility
and the ability to steer or operate
other controls.
B240B02L
Driver’s front air bag (2)
B240B03L
Driver’s front air bag (3)
B240B05L
Passenger’s front air bag
WARNING - Air bag
obstructions
Do not install or place any
accessories on the steering
wheel, instrument panel, or on
the front passenger's panel
above the glove box in a vehi-
cle. Such objects may become
dangerous projectiles if the air
bag deploys.
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
341
Safety features of your vehicle
• If an air bag deploys, there may be
a loud noise followed by a fine dust
released in the vehicle. These con-
ditions are normal and are not haz-
ardous - the air bags are packed in
this fine powder. The dust generat-
ed during air bag deployment may
cause skin or eye irritation as well
as aggravate asthma for some per-
sons. Always wash all exposed
skin areas thoroughly with luke-
warm water and a mild soap after
an accident in which the air bags
were deployed.
• The SRS can function only when
the POWER button is in the ON
position. If the SRS air bag warning
light does not illuminate, or contin-
uously remains on after illuminat-
ing for about 6 seconds when the
POWER button is turned to the ON
position, or after the vehicle is in
the ready ( ) mode, comes on
while driving, the SRS is not work-
ing properly. If this occurs, have
your vehicle immediately inspected
by an authorized Kia dealer.
✽✽
NOTICE
Before you replace a fuse or discon-
nect a battery terminal, turn the
vehicle off. Never remove or replace
the air bag related fuse(s) when the
POWER button is in the ON posi-
tion. Failure to heed this warning
will cause the SRS air bag warning
light to illuminate.
Occupant Detection System
(ODS)
Your vehicle is equipped with an
occupant detection system in the
front passenger's seat.
The occupant detection system is
designed to detect the presence of a
properly-seated front passenger and
determine if the passenger's front air
bag should be enabled (may inflate)
or not. Only the front passenger front
air bag is controlled by the Occupant
Detection System.
Do not put anything in front of the
passenger air bag indicator.
WARNING - Flying objects
Do not place any objects (an
umbrella, bag, etc.) between the
front door and the front seat.
Such objects may become dan-
gerous projectiles if the side
airbag inflates.
OPSE035035N
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
Safety features of your vehicle
423
Main components of the occu-
pant detection system
• A detection device located within
the front passenger seat cushion.
• An electronic system which deter-
mines whether the passenger air
bag systems should be activated
or deactivated.
• A indicator light located on the
instrument panel which illuminates
the words PASSENGER AIR BAG
“OFF” indicating the front passen-
ger air bag system is deactivated.
• The instrument panel air bag warn-
ing light is interconnected with the
occupant detection system.
If the front passenger seat is occupied
by a person that the system deter-
mines to be of appropriate size, and
he/she sits properly (sitting upright
with the seatback in an upright posi-
tion, centered on the seat cushion with
their seat belt on, legs comfortably
extended and their feet on the floor),
the PASSENGER AIR BAG “OFF”
indicator will turn off and the front pas-
senger's air bag will be able to inflate,
if necessary, in frontal crashes.
You will find the PASSENGER AIR
BAG “OFF” indicator on the center
facia panel. This system detects the
conditions 1~4 in the following table
and activates or deactivates the front
passenger air bag based on these
conditions.
Always be sure that you and all vehicle
occupants are seated and restrained
properly (sitting upright with the seat in
an upright position, centered on the
seat cushion, with the person’s legs
comfortably extended, feet on the floor,
and wearing the safety belt properly)
for the most effective protection by the
air bag and the safety belt.
• The ODS (Occupant Detection
System) may not function properly if
the passenger takes actions which
can defeat the detection system.
These include:
(1) Failing to sit in an upright position.
(2) Leaning against the door or cen-
ter console.
(3) Sitting towards the sides or the
front of the seat.
(4) Putting legs on the dashboard or
resting them on other locations
which reduce the passenger
weight on the front seat.
(5) Improperly wearing the safety
belt.
(6) Reclining the seat back.
(7) Wearing a thick cloth like ski wear
or hip protection wear.
(8) Put on the seat an additional thick
cushion.
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
343
Safety features of your vehicle
✽✽
NOTICE
Do not modify or replace the front
passenger seat. Don't place anything
on or attach anything such as a blan-
ket, front seat cover or after market
seat heater to the front passenger
seat. This can adversely affect the
occupant detection system.
Condition and operation in the front passenger occupant detection
system
*
1
: The ODS system uses a field to evaluate a person's size to determine whether the
air bag should deploy. It is possible for a child to be detected and activate the ODS,
thus allowing the air bag to deploy.To maximize safety, do not allow children to ride
in the front passenger seat.
*
2
: Never install a child restraint system on the front passenger seat.
Condition detected by the
occupant detection
system
1. Adult or child*
1
2. Child restraint system*
2
3. Unoccupied
4. There is a malfunction
in the system
Off
On
On
Off
Off
Off
Off
On
Activated
Deactivated
Deactivated
Activated
"PASSENGER AIR
BAG OFF" indicator
light
SRS warning light
Front passenger
air bag
Indicator/Warning light Devices
WARNING - ODS System
Riding in an improper position
adversely affects the Occupant
Detection System and may
result in the deactivation of the
front passenger airbag. It is
important for the driver to
instruct the passenger as to the
proper seating instructions as
contained in this manual.
(Continued)
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
Safety features of your vehicle
443
1KMN3663
1KMN3664
1KMN3665
- Never sit with hips shifted
towards the front of the seat.
- Never lean on the door or cen-
ter console.
- Never sit on one side of the
front passenger seat.
- Never place feet on the dash-
board.
OVQ036013N
1KMN3662
- Never put a heavy load or an
active electronic device on
the front passenger seat or
seatback pocket.
- Never excessively recline the
front passenger seatback.
OVQ036014N
- Never place feet on the front
passenger seatback.
(Continued)
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
345
Safety features of your vehicle
When an adult is seated in the front
passenger seat, if the PASSENGER
AIR BAG “OFF” indicator is on, turn
the vehicle off and ask the passen-
ger to sit properly (sitting upright with
the seat back in an upright position,
centered on the seat cushion with
their seat belt on, legs comfortably
extended and their feet on the floor).
Restart the vehicle and have the per-
son remain in that position. This will
allow the system to detect the person
and to enable the passenger air bag.
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG “OFF”
indicator is still on, ask the passen-
ger to move to the rear seat.
✽✽
NOTICE
The PASSENGER AIR BAG “OFF”
indicator illuminates for about 4 sec-
onds after the POWER button is
turned to the ON position or after
the vehicle is in the ready ( )
mode. If the front passenger seat is
occupied, the occupant detection
sensor will then classify the front
passenger after several more sec-
onds.
B990A01O
Proper position
WARNING - “AIR BAG
OFF” light
Do not allow an adult passenger
to ride in the front seat when the
PASSENGER AIR BAG “OFF”
indicator is illuminated, because
the air bag will not deploy in the
event of a crash. The driver
must instruct the passenger to
reposition himself in the seat.
Failure to properly position
yourself may lead to air bag
deactivation resulting in air bag
non-deployment in a collision. If
the PASSENGER AIR BAG
“OFF” indicator remains illumi-
nated after the passenger repo-
sitions themselves properly and
the car is restarted, it is recom-
mended that passenger move to
the rear seat because the pas-
senger's front air bag will not
deploy.
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
Safety features of your vehicle
463
Any child age 12 and under should
ride in the rear seat. Children too
large for child restraints should use
the available lap/shoulder belts. No
matter what type of crash, children of
all ages are safer when restrained in
the rear seat.
If the occupant detection system is
not working properly, the SRS air
bag warning light on the instrument
panel will illuminate because the
passenger's front air bag is connect-
ed with the occupant detection sys-
tem. If there is a malfunction of the
occupant detection system, the PAS-
SENGER AIR BAG “OFF” indicator
will not illuminate and the passen-
ger's front air bag will inflate in frontal
impact crashes even if there is no
occupant in the front passenger's
seat
Driver's and passenger's front
air bag
Your vehicle is equipped with an
Advanced Supplemental Restraint
(Air Bag) System and lap/shoulder
belts at both the driver and passen-
ger seating position.
The indication of the system's pres-
ence are the letters "AIR BAG"
embossed on the air bag pad cover
on the steering wheel and the pas-
senger's side front panel pad above
the glove box.
The SRS consists of air bags
installed under the pad covers in the
center of the steering wheel and the
passenger's side front panel above
the glove box.
The purpose of the SRS is to provide
the vehicle's driver and/or the front
passenger with additional protection
than that offered by the seat belt sys-
tem alone in case of a frontal impact
of sufficient severity. The SRS uses
sensors to gather information about
the driver's and front passenger's
seat belt usage and impact severity.
The seat belt buckle sensors deter-
mine if the driver and front passen-
ger's seat belts are fastened.
OPS033021
OPS033022
Driver’s front air bag
Passenger’s front air bag
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
347
Safety features of your vehicle
These sensors provide the ability to
control the SRS deployment based on
whether or not the seat belts are fas-
tened, and how severe the impact is.
The advanced SRS offers the ability
to control the air bag inflation with
two levels. A first stage level is pro-
vided for moderate-severity impacts.
A second stage level is provided for
more severe impacts.
The passenger’s front air bag is
designed to help reduce the injury of
children sitting close to the instru-
ment panel in low speed collisions.
However, children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear seat.
According to the impact severity and
seat belt usage, the SRSCM (SRS
Control Module) controls the air bag
inflation. Failure to properly wear
seat belts can increase the risk or
severity of injury in an accident.
Additionally, your vehicle is equipped
with an occupant detection system in
the front passenger's seat.The occu-
pant detection system detects the
presence of a passenger in the front
passenger's seat and will turn off the
front passenger's air bag under cer-
tain conditions. For more detail, see
"Occupant detection system" in this
section.
WARNING - Modification
Modification to the seat struc-
ture can cause the air bag to
deploy at a different level than
should be provided.
WARNING - Replacement/
modifications
The front passenger seat, dash-
board or door should not be
replaced except by an authorized
Kia dealer using original Kia parts
designed for this vehicle and
model. Any other such replace-
ment or modification could
adversely affect the operation of
the occupant detection system
and your advanced air bags.
CAUTION - Seat Track
Sensor
Do not place any objects under-
neath the front seats as they
could damage the seat track
position sensor or interfere with
the occupant detection system.
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
Safety features of your vehicle
483
Manufacturers are required by gov-
ernment regulations to provide a
contact point concerning modifica-
tions to the vehicle for persons with
disabilities, which modifications may
affect the vehicle’s advanced air bag
system. That contact is Kia’s toll-free
Customer Assistance center at 1-
800-333-4Kia. However, Kia does
not endorse nor will it support any
changes to any part or structure of
the vehicle that could affect the
advanced air bag system, including
the occupant detection system.
Advanced air bags are combined
with pre-tensioner seat belts to help
provide enhanced occupant protec-
tion in frontal crashes. Front air bags
are not intended to deploy in colli-
sions in which sufficient protection
can be provided by the pre-tensioner
seat belt.
Front air bags are not intended to
deploy in side-impact, rear-impact or
rollover crashes. However, when
frontal deployment threshold is satis-
fied at side-impact, front air bags
may deploy. In addition, front air bags
will not deploy in frontal crashes
below the deployment threshold.
WARNING - SRS Wiring
Do not tamper with or discon-
nect SRS wiring or other com-
ponents of the SRS system.
Doing so could result in injury,
due to accidental deployment of
the air bags or by rendering the
SRS inoperative.
WARNING - Replacement
/Modifications
The front passenger seat, dash-
board or door should not be
replaced except by an authorized
Kia dealer using original Kia parts
designed for this vehicle and
model. Any other such replace-
ment or modification could
adversely affect the operation of
the occupant detection system
and your advanced air bags.
OEP036096N
OVQ036018N
1VQA2091
Rear impact
Side impact
Rollover
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
349
Safety features of your vehicle
Side air bag
Your vehicle is equipped with a side air
bag in each front seat. The purpose of
the air bag is to provide the vehicle's
driver and/or the front passenger with
additional protection than that offered
by the seat belt alone.
• The side air bags are designed to
deploy during certain side-impact
collisions, depending on the crash
severity, angle, speed and point of
impact.
• The side and/or curtain air bags do
not only deploy on the side of the
impact but also on the opposite side.
• The side and/or curtain air bags on
both sides of the vehicle will deploy if
a rollover or possible rollover is
detected.
• The side air bags are not designed
to deploy in all side impact or rollover
situations.
• The side air bag is supplemental to
the driver's and the passenger's
seat belt systems and is not a sub-
stitute for them. Therefore your
seat belts must be worn at all times
while the vehicle is in operation.
• For best protection from the side
air bag system and to avoid being
injured by the deploying side air
bag, both front seat occupants
should sit in an upright position
with the seat belt properly fas-
tened. The driver's hands should
be placed on the steering wheel at
the 9:00 and 3:00 positions. The
passenger's arms and hands
should be placed on their laps.
OPS033037
OPS033023
❈ The actual air bags in the vehicle may dif-
fer from the illustration.
WARNING - Unexpected
deployment
Avoid impact to the side impact
airbag sensor when the POWER
button is ON to prevent unex-
pected deployment of the side
impact air bag.
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
Safety features of your vehicle
503
• If seat or seat cover is damaged,
have the vehicle checked and
repaired by an authorized Kia deal-
er. Inform the dealer that your vehi-
cle is equipped with side air bags
and an occupant detection system.
Curtain air bag
Curtain air bags are located along
both sides of the roof rails above the
front and rear doors.
They are designed to help protect
occupants in certain side impacts
and to help prevent them from eject-
ing out of the vehicle as a result of a
rollover, especially when the seat-
belts are also in use. The curtain air
bags are designed to deploy during
certain side impact collisions, depend-
ing on the crash severity, angle, speed
and point of impact. The side and/or
curtain air bags do not only deploy on
the side of the impact but also on the
opposite side. Also, the curtain air bags
on both sides of the vehicle will deploy
in certain rollover situations.The curtain
air bags are not designed to deploy in
all side impact or rollover situations. Do
not allow the passengers to lean their
heads or bodies against the doors, put
their arms on the doors, stretch their
arms out of the window or place objects
between the doors and passengers
when they are seated on seats
equipped with side impact and/or cur-
tain air bags.
✽✽
NOTICE
Never try to open or repair any com-
ponents of the side and curtain air
bag system. This should only be
done by an authorized Kia dealer.
OPS033024
OPS033038
❈ The actual air bags in the vehicle may dif-
fer from the illustration.
WARNING - Deployment
Do not install any accessories
including seat covers, on the
side or near the side impact air
bag as this may affect the
deployment of the side air bags.
WARNING - Flying
objects
Do not place any objects (an
umbrella, bag, etc.) between the
front door and the front seat.
Such objects may become dan-
gerous projectiles if the side
airbag inflates.
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
351
Safety features of your vehicle
Why didn’t my air bag go off in a
collision? (Inflation and non-infla-
tion conditions of the air bag)
There are many types of accidents
in which the air bag would not be
expected to provide additional
protection.
These include rear impacts, sec-
ond or third collisions in multiple
impact accidents, as well as low
speed impacts.
OPSE034025/OPSE034026/OPSE034027/OPS033028/OPS033029
Air bag collision sensors
(1) SRS control module/Rollover sensor
(2) Front impact sensor
(3) Side impact sensor
(4) Side pressure sensor
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
Safety features of your vehicle
523
• Problems may arise if the sensor
installation angles are changed
due to the deformation of the front
bumper, front end module, body or
front doors and/or B pillar where
side collision sensors are installed.
Have the vehicle checked and
repaired by an authorized Kia deal-
er.
• Installing bumper guards (or side
step or running board) or replacing
a bumper (or front door module)
with non-genuine parts may
adversely affect your vehicle’s col-
lision and air bag deployment per-
formance.
Air bag inflation conditions
Front air bags
Front air bags are designed to inflate
in a frontal collision depending on
the intensity, speed or angles of
impact of the front collision.
1VQA2084
WARNING - Air bag
sensors
• Do not hit or allow any objects
to impact the locations where
air bags or sensors are
installed.
This may cause unexpected
air bag deployment, which
could result in serious per-
sonal injury or death.
• If the installation location or
angle of the sensors is altered
in any way, the air bags may
deploy when they should not
or they may not deploy when
they should.
Therefore, do not try to per-
form maintenance on or
around the air bag sensors.
Have the vehicle checked and
repaired by an authorized Kia
dealer.
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
353
Safety features of your vehicle
Side and/or curtain air bags
Side air bags (side and/or curtain air
bags) are designed to inflate when an
impact is detected by side collision
sensors depending on the strength,
speed or angles of impact resulting
from a side impact collision.
Also, the side and curtain air bags are
designed to inflate when a rollover is
detected by a rollover sensor.
Although the front air bags (driver’s
and front passenger’s air bags) are
designed to inflate in frontal colli-
sions, they also may inflate in other
types of collisions if the front impact
sensors detect a sufficient frontal
force in another type of impact. Side
and curtain air bags are designed to
inflate in certain side impact colli-
sions. They may inflate in other type
of collisions where a side force is
detected by the sensors. Side air bag
and/or curtain air bags may also
inflate where rollover sensors indi-
cate the possibility of a rollover
occurring (even if none actually
occurs) or in other situations, incluid-
ing when the vehicle is tilted while
being towed. Even where side and/or
curtain air bags would not provide
impact protection in a rollover, how-
ever, they will deploy to prevent ejec-
tion of occupants, especially those
who are restrained with seat belts.
If the vehicle chassis is impacted by
bumps or objects on unimproved
roads, the air bags may deploy. Drive
carefully on unimproved roads or on
surfaces not designed for vehicle
traffic to prevent unintended air bag
deployment.
OVQ036018N
OPS033039
❈ The actual air bags in the vehicle may dif-
fer from the illustration.
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
Safety features of your vehicle
543
Air bag non-inflation conditions
• In certain low-speed collisions the
air bags may not deploy. The air
bags are designed not to deploy in
such cases because they may not
provide benefits beyond the pro-
tection of the seat belts in such col-
lisions.
• Air bags are not designed to inflate
in rear collisions, because occu-
pants are moved backward by the
force of the impact. In this case,
inflated air bags would not be able
to provide any additional benefit.
• Front air bags may not inflate in
side impact collisions, because
occupants move to the direction of
the collision, and thus in side
impacts, frontal air bag deployment
would not provide additional occu-
pant protection.
OUN036087 OVQ036018N
1VQA2086
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
355
Safety features of your vehicle
• In an angled collision, the force of
impact may direct the occupants in
a direction where the air bags
would not be able to provide any
additional benefit, and thus the
sensors may not deploy any air
bags.
• Just before impact, drivers often
brake heavily. Such heavy braking
lowers the front portion of the vehi-
cle causing it to “ride” under a vehi-
cle with a higher ground clearance.
Air bags may not inflate in this
"under-ride" situation because
deceleration forces that are detect-
ed by sensors may be significantly
reduced by such “under-ride” colli-
sions.
• Front air bags may not inflate in
rollover accidents because front
airbag deployment would not pro-
vide additional occupant protection.
1VQA2090 1VQA20911VQA2089
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
Safety features of your vehicle
563
• Air bags may not inflate if the vehi-
cle collides with objects such as
utility poles or trees, where the
point of impact is concentrated to
one area and the full force of the
impact is not delivered to the sen-
sors.
SRS Care
The SRS is virtually maintenance-
free and so there are no parts you can
safely service by yourself. If the SRS
air bag warning light does not illumi-
nate, or continuously remains on,
have your vehicle immediately
inspected by an authorized Kia dealer.
Any work on the SRS system, such
as removing, installing, repairing, or
any work on the steering wheel, the
front passenger’s panel, front seats
and roof rails must be performed by
an authorized Kia dealer. Improper
handling of the SRS system may
result in serious personal injury.
• For cleaning the air bag pad cov-
ers, use only a soft, dry cloth or
one which has been moistened
with plain water. Solvents or clean-
ers could adversely affect the air
bag covers and proper deployment
of the system.
• If components of the air bag sys-
tem must be discarded, or if the
vehicle must be scrapped, certain
safety precautions must be
observed. An authorized Kia dealer
knows these precautions and can
give you the necessary informa-
tion. Failure to follow these precau-
tions and procedures could
increase the risk of personal injury.
1VQA2092
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
357
Safety features of your vehicle
Adding equipment to or modi-
fying your air bag-equipped
vehicle
If you modify your vehicle by changing
your vehicle's frame, bumper system,
front end or side sheet metal or ride
height, this may affect the operation of
your vehicle's air bag system.
Air bag warning label
Air bag warning labels, some required
by the U.S. National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA), are
attached to the sunvisor to alert the
driver and passengers of potential
risks of the air bag system.
WARNING - Tampering
with SRS
Do not tamper with or discon-
nect SRS wiring, or other com-
ponents of the SRS system.
Doing so could result in the
accidental inflation of the air
bags or by rendering the SRS
inoperative.
WARNING - Towing Vehicle
Always have the ignition off
when your vehicle is being
towed. The side air bags may
inflate if the vehicle is tilted
such as when being towed
because of the rollover sensors
in the vehicle.
OPS033030
OAM039041
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
Features of your vehicle
Smart key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
• Record your key number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
• Smart key function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
• Loss of the smart key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
• Smart key precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
• Smart key immobilizer system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
• Battery replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
• Operating door locks from outside the vehicle . . . . 4-11
• Operating door locks from inside the vehicle. . . . . . 4-12
• Impact sensing door unlock system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
• Auto door lock/unlock feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
• Speed sensing door lock system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
• Child-protector rear door lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
Tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
• Opening the tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
• Closing the tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
• Emergency tailgate safety release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
• Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
Hood. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
• Opening the hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
• Closing the hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
Panoramic sunroof. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
• Sunroof open warning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
• Sliding the sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
• Tilting the sunroof. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
• Sunshade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
• Resetting the sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
Steering wheel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
• Electric power steering (EPS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
• Tilt and telescopic steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
• Heated steering wheel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
• Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
• FLEX STEER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
• Inside rearview mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
• Outside rearview mirror. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36
Instrument cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40
• Instrument Cluster Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41
• LCD Display Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41
• Gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42
• Reduction gear shift indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-45
LCD Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46
• LCD Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46
• EV information mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47
4
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
• A/V Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-48
• Service Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-48
• User Settings Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49
• Warning Messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-52
Trip computer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-61
• Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-61
• Energy consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-61
• Trip A/B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-62
• Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-64
Warning and indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-65
• Warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-65
• Indicator Lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-72
Parking assist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-76
• Operation of the parking assist system. . . . . . . . . . . 4-76
• Non-operational conditions of parking assist system . . 4-78
• Self-diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-79
Rear camera display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-80
Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-81
• Headlamp escort . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-81
• Battery saver function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-81
• Daytime running light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-81
• Abnormal lamp operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-82
• Abnormal lamp operation due to stabilization of
electric control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-82
• Lighting control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-82
• High beam operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-84
• Turn signals and lane change signals . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-85
• Front fog light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-86
Wipers and washers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-87
• Windshield wiper/washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-87
• Rear window wiper/washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-87
• Windshield wipers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-87
• Windshield washers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-88
• Rear window wiper and washer switch . . . . . . . . . . 4-89
Interior light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-90
• Interior lamp AUTO cut. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-90
• Map lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-90
• Room lamp. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-91
• Luggage room lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-92
• Glove box lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-92
• Vanity mirror lamp. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-92
Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-93
• Rear window defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-93
Automatic climate control system. . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-94
• Automatic heating and air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . 4-95
• Manual heating and air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-96
• System operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-106
• Climate control air filter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-108
4
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
• Checking the amount of air conditioner refrigerant and
compressor lubricant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-109
• Air Conditioning refrigerant label . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-110
Windshield defrosting and defogging. . . . . . . . . 4-111
• Automatic climate control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-111
• Defogging logic. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-113
Clean air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-114
Auto defogging system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-115
Storage compartment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-116
• Center console storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-116
• Glove box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-116
• Sunglass holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-117
• Luggage box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-117
Interior features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-118
• Cup holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-118
• Sunvisor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-118
• Seat warmer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-119
• Seat air ventilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-121
• Rear seat warmer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-121
• Power outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-122
• Clothes hanger. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-123
• Floor mat anchor(s). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-123
• Luggage net holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-124
• Cargo area cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-125
Audio system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-127
• Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-127
• Audio remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-128
• Aux, USB and iPod
®
port. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-129
• Speaker lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-130
• How vehicle audio works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-131
• Using the USB device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-135
• Using iPod
®
device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-137
• Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-138
• Precautions for Safe Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-139
• When connecting a Bluetooth
®
Phone . . . . . . . . . . 4-139
• Voice Recognition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-140
• Audio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-141
• SiriusXM
®
Satellite Radio information . . . . . . . . . 4-151
4
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
Features of your vehicle
44
Record your key number
The key code num-
ber is stamped on
the key code tag
attached to the key
set. Should you
lose your keys, this number will
enable an authorized Kia dealer to
duplicate the keys easily. Remove
the key code tag and store it in a safe
place. Also, record the key code
number and keep it in a safe and
handy place, but not in the vehicle.
Smart key function
To remove the mechanical key, press
and hold the release button(1) and
remove the mechanical key (2).
To reinstall the mechanical key, put
the key into the hole and push it until
a click sound is heard.
With a smart key, you can lock or
unlock a door (and Tailgate) and start
the vehicle.
Refer to the following for more details.
SMART KEY
OXMA043316
WARNING - Smart key
Never leave the smart key in
your vehicle with unsupervised
children. Leaving children unat-
tended in a vehicle with a smart
key is dangerous. Children copy
adults and they could press the
start button. The key would
enable children to operate
power windows or other con-
trols, or even make the vehicle
move, which could result in seri-
ous bodily injury or death. result
in serious bodily injury or death.
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
45
Features of your vehicle
Door Lock
Using the door handle button
1. Carry the smart key.
2. Close all doors, hood and tailgate.
3. Press the button of the outside
door handle.
4. The hazard warning lights will blink
and the chime will sound once.
5. Make sure that doors are locked
by pulling the outside door handle.
The button will only operate when the
smart key is within 28~40 in. (0.7~1m)
from the outside door handle.
Even though you press the outside
door handle button, the doors will not
lock and the chime will sound for 3
seconds if any of following occur:
• The smart key is in the vehicle.
• The POWER button is in ON posi-
tion.
• Any door except the tailgate is open.
Using the button on the smart key
1 Close all doors, hood and tailgate.
2. Press the lock button(1).
3. The hazard warning lights will blink
and the chime will sound once.
4. Make sure that doors are locked
by pulling the outside door handle.
OXMA043316/Q
OPS043010
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
Features of your vehicle
64
Unlocking
Using the door handle button
1. Carry the smart key.
2. Press the button of the driver's
outside door handle.
3. The driver’s door will unlock. The
hazard warning lights will blink and
the chime will sound two times.
4. Press the button twice within 4
seconds and all doors and the tail-
gate will unlock and the hazard
warning lights will blink and the
chime will sound two times.
• The button will only operate when
the smart key is within 28~40 in.
(0.7~1m) from the outside door
handle.
• When the smart key is recognized
in the area of 28~40 in. (0.7~1m)
from the front outside door handle,
other people can also open the
doors.
• After unlocking the driver’s door or
all doors, the door(s) will lock auto-
matically unless the door is
opened.
Using the button on the smart key
1. Press the unlock button(2) of the
smart key.
2. The driver’s door will unlock. The
hazard warning lights will blink and
the chime will sound two times.
3. Press the unlock button(2) twice
within 4 seconds and all doors and
the tailgate will unlock.The hazard
warning lights will blink and the
chime will sound two times.
✽✽
NOTICE
After pressing the button, the doors
will lock automatically unless any
door is opened within 30 seconds.
✽✽
NOTICE
You can activate or deactivate the
Two Turn Unlock function. Refer to
"User settings" in this chapter.
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
47
Features of your vehicle
Tailgate unlocking
Using the tailgate handle button
1. Carry the smart key.
2. Press the tailgate handle button.
3. When all doors are locked, the
hazard warning lights will blink two
times.
Once the tailgate is opened and
then closed, the tailgate will lock
automatically.
If you are within 28~40 in. (0.7~1 m)
from the outside tailgate handle, with
your smart key in possession, the
tailgate will unlock and open when
you press the tailgate handle switch.
Using the button on the smart key
1. Press the tailgate unlock button(3)
for more than 1 second.
2. When all doors are locked, the
hazard warning lights will blink two
times.
Panic
1. Press the panic button(4) for more
than 1 second.
2.The horn sounds and hazard
warning light flash for about 30
seconds.
Start-up
You can start the vehicle without
inserting the key. For detailed infor-
mation refer to the “POWER button”
in chapter 5.
Loss of the smart key
A maximum of 2 smart keys can be
registered to a single vehicle.
If you happen to lose your smart key,
you will not be able to start the vehi-
cle. You should immediately take the
vehicle and remaining key to your
authorized Kia dealer(tow the vehi-
cle, if necessary) to protect it from
potential theft.
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
Features of your vehicle
84
Smart key precautions
• The smart key will not work if any
of the following occur:
- The smart key is close to a radio
transmitter such as a radio sta-
tion or an airport which can inter-
fere with normal operation of the
smart key.
- The smart key is near a mobile
two way radio system or a cellu-
lar phone.
- Another vehicle’s smart key is
being operated close to your
vehicle.
• When the smart key does not work
correctly, open and close the door
with the mechanical key and contact
an authorized Kia dealer.
• If the smart key is in close proximity
to your cell phone or smart phone,
the signal from the smart key could
be blocked by normal operation of
your cell phone or smart phone.
This is especially important when
the phone is active such as making
a call, receiving calls, text messag-
ing, and/or sending/receiving
emails. Avoid placing the smart key
and your cell phone or smart phone
in the same pants or jacket pocket
and maintain adequate distance
between the two devices.
✽✽
NOTICE
If the smart key is inoperative due to
exposure to water or liquids, it will
not be covered by your manufactur-
er’s vehicle warranty.
Smart key immobilizer system
Your vehicle is equipped with an elec-
tronic immobilizer system to reduce
the risk of unauthorized vehicle use.
Your immobilizer system is com-
prised of a small transponder in the
smart key and electronic devices
inside the vehicle.
With the immobilizer system, when-
ever you turn the POWER button to
the ON position by pressing the but-
ton while carrying the smart key, it
checks and determines and verifies if
the smart key is valid or not.
If the key is determined to be valid,
the vehicle will start.
If the key is determined to be invalid,
the vehicle will not start.
CAUTION
Keep the smart key away from
water or any liquid as it can
become damaged and not func-
tion properly.
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
49
Features of your vehicle
To deactivate the immobilizer
system:
Turn the POWER button to the ON
position by pressing the button while
carrying the smart key.
To activate the immobilizer system:
Turn the POWER button to the OFF
position. The immobilizer system
activates automatically. Without a
valid smart key for your vehicle, the
vehicle will not start.
In order to prevent theft of your vehi-
cle, do not leave spare keys anywhere
in your vehicle.Your Immobilizer pass-
word is a customer unique password
and should be kept confidential. Do
not leave this number anywhere in
your vehicle.
✽✽
NOTICE
When starting the vehicle, do not use
the key with other immobilizer keys
around. Otherwise the vehicle may
not start or may stop soon after it
starts. Keep each key separate in
order to avoid a starting malfunction.
Do not put metal accessories near
the smart key.
The vehicle may not start because
the metal accessories may interrupt
the transponder signal from transmit-
ting normally.
✽✽
NOTICE
If you need additional keys or lose
your keys, contact an authorized
Kia dealer.
This device complies with Part 15
of the FCC rules.
Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harm-
ful interference, and
2. This device must accept any inter-
ference received, including inter-
ference that may cause undesired
operation.
✽✽
NOTICE
Changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance could void
the user’s authority to operate the
equipment. If the keyless entry sys-
tem is inoperative due to changes or
modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compli-
ance, it will not be covered by your
manufacturer’s vehicle warranty.
CAUTION - Immobilizer
damage
Do not expose your immobilizer
system to moisture, static elec-
tricity and rough handling. This
may damage your immobilizer.
CAUTION - Immobilizer
alterations
Do not change, alter or adjust
the immobilizer system because
it could cause the immobilizer
system to malfunction.
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
Features of your vehicle
104
Battery replacement
A smart key battery should last for
several years, but if the smart key is
not working properly, try replacing
the battery with a new one. If you are
unsure how to use your smart key or
replace the battery, contact an
authorized Kia dealer.
1.Remove the mechanical key.
2.Pry open the rear cover.
3.Replace the battery with a new
battery (CR2032). When replacing
the battery, make sure the battery
position.
4.Install the battery in the reverse
order of removal.
• The smart key is designed to give
you years of trouble-free use, how-
ever it can malfunction if exposed
to moisture or static electricity. If
you are unsure how to use or
replace the battery, contact an
authorized Kia dealer.
• Using the wrong battery can cause
the smart key to malfunction. Be
sure to use the correct battery.
• To avoid damaging the smart key,
don't drop it, get it wet, or expose it
to heat or sunlight.
• An inappropriately disposed
battery can be harmful to
the environment and human
health. Dispose the battery
according to your local
law(s) or regulation.
OPS043002
CAUTION - Smart key
damage
Do not drop, get wet or expose
the smart key to heat or sun-
light, or it will be damaged.
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
411
Features of your vehicle
DOOR LOCKS
.
Operating door locks from
outside the vehicle
• Turn the key clockwise to lock and
counterclockwise to unlock.
• If you lock the driver's door with a key
- only the driver's door will lock.
• From the driver's door
- turn the key to the left once to
unlock the driver's door.
• Doors can also be locked and
unlocked with the smart key.
• Once the doors are unlocked, they
may be opened by pulling the door
handle.
• When closing the door, push the
door by hand. Make sure the doors
are closed securely.
✽✽
NOTICE
• In cold and wet climates, door lock
and door mechanisms may not
work properly due to freezing con-
ditions.
• If the door is locked/unlocked
multiple times in rapid succession
with either the vehicle key or door
lock switch, the system may stop
operating temporarily in order to
protect the circuit and prevent
damage to system components.
• To lock a door without the key,
push the inside door lock button (1)
or central door lock switch (2) to
the “Lock” position and close the
door (3).
• If you lock the door with the central
door lock switch (2), all vehicle
doors will lock automatically.
✽✽
NOTICE
Always carry the smart key after the
vehicle is turned off, engage the
parking brake, close all windows
and lock all doors when leaving your
vehicle unattended.
OPSE044011
Lock
Unlock
OPS043012
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
Features of your vehicle
124
Operating door locks from
inside the vehicle
With the door lock button
• To unlock a door, push the door
lock button (1) to the “Unlock” posi-
tion.The red mark (2) on the button
will be visible.
• To lock a door, push the door lock
button (1) to the “Lock” position. If
the door is locked properly, the red
mark (2) on the door lock button
will not be visible.
• To open a door, pull the door han-
dle (3) outward.
• If the inner door handle of the dri-
ver’s (or front passenger’s) door is
pulled when the door lock button is
in the lock position, the button will
unlock and the door will open.
• Front doors cannot be locked if the
smart key is in the vehicle and any
front door is opened.
If a power door lock ever fails to func-
tion while you are in the vehicle, try
one or more of the following tech-
niques to exit:
• Operate the door unlock feature
repeatedly (both electronic and
manual) while simultaneously
pulling on the door handle.
• Operate the other door locks and
handles, front and rear.
• Lower a front window and use the
key to unlock the door from outside.
• Move to the cargo area and open
the tailgate.
OPS043013
Lock
Unlock
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
413
Features of your vehicle
With central door lock switch
Operate by pressing the central door
lock switch.
• When pressing the front portion (1)
of the switch, all vehicle doors will
lock.
• When pressing the rear portion (2)
of the switch, all vehicle doors will
unlock.
• If the vehicle is in the ready ( )
mode and any front door is opened,
the doors will not lock even though
the front portion (1) of the central
door lock switch is pressed.
Impact sensing door unlock
system
In the event of air bag deployment
resulting from a vehicle impact, all
doors will automatically unlock.
Auto door lock/unlock feature
You can activate or deactivate the
auto door lock/unlock features in the
vehicle. Refer to "User settings" in
this chapter.
Speed sensing door lock
system
All doors will be automatically locked
after the vehicle speed exceeds 9.3
mph (15 km/h).
OPS043014
Driver’s door
OPS043015
Passenger’s door
WARNING - Unattended
children/ani-
mals
Never leave children or animals
unattended in your vehicle. An
enclosed vehicle can become
extremely hot, causing death or
severe injury to unattended
children or animals who cannot
escape the vehicle.
WARNING - Doors
The doors should always be
fully closed and locked while the
vehicle is in motion to prevent
accidental opening of the door.
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
Features of your vehicle
144
Child-protector rear door lock
The child safety lock is provided to
help prevent children from acciden-
tally opening the rear doors from
inside the vehicle. The rear door
safety locks should be used whenev-
er children are in the vehicle.
1. Open the rear door.
2. Push the child safety lock located
on the rear edge of the door to the
lock ( ) position. When the child
safety lock is in the lock position, the
rear door will not open even when
the inner door handle is pulled.
3. Close the rear door.
To open the rear door, pull the out-
side door handle.
Even though the doors may be
unlocked, the rear door will not open
by pulling the inner door handle (1)
until the rear door child safety lock is
unlocked.
OPS043016
WARNING - Rear door
locks
Use the rear door safety locks
whenever children are in the
vehicle. If a child accidently
opens the rear doors while the
vehicle is motion, he can fall out.
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
415
Features of your vehicle
Opening the tailgate
• The tailgate is locked or unlocked
when all doors are locked or
unlocked with the key, smart key or
central door lock switch.
• If unlocked, the tailgate can be
opened by pressing the handle
switch and then pulling the handle
up.
• Only the tailgate is unlocked if the
tailgate unlock button on the smart
key is pressed. Once the tailgate is
opened and then closed, the tail-
gate is locked automatically.
✽✽
NOTICE
In cold and wet climates, door lock
and door mechanisms may not work
properly due to freezing conditions.
The tailgate swings upward. Make
sure no objects or people are near
the rear of the vehicle when opening
the tailgate.
Closing the tailgate
To close the tailgate, lower and push
down the tailgate firmly. Make sure
that the tailgate is securely latched.
Make sure your hands, feet and other
parts of your body are safely out of
the way before closing the tailgate.
TAILGATE
CAUTION - Tailgate lift
Make certain that you close the
tailgate before driving your
vehicle. Possible damage may
occur to the tailgate lift cylin-
ders and attached hardware if
the tailgate is not closed prior to
driving.
OPSE044017 OPSE044018
WARNING - Rear cargo
area
Occupants should never ride in
the rear cargo area where no
restraints are available.
Occupants should always be
properly restrained.
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
Features of your vehicle
164
Emergency tailgate safety
release
Your vehicle is equipped with an
emergency tailgate safety release
lever located on the bottom of the
tailgate. When someone is inadver-
tently locked in the cargo area, the
tailgate can be opened by pushing
the release lever and pushing open
the tailgate.
WARNING
• No one should be allowed to
occupy the cargo area of the
vehicle at any time. The cargo
area is a very dangerous loca-
tion in the event of a crash.
• Use the release lever for
emergencies only. Use with
extreme caution, especially
while the vehicle is in motion.
OPSE044019
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
417
Features of your vehicle
(1) Driver’s door power window
switch
(2) Front passenger’s door power
window switch
(3) Rear door (left) power window
switch
(4) Rear door (right) power window
switch
(5) Window opening and closing
(6) Automatic power window
up/down
(7) Power window lock switch
In cold and wet climates, power win-
dows may not work properly due to
freezing conditions.
WINDOWS
OPS043020
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
Features of your vehicle
184
Power windows
The POWER button must be in the
ON position for power windows to
operate.
Each door has a power window
switch that controls the door's win-
dow. The driver has a power window
lock button which can block the oper-
ation of the rear passenger windows.
The power windows can be operated
for approximately 30 seconds after
the vehicle turned off or turned to the
ACC position. However, if the front
doors are opened, the power win-
dows cannot be operated even with-
in the 30 second period.
✽✽
NOTICE
While driving with the rear windows
down or with the sunroof (if
equipped) in an open (or partially
open) position, your vehicle may
demonstrate a wind buffeting or
pulsation noise. This noise is a nor-
mal occurrence and can be reduced
or eliminated by taking the follow-
ing actions. If the noise occurs with
one or both of the rear windows
down, partially lower both front
windows approximately one inch. If
you experience the noise with the
sunroof open, slightly reduce the
size of the sunroof opening.
Window opening and closing
The driver’s door has a master power
window switch that controls all the
windows in the vehicle.
To open or close a window, press
down or pull up the front portion of
the corresponding switch to the first
detent position (5).
OPS043021
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
419
Features of your vehicle
Auto up/down window
(for driver's window)
Pressing or pulling up the power win-
dow switch momentarily to the second
detent position (6) completely lowers
or raises the window even when the
switch is released. To stop the window
at the desired position while the win-
dow is in operation, pull up or press
down and release the switch.
If the power window does not operate
normally, the automatic power win-
dow system must be reset as follows:
1. Turn the POWER button to the ON
position.
2. Close the driver’s window and
continue pulling up the driver’s
power window switch for at least 1
second after the window is com-
pletely closed.
Automatic reversal
If the upward movement of the win-
dow is blocked by an object or part of
the body, the window will detect the
resistance and will stop upward
movement. The window will then
lower approximately 11.8 in. (30 cm)
to allow the object to be cleared.
The distance may vary based on the
size or position of the window. If the
window detects the resistance while
the power window switch is pulled up
continuously, the window will stop
upward movement then lower
approximately 1 in. (2.5 cm).
OPS043022
OUN026013
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
Features of your vehicle
204
And if the power window switch is
pulled up continuously again within 5
seconds after the window is lowered
by the automatic window reversal
feature, the automatic window rever-
sal will not operate.
The automatic reverse feature for the
driver’s window is only active when
the “auto up” feature is used by fully
pulling up the switch. The automatic
reverse feature will not operate if the
window is raised using the halfway
position on the power window switch.
Power window lock button
• The driver can disable the power
window switches on the passenger
doors by pressing the power win-
dow lock button located on the dri-
ver’s door to the LOCK position
(pressed).
WARNING
Always check for obstructions
before raising any window to
avoid injuries or vehicle damage.
If an object less than 4 mm (0.16
in.) in diameter is caught
between the window glass and
the upper window channel, the
automatic reverse window may
not detect the resistance and will
not stop and reverse direction.
OPS043023
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
421
Features of your vehicle
• When the power window lock
switch is pressed :
- The driver's master control can
operate all the power windows.
- The front passenger's control can
operate the front passenger's
power window.
- The rear passenger's control can-
not operate the rear passenger's
power window.
Always double check to make sure
all arms, hands, head and other
obstructions are safely out of the way
before closing a window.
CAUTION - Opening /
closing Window
To prevent possible damage to
the power window system, do
not open or close two windows
or more at the same time. This
will also ensure the longevity of
the fuse.
WARNING - Power
windows
Do not allow children to play
with the power windows. Keep
the power window lock switch
(on the driver's door) in the
LOCK (pressed) position.
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
Features of your vehicle
224
Opening the hood
1. Pull the release lever to unlatch
the hood. The hood should pop
open slightly.
Open the hood after turning off the
vehicle on a flat surface, shifting the
shift lever to the P (Park) position
and setting the parking brake.
2. Go to the front of the vehicle, raise
the hood slightly, pull the second-
ary latch (1) inside of the hood
center and lift the hood (2).
3. Raise the hood. It will completely
rise by itself after it has been
raised about halfway.
Closing the hood
1. Before closing the hood, check the
following:
• All filler caps in the motor com-
partment must be correctly
installed.
2. Lower the hood halfway and push
down to securely lock in place.
HOOD
OPS043024
OPSE044025
WARNING
Before closing the hood, ensure
that all obstructions are removed
from the hood opening. Closing
the hood with an obstruction
present in the hood opening may
result in severe personal injury.
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
423
Features of your vehicle
WARNING - Unsecured
hood
Always double check to be sure
that the hood is firmly latched
before driving away. If it is not
latched, the hood could fly open
while the vehicle is being driven,
causing a total loss of visibility,
which might result in an accident.
WARNING - Fire risk
Do not leave gloves, rags or any
other combustible material in the
motor compartment. Doing so
may cause a heat-induced fire.
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
Features of your vehicle
244
If your vehicle is equipped with a
sunroof, you can slide or tilt your
sunroof with the sunroof glass con-
trol lever located on the overhead
console (1).
The sunroof can only be opened,
closed, or tilted when the ignition
switch is in the ON position.
✽✽
NOTICE
• In cold and wet climates, the sun-
roof may not work properly due to
freezing conditions.
• After a vehicle is washed or in a
rainstorm be sure to wipe off any
water that is on the sunroof before
operating it.
✽✽
NOTICE
The sunroof cannot tilt when it is in
the slide position but can be slid
while in a tilt position.
PANORAMIC SUNROOF (IF EQUIPPED)
CAUTION - Sunroof control
Do not continue to pull or push
the sunroof glass control lever
after the sunroof is fully
opened, closed, or tilted.
Damage to the motor or system
components could occur.
OPS043028
WARNING - Roof cargo
Do not operate the sun roof
while using the roof rack to
transport cargo.This may cause
the cargo to come loose and
distract the driver.
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
425
Features of your vehicle
Sunroof open warning
(if equipped)
If the driver removes the ignition key
(smart key: turns off the engine)
when the sunroof is not fully closed,
the warning chime will sound for a
few seconds and a message will
appear on the LCD display or warn-
ing indicator will illuminate.
Close the sunroof securely when
leaving your vehicle.
Sliding the sunroof
When the sunshade is closed
If you pull the sunroof control lever
backward, both the sunshade and
sunroof glass will slide all the way
open. To stop the sunroof movement
at any point, pull or push the sunroof
glass control lever momentarily.
When the sunshade is opened
If you pull the sunroof glass control
lever backward, the sunroof glass will
slide all the way open. To stop the
sunroof glass movement at any point,
pull or push the sunroof control lever
momentarily.
To close the sunroof glass pull (or
push) the sunroof glass control lever
downward (or forward).
When you push the sunroof glass
control lever forward or pull it down-
ward while the sunshade opened,
the glass will be closed.
OPS043120
OPS043029
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
Features of your vehicle
264
Automatic reversal
If an object or part of the body is
detected while the sunroof is closing
automatically, it will reverse the direc-
tion, and then stop.
The auto reverse function does not
work if a tiny obstacle is between the
sliding glass and the sunroof sash.
You should always check that all pas-
sengers and objects are away from
the sunroof before closing it.
Tilting the sunroof
Before opening or closing the sun-
roof, open the sunshade (refer to the
following page for instructions on
how to use the sunshade).
To tilt up the sunroof
- Push the sunroof glass control
lever upward.
❈ When you push the sunroof glass
control lever upward while the
sunshade closed, the sunshade
will be opened halfway and then
glass will be tilt up.
To tilt down (or close) the sunroof
- Push the sunroof glass control
lever forward or pull it downward
When you push the sunroof glass
control lever forward or pull it down-
ward while the sunshade opened,
the glass will be tilt down.
OPS043030OXM049029
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
427
Features of your vehicle
Do not extend the face, neck, arms
or body outside the sunroof while
driving.
Sunshade
To open the sunshade
Press the sunshade open button (1).
To stop the sliding at any point, press
the sunshade control switch momen-
tarily.
OPS043031
CAUTION - Sunroof motor
damage
If you try to open the sunroof
when the temperature is below
freezing or when the sunroof is
covered with snow or ice, the
glass or the motor could be
damaged.
CAUTION
To prevent damage to the sun-
roof, periodically remove any
dirt that may accumulate on the
guide rail.
WARNING - Sunroof
Operation
When closing the sunroof, make
sure there are no body parts in
the movement range of the slid-
ing roof. Parts of the body could
become trapped or crushed.
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
Features of your vehicle
284
To close the sunshade when the
sunroof glass is closed
- Press the sunshade close button (2).
❈ When you press the sunshade
close button(2) with the sunroof
glass opened
The sunshade will be closed halfway,
then sunroof glass will be closed and
then sunshade will be fully closed
finally.
To stop the sliding at any point, press
the sunshade control switch momen-
tarily.
✽✽
NOTICE
Wrinkles formed on the sunshade as
material characteristic are normal.
Resetting the sunroof
Whenever the vehicle battery is dis-
connected or discharged, you must
reset your sunroof system as follows:
1.Turn the ignition switch to the ON
position.
2.Close the sunshade and sunroof
completely if opened.
3.Release the sunroof control lever.
4.Push the sunroof control lever for-
ward in the direction of close (about
10 seconds) until the sunroof moves
a little. Then, release the lever.
CAUTION - Automatic
sunroof shade
• Do not pull or push the sun-
shade by hand as such action
may damage the sunshade or
cause it to malfunction.
• Close the sunroof when driv-
ing in dusty environments.
Dust may cause a malfunction
of the vehicle system.
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
429
Features of your vehicle
5.Push the sunroof control lever for-
ward in the direction of close, until
the sunroof operates as follows
again:
The sunshade and sunroof glass
slide open → The sunroof glass
slide close → The sunshade close
Then, release the lever.
When this is complete, the sunroof
system has been reset.
✽✽
NOTICE
If you do not reset the sunroof, it
may not work properly.
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
Features of your vehicle
304
Electric power steering (EPS)
The power steering uses a motor to
assist you in steering the vehicle. If the
vehicle is in not the ready ( ) mode
or if the power steering system
becomes inoperative, the vehicle may
still be steered, but it will require
increased steering effort.
The motor driven power steering is
controlled by a power steering con-
trol unit which senses the steering
wheel torque and vehicle speed to
command the motor.
The steering becomes heavier as
the vehicle’s speed increases and
becomes lighter as the vehicle’s
speed decreases for optimum steer-
ing control.
Should you notice any change in the
effort required to steer during normal
vehicle operation, have the power
steering checked by an authorized
Kia dealer.
• If the Electric Power Steering
System does not operate normally,
the warning light will illuminate on
the instrument cluster.The steering
wheel may require increased
steering effort. Take your vehicle to
an authorized Kia dealer and have
the vehicle checked as soon as
possible.
• When you operate the steering
wheel in low temperature, noise
may occur. If temperature rises, the
noise will likely disappear. This is a
normal condition.
• When the vehicle is stationary,
when the steering wheel is turned
all the way to the left or right con-
tinuously, the steering wheel
becomes harder to turn.The power
assist is limited to protect the
motor from overheating.
As time passes, the steering wheel
return to its normal condition.
✽✽
NOTICE
The following symptoms may occur
during normal vehicle operation:
• The EPS warning light does not
illuminate.
• The steering gets heavy immedi-
ately after turning the POWER
button on. This happens as the
system performs the EPS system
diagnostics. When the diagnostics
are completed, the steering wheel
will return to its normal condition.
• A click noise may be heard from
the EPS relay after the POWER
button is turned to the ON or OFF
position.
• A motor noise may be heard when
the vehicle is at a stop or at a low
driving speed.
• If the Electric Power Steering
System does not operate normally,
the warning light will illuminate on
the instrument cluster. The steer-
ing wheel may become difficult to
control or operate abnormally.
Take your vehicle to an authorized
Kia dealer and have the vehicle
checked as soon as possible.
(Continued)
STEERING WHEEL
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
431
Features of your vehicle
(Continued)
• When you operate the steering
wheel in low temperature, abnor-
mal noise may occur. If tempera-
ture rises, the noise will likely dis-
appear. This is a normal condition.
• When the charging system warn-
ing light comes on due to the low
voltage (When the alternator or
battery) does not operate normal-
ly or it malfunctions), the steering
wheel may require increased
steering effort.
Tilt and telescopic steering
Tilt and telescopic steering allows
you to adjust the steering wheel
before you drive.You can also raise it
to give your legs more room when
you exit and enter the vehicle.
The steering wheel should be posi-
tioned so that it is comfortable for
you to drive, while permitting you to
see the instrument panel warning
lights and gauges.
To change the steering wheel angle,
pull down the lock-release lever (1),
adjust the steering wheel to the
desired angle (2) and height (3, if
equipped) then pull up the lock-
release lever to lock (4) the steering
wheel in place. Be sure to adjust the
steering wheel to the desired posi-
tion before driving.
OPS043032
WARNING - Steering
wheel adjustment
Never adjust the angle and
height of the steering wheel
while driving. You may lose
steering control.
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
Features of your vehicle
324
Heated steering wheel
With the POWER button in the ON
position, pressing the heated steer-
ing wheel button warms the steering
wheel. The indicator on the button
will illuminate.
To turn the heated steering wheel off,
press the button once again. The
indicator on the button will turn off.
✽✽
NOTICE
The heated steering wheel will turn
off automatically approximately 30
minutes after the heated steering
wheel is turned on.
Horn
To sound the horn, press the horn
symbols on your steering wheel.
Check the horn regularly to be sure it
operates properly.
✽✽
NOTICE
To sound the horn, press the area
indicated by the horn symbol on
your steering wheel (see illustra-
tion). The horn will operate only
when this area is pressed.
OPSE044033
OPS043034
CAUTION
• Do not install any grip to oper-
ate the steering wheel. This
causes damage to the heated
steering wheel system.
• When cleaning the heated
steering wheel, do not use an
organic solvent such as paint
thinner, benzene, alcohol and
gasoline. Doing so may dam-
age the surface of the steering
wheel.
• If the surface of steering
wheel is damaged by sharp
object, damage to the heated
steering wheel components
could occur.
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
433
Features of your vehicle
FLEX STEER
The FLEX STEER controls steering
effort based upon as driver's prefer-
ence or road condition.
You can select the desired steering
mode by pressing the FLEX STEER
button.
When the steering mode button is
pressed, the selected steering mode
will appear on the instrument cluster.
If the steering mode button is pressed
within 4 seconds, the steering mode
will change as shown above.
If the steering wheel mode button is
not pressed for about 4 seconds, the
LCD display will change to the previ-
ous screen.
Normal mode
The normal mode offers medium
steering effort.
OPS043036
OPSE044129
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
Features of your vehicle
344
Sport mode
The steering wheel becomes heav-
ier. The sport mode is usually used
when driving on the highway.
Comfort mode
The steering wheel becomes lighter.
The comfort mode is usually used
when driving in the city or when park-
ing the vehicle.
• For your safety, if you press the
steering mode button while operat-
ing the steering wheel, but the
steering effort will not change
immediately. After operating the
steering wheel, the steering effort
will change automatically to the
selected mode.
• Use caution when changing the
steering mode while driving.
• When the electronic power steer-
ing is not operating properly, the
flex steering wheel will not work.
OPSE044130 OPSE044131L
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
435
Features of your vehicle
MIRRORS
Inside rearview mirror
Adjust the rearview mirror so that the
center view through the rear window
is seen. Make this adjustment before
you start driving.
Do not place objects in the rear seat or
cargo area which would interfere with
your vision through the rear window.
Day/night rearview mirror
(if equipped)
Make this adjustment before you
start driving and while the day/night
lever is in the day position.
Pull the day/night lever toward you to
reduce the glare from the headlights
of the vehicles behind you during
night driving.
Remember that you lose some
rearview clarity in the night position.
Electric chromic mirror (ECM)
(if equipped)
The electric rearview mirror automat-
ically controls the glare from the
headlights of the vehicles behind you
in nighttime or low light driving condi-
tions.The sensor mounted in the mir-
ror senses the light level around the
vehicle, and automatically controls
the headlight glare from the vehicles
behind you.
When the vehicle is in the ready ( )
mode the glare is automatically con-
trolled by the sensor mounted in the
rearview mirror.
Whenever the shift lever is shifted
into reverse (R), the mirror will auto-
matically go to the brightest setting in
order to improve the drivers view
behind the vehicle.
OAM049023
Day
Night
WARNING - Mirror adjust-
ment
Do not adjust the rearview mir-
ror while the vehicle is moving.
This could result in loss of con-
trol.
WARNING
Do not modify the inside mirror
and don’t install a wide mirror. It
could result in injury, during an
accident or deployment of the
air bag.
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
Features of your vehicle
364
To operate the electric rearview mirror:
• The mirror defaults to the ON posi-
tion whenever the POWER button
is turned on.
• Press the ON/OFF button (1) to
turn the automatic dimming func-
tion off. The mirror indicator light
will turn off.
Press the ON/OFF button (1) to
turn the automatic dimming func-
tion on. The mirror indicator light
will illuminate.
Outside rearview mirror
Be sure to adjust the mirror angles
before driving.
Your vehicle is equipped with both
left-hand and right-hand outside
rearview mirrors. The mirrors can be
adjusted remotely with the remote
switch. The mirror heads can be fold-
ed back to prevent damage during an
automatic vehicle wash or when
passing through a narrow street.
The right outside rearview mirror is
convex. Objects seen in the mirror
are closer than they appear.
Use your interior rearview mirror or
direct observation to determine the
actual distance of following vehicles
when changing lanes.
CAUTION - Cleaning
mirror
When cleaning the mirror, use a
paper towel or similar material
dampened with glass cleaner.
Do not spray glass cleaner
directly on the mirror. It may
cause the liquid cleaner to enter
the mirror housing.
OAM042349L
Indicator
Sensor
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
437
Features of your vehicle
If the mirror is jammed with ice, do
not adjust the mirror by force. Use an
approved spray de-icer (not radiator
antifreeze) to release the frozen
mechanism or move the vehicle to a
warm place and allow the ice to melt.
Remote control
Electric type
The electric remote control mirror
switch allows you to adjust the posi-
tion of the left and right outside
rearview mirrors. To adjust the posi-
tion of either mirror the POWER but-
ton should be in the ACC or ON posi-
tion. Move the switch (1) to R or L to
select the right side mirror or the left
side mirror, then press a correspon-
ding point on the mirror adjustment
control to position the selected mirror
up, down, left or right.
After the adjustment, put the switch
into the neutral (center) position to
prevent inadvertent adjustment.
CAUTION - Rearview
mirror
Do not scrape ice off the mirror
face; this may damage the sur-
face of the glass. If ice should
restrict the movement of the mir-
ror, do not force the mirror for
adjustment.To remove ice, use a
deicer spray, or a sponge or soft
cloth with very warm water.
WARNING - Mirror
adjustment
Do not adjust or fold the outside
rearview mirrors while the vehi-
cle is moving. This could result
in loss of control.
OPS043035
CAUTION - Outside mirror
• The mirrors stop moving when
they reach the maximum
adjusting angles, but the
motor continues to operate
while the switch is pressed.
Do not press the switch longer
than necessary, the motor
may be damaged.
• Do not attempt to adjust the
outside rearview mirror by
hand. Doing so may damage
the parts.
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
Features of your vehicle
384
Folding the outside rearview mirror
Manual type
To fold the outside rearview mirror,
grasp the housing of the mirror and
then fold it toward the rear of the
vehicle.
Electric type
The outside rearview mirror can be
folded or unfolded by pressing the
switch as below.
Left (1) : The mirror will unfold.
Right (2) : The mirror will fold.
Center (AUTO, 3) :
The mirror will fold or unfold auto-
matically as follows:
• Without smart key system
- The mirror will fold or unfold when
the door is locked or unlocked by
the transmitter.
• With smart key system
- The mirror will fold or unfold when
the door is locked or unlocked by
the smart key.
- The mirror will fold or unfold when
the door is locked or unlocked by
the button on the outside door
handle.
- The mirror will unfold when you
approach the vehicle (all doors
closed and locked) with a smart
key in possession.
OPS043037
OPS043038
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
439
Features of your vehicle
Outside mirror defroster
The outside mirror defroster will
operate at the same time you turn on
the rear window defroster.
CAUTION - Electric type
outside rearview mirror
The electric type outside
rearview mirror operates even
though the POWER button is in
the OFF position. However, to
prevent unnecessary battery dis-
charge, do not adjust the mirrors
longer than necessary while the
vehicle is in not the ready ( )
mode. In case it is an electric
type outside rearview mirror,
don’t fold it by hand. It could
cause motor failure.
OPSE045309N
OPS043152
■ Type B
■ Type A
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
Features of your vehicle
404
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
1. Motor operation gauge
2. Speedometer
3. Range meter
4. Warning and indicator lights
5. State of charge gauge
6. LCD display
OPSE044300N
❈ The actual cluster in the vehicle may differ
from the illustration.
For more details, refer to the "Gauges" in
this chapter.
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
441
Features of your vehicle
Instrument Cluster Control
Adjusting Instrument Cluster
Illumination
The brightness of the instrument
panel illumination is changed by
pressing the illumination control but-
ton ("+" or "-") when the POWER but-
ton is ON, or the tail lights are turned
on.
• If you hold the illumination control
button ("+" or "-"), the brightness
will be changed continuously.
• If the brightness reaches to the
maximum or minimum level, an
alarm will sound.
LCD Display Control
The LCD display modes can be
changed by using the control buttons
on the steering wheel.
(1) : MODE button for changing
modes or SELECT button
for setting the selected item
(2) : MOVE button for changing
items or RESET button for
resetting the selected item
❈ For the LCD modes, refer to “LCD
Display” in this chapter.
OPSE044039
OPSE044117L
OPS043040
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
Features of your vehicle
424
Gauges
Speedometer
The speedometer indicates the
speed of the vehicle and is calibrated
in miles per hour (mph) or kilometers
per hour (km/h).
Motor operation gauge
It shows the energy consumption rate
of the vehicle and the charge/dis-
charge status of the regenerative
brakes.
• POWER : It shows the energy con-
sumption rate of the
vehicle when driving
uphill or accelerating.
The more electric energy
is used, the higher the
gauge level.
• ECO GUIDE : It shows the energy
consumption rate
during normal driv-
ing condition.
• CHARGE : It shows the charging
status of the battery
when it is being charged
by the regenerative
brakes (decelerating or
driving on a downhill
road). The more electric
energy is charged, the
lower the gauge level.
OPSE044101N
OPSE044102
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
443
Features of your vehicle
State of charge (SOC) gauge for
high voltage battery
It shows the charging status of the
high voltage battery.
"MIN" position on the indicator indi-
cates that there is not enough ener-
gy in the high voltage battery. "MAX"
position indicates that the driving
battery is fully charged.
When driving on highways or motor-
ways, make sure to check in advance if
the driving battery is charged enough.
When there are 4 gauge bars (near
the "MIN" area) on the high voltage
charge indicator, the warning lamp
turns ON to alert you of the battery
level.
When the warning lamp turns ON, the
vehicle can drive an additional
12.4~24.8 miles (20~40 km) (depend-
ing on the driving speed, heater/air
conditioner, weather, driving style, and
other factors). Charging is required.
When there are 1-2 gauge bars left
for the high voltage battery, the vehi-
cle speed is limited and then eventu-
ally the vehicle will be turned OFF.
Charge the vehicle immediately.
OPSE044103
OPSE044104
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
Features of your vehicle
444
Odometer
The odometer Indicates the total dis-
tance that the vehicle has been driv-
en and should be used to determine
when periodic maintenance should
be performed.
- Odometer range : 0 ~ 999999 miles
or kilometers.
Outside Temperature Gauge
This gauge indicates the current out-
side air temperatures by 1°F (1°C).
- Temperature range : -40°F ~ 140°F
(-40°C ~ 60°C)
The outside temperature on the dis-
play may not change immediately
like a general thermometer to pre-
vent the driver from being inattentive.
The temperature unit can be changed
by using the "User Settings" mode of
the LCD display
❈ For more details, refer to “LCD
Display” in this chapter.
OPSE044118N OPSE044202N
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
445
Features of your vehicle
Reduction gear shift indicator
This indicator displays which reduc-
tion gear shift lever is selected.
• Park :P
• Reverse : R
• Neutral : N
• Drive :D
• Regenerate brake : B
❈ For the detailed explanation of
each shift range, refer to
"Reduction Gear" in chapter 5.
OPSE044125L
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
Features of your vehicle
464
LCD Modes
LCD DISPLAY
Modes Symbol Explanation
EV information
This mode displays EV system energy flow and ECO level.
For more details, refer to “EV information mode" in this chapter.
Trip Computer
This mode displays driving information like the tripmeter,
energy consumption, and so on.
For more details, refer to “Trip Computer” in this chapter.
A/V This mode displays the state of the A/V system.
Service
This mode informs of service interval (mileage or days) and warning messages
related to TPMS and so on.
Master warning
User Settings On this mode, you can change settings of the doors, lamps, and so on.
❈ For controlling the LCD modes, refer to "LCD Display Control" in this chapter.
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
447
Features of your vehicle
EV information mode
EV information mode shows EV
energy flow and ECO level.
To change the EV information mode,
press the (MOVE) button
EV energy flow
EV energy flow notifies the drivers of
energy flow in operating modes.
Following modes show drivers the
current operating condition.
• EV Propulsion :
Energy flows from high voltage
battery to wheel when the vehicle
is driven by motor
• Regeneration :
Energy flows from wheel to high
voltage battery when you release
the accelerator pedal or press the
brake pedal.
ECO Level
When the vehicle is started, the ECO
Level display will indicate level. If you
drive economically, the ECO Level
will increase. However, if you do not
drive economically, the ECO Level
will decrease.
OPSE044240L
EV energy flow
ECO Level
OPSE044241L
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
Features of your vehicle
484
A/V Mode
This mode displays the state of the
A/V system.
Service Mode
Service Interval
Service interval
It calculates and displays when you
need a scheduled maintenance
service (mileage or days).
If the remaining mileage or time
reaches 1,500 mi. (1,500 km) or 30
days, "Service Interval" message is
displayed for several seconds each
time you set the POWER button to
the ON position.
Service required
If you do not have your vehicle serv-
iced according to the already inputted
service interval, “Service required”
message is displayed for several sec-
onds each time you set the POWER
button to the ON position (The mileage
and time changes to "---").
To reset the service interval to the
mileage and days you inputted before:
- Press the RESET button for
more than 1 second.
OPSE044266N
OPSE044274L
OPSE044242
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
449
Features of your vehicle
Service interval OFF
If the service interval is not set,
“Service interval OFF” message is
displayed on the LCD display.
✽✽
NOTICE
If any of the following conditions
occurs, the mileage and days may be
incorrect.
- The battery cable is disconnected.
- The fuse switch is turned off.
- The battery is discharged.
Master Warning Mode
• This warning light informs the driver
the following situations
- TPMS
- Service reminder
The Master Warning Light illumi-
nates when more than one of the
above warning situations occur. At
this time, the LCD Modes Icon will
change from ( ) to ( ).
If the warning situation is solved, the
LCD Modes Icon will be changed back
to its previous icon ( ).
User Settings Mode
Description
On this mode, you can change set-
ting of the doors, lamps, and so on.
OPSE044212L
OTF044192L
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
Features of your vehicle
504
Door
Auto Lock
• Off:
The auto door lock operation will
be deactivated.
• Enable on speed:
All doors will be automatically
locked when the vehicle speed
exceeds 9.3mph (15km/h).
• Enable on shift:
All doors will be automatically
locked if the reduction gear shift
lever is shifted from the P (Park)
position to the R (Reverse), N
(Neutral), or D (Drive) position.
Auto Unlock
• Off:
The auto door unlock operation will
be canceled.
• Vehicle off:
All doors will be automatically
unlocked when the POWER button
is set to the OFF position.
• On shift P:
All doors will be automatically
unlocked if the reduction gear shift
lever is shifted to the P (Park) posi-
tion.
• Driver Door Unlock:
All doors will be automatically
unlocked if the driver's door is
unlocked.
Two Press Unlock
• Off:
The two press unlock function will
be deactivated.Therefore, all doors
will unlock if the door is unlocked.
• On:
The driver’s door will unlock if the
door is unlocked. When the door is
unlocked again within 4 seconds,
all doors will unlock.
Horn Feedback
• Off:
The Horn feedback operation will
be deactivated.
• On:
After locking the door by pressing
the lock button on the transmitter, if
you press the lock button again
within 4 seconds, the warning
sound will operate once to indicate
that all doors are locked.
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
451
Features of your vehicle
Lamp
One Touch Turn Lamp (if equipped)
If this item is checked, the lane
change signals will blink 3, 5 or 7
times when the turn signal lever is
moved slightly.
Head Lamp Delay (if equipped)
If this item is checked, the headlamp
delay function will be activated.
Settings
Language
Choose the language you prefer
within the LCD.
Temperature Unit
Convert the temperature unit from °C
to °F or from °F to °C.
Welcome Sound (if equipped)
If this item is checked, the welcome
sound function will be activated.
Energy Consumption Auto Reset
• Auto Reset :
The average energy consumption will
reset automatically when charge the
high voltage battery more than 10%
• Manual Reset:
The average energy consumption
will not reset automatically when
charge the high voltage battery more
than 10%
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
Features of your vehicle
524
Service Interval
On this mode, you can activate the
service interval function with mileage
(mi. or km) and period (months).
Warning Messages
Low Battery
When the high voltage battery level
reaches below 20%, this warning
message illuminates.
In this case, the warning lamp on the
instrument cluster ( ) turns ON
simultaneously.
Charge the high voltage battery
immediately.
Low Battery. Charge immediately
When the high voltage battery level
reaches below 10%, this warning
message illuminates .
In this case, the warning lamp on the
instrument cluster ( ) turns ON
simultaneously and the distance to
empty gauge will be displayed as “---”.
Charge the high voltage battery
immediately.
OPSE044136N
OPSE044214L
OPSE044213L
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
453
Features of your vehicle
Charge immediately. Power limited
When the high voltage battery level
reaches below 7%, this warning
message illuminates.
In this case, the warning lamp on the
instrument cluster ( ) and the
power down warning lamp ( ) turn
ON simultaneously and the distance
to empty gauge will be displayed as
“---”.
The vehicle’s power will be reduced
to minimize the energy consumption
of the high voltage battery. Charge
the battery immediately.
Power limited
In the following cases, this warning
message illuminates when the vehi-
cle’s power is limited for the safety.
• When the high voltage battery is
below a certain level, or voltage is
decreasing.
• When the temperature of the motor
or high voltage battery is too high
or too low.
• When there is a problem with the
cooling system or a failure that
may interrupt normal driving.
When this warning message is dis-
played, do not accelerate or start the
vehicle suddenly.
Charge the battery immediately
when the high voltage battery level is
not enough.
OPSE044215L
OPSE044264L
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
Features of your vehicle
544
Unplug vehicle to start
When the vehicle is started while the
charging connector is connected,
this warning message illuminates.
Remove the charging connector and
start the vehicle.
Charging door open
When the vehicle is started while the
charging door is opened, this warn-
ing message illuminates. Make sure
to close the charging door after
charging is complete.
Check electric vehicle system
This warning message illuminates
when a failure related to EV control
system occurs.
Refrain from driving when the warn-
ing message is displayed. In this
case, have your vehicle inspected by
an authorized Kia dealer.
OPSE044216L
OPSE044224L
OPSE044223L
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
455
Features of your vehicle
Low Battery Temp. Power limited
This warning message illuminates to
protect battery and electric vehicle
system when the high voltage bat-
tery temperature is too low.
If this warning message is still illumi-
nated even after the ambient temper-
ature has increased, have your vehi-
cle inspected by an authorized Kia
dealer.
Battery Overheated! Stop vehicle
This warning message illuminates to
protect battery and electric vehicle
system when the high voltage bat-
tery temperature is too high.
Turn off the POWER button and stop
the vehicle so that the battery tem-
perature decreases.
If this warning message is still illumi-
nated even after you have stopped the
vehicle for a certain time, refrain from
driving and have your vehicle inspect-
ed by an authorized Kia dealer.
Stop vehicle and check power
supply
This warning message illuminates
when a failure occurs in the power
supply system.In this case, park the
vehicle in a safe location and tow
your vehicle to the nearest author-
ized Kia dealer and have the vehicle
inspected.
OPSE044265L
OPSE044219L
OPSE044220L
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
Features of your vehicle
564
Check brakes
This warning message illuminates
when the brake performance is low or
the regenerative brake does not work
properly due to a failure in the brake
system.In this case, it may take longer
for the brake pedal to operate and the
braking distance may become longer.
Refrain from driving when the warn-
ing message is displayed. In this
case, have your vehicle inspected by
an authorized Kia dealer as soon as
possible.
Stop vehicle and check brakes
This warning message illuminates
when a failure occurs in the brake
system.In this case, park the vehicle
in a safe location and tow your vehicle
to the nearest authorized Kia dealer
and have the vehicle inspected.
Shift to P position
• This warning message illuminates if
you try to turn off the vehicle without
the shift lever in P (Park) position.
• At this time, the POWER button
turns to the ACC position (If you
press the POWER button once
more, it will turn to the ON position).
OPSE044221L
OPSE044222L
OPSE044148L
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
457
Features of your vehicle
Low Key Battery
• This warning message illuminates
if the battery of the smart key is
discharged when the POWER but-
ton changes to the OFF position.
Press brake pedal to start vehicle
• This warning message illuminates
if the POWER button changes to
the ACC position twice by pressing
the button repeatedly without
depressing the brake pedal.
• It means that you should depress
the brake pedal to start the vehicle.
Key not in vehicle
• This warning message illuminates
if the smart key is not in the vehicle
while the door is opened or closed
with the POWER button in the ACC
position or the vehicle is in the
ready ( ) mode.
• It means that you should always
have the smart key with you.
OPSE044142L
OPSE044152L OPSE044138L
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
Features of your vehicle
584
Key not detected
• This warning message illuminates if
the smart key is not detected when
you press the POWER button.
Press POWER button again
• This warning message illuminates
if you can not operate the POWER
button when there is a problem
with the POWER button system.
• It means that you could start the
engine by pressing the POWER
button once more.
• If the warning illuminates each
time you press the POWER button,
have your vehicle inspected by an
authorized Kia dealer.
Press POWER button with key
• This warning message illuminates
if you press the POWER button
while the warning message “Key
not detected” is illuminating.
• At this time, the immobilizer indica-
tor light blinks.
OPSE044140L OPSE044144L OPSE044146L
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
459
Features of your vehicle
Check BRAKE SWITCH fuse
• This warning message illuminates
if the brake switch fuse is discon-
nected.
• It means that you should replace
the fuse with a new one. If that is not
possible, you can start the engine
by pressing the POWER button for
10 seconds in the ACC position.
Door Open
• It means that any door is open.
Tailgate Open
• It means that the tailgate is open.
OPSE044157L OPSE043122OPSE043121
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
Features of your vehicle
604
Turn on FUSE SWITCH
• This warning message illuminates
if the fuse switch on the fuse box is
OFF.
• It means that you should turn the
fuse switch on.
For more details, refer to “Fuses” in
chapter 7.
Charger Error!
• This message is displayed when
the charging failed by external nor-
mal charger error.
You should change and charge with
the other external charger immedi-
ately.
Quick Charger Error!
• This message is displayed when
the charging failed by external
quick charger error.
You should change and charge with
the other external charger immedi-
ately.
OPSE044154L OPSE045323L OPSE045324L
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
461
Features of your vehicle
Overview
Description
The trip computer is a microcomput-
er-controlled driver information sys-
tem that displays information related
to driving.
✽✽
NOTICE
Some driving information stored in
the trip computer (for example
Average Vehicle Speed) resets if the
battery is disconnected.
Trip Modes
Energy consumption
Average energy consumption (1)
• The average energy consumption
is calculated by the total driving dis-
tance and the high voltage battery
consumption since the last average
energy consumption reset.
- Average energy consumption
range : 0.0 ~ 99.9 miles/kwh
• The average energy consumption
can be reset both manually and
automatically.
TRIP COMPUTER
To change the trip mode, press the
MOVE button .
• Tripmeter [A]
• Average Vehicle Speed [A]
• Elapsed Time [A]
TRIP A
• Tripmeter [B]
• Average Vehicle Speed [B]
• Elapsed Time [B]
TRIP B
• Average energy consumption
• Instant energy consumption
Energy consumption
OPSE044105N
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
Features of your vehicle
624
Manual reset
To clear the average energy con-
sumption manually, press the but-
ton (MOVE) on the steering wheel for
more than 1 second when the aver-
age energy consumption is displayed.
Automatic reset
To make the average energy con-
sumption be reset automatically
whenever recharging, select the
“Auto Reset” mode in User Settings
menu of the LCD display (Refer to
“LCD Display”).
Under “Auto Reset” mode, the aver-
age energy consumption will be
cleared to zero (---) when the driving
distance exceeds 0.19 mile (300m)
after recharging more than 10%.
Instant energy consumption (2)
• This mode displays the instant ener-
gy consumption during the last few
seconds when the vehicle speed is
more than 10 km/h (6.2 MPH).
- Instant energy consumption
range : 0.0 ~ 8miles/kwh
Trip A/B
Tripmeter (1)
• The tripmeter is the total driving dis-
tance since the last tripmeter reset.
- Distance range: 0.0 ~ 999.9 mi. or
km
• To reset the tripmeter, press the
RESET ( ) button on the steering
wheel for more than 1 second
when the tripmeter is displayed.
OPSE044127N
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
463
Features of your vehicle
Average Vehicle Speed (2)
• The average vehicle speed is cal-
culated by the total driving dis-
tance and driving time since the
last average vehicle speed reset.
- Speed range: 160 MPH or 200
km/h
• To reset the average vehicle speed,
press the RESET ( ) button on
the steering wheel for more than 1
second when the average vehicle
speed is displayed.
✽✽
NOTICE
• The average vehicle speed is not dis-
played if the driving distance is less
than 0.03 miles (50 meters) or the
driving time is less than 10 seconds
since the POWER button is turned
to ON.
• Even if the vehicle is not in
motion, the average vehicle speed
keeps going while the vehicle is in
the ready ( ) mode.
Elapsed Time (3)
• The elapsed time is the total driv-
ing time since the last elapsed time
reset.
- Time range (hh:mm): 00:00 ~ 99:59
• To reset the elapsed time, press
the RESET ( ) button on the
steering wheel for more than 1
second when the elapsed time is
displayed.
✽✽
NOTICE
Even if the vehicle is not in motion,
the elapsed time keeps going while
the vehicle is in the ready ( )
mode.
One time driving information mode
This display shows trip distance (1),
battery level(2), charging time status
(3, if equipped) and climate time sta-
tus (4, if equipped).
This information is displayed for a
few seconds when you turn off the
vehicle and then goes off automati-
cally. The information provided is cal-
culated according to each trip.
If the estimated distance is below 9.3
mi.(15km), and a recharging mes-
sage will appear (5).
To set the charging time and/or cli-
mate time, refer to a separately sup-
plied navigation manual for detailed
information.
OPSE044243N
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
Features of your vehicle
644
Range
On average, a vehicle can drive
about 93miles (148km) when the
high voltage battery is 100%
charged.
Under certain circumstances where
the air conditioner/heater is ON, the
distance to empty is impacted,
resulting in a possible distance range
from 62~143mi. (100~230km). When
using the heater during cold weather
or driving at high speed, the high
voltage battery consumes a lot more
electricity. This may reduce the dis-
tance to empty significantly.
After “---” has been displayed, the vehi-
cle can drive an additional 3.1~9.3mi.
(5~15km) (depending on driving
speed, heater/air conditioner, weather,
driving style, and other factors).
Distance to empty that is displayed
on the instrument cluster after com-
pleting a recharge may vary signifi-
cantly depending on previous operat-
ing patterns.
When previous driving patterns
include high speed driving, resulting
in the driving battery using more
electricity than usual, the estimated
distance to empty is reduced. When
the high voltage battery uses a little
electricity in ECO mode, the estimat-
ed distance to empty increases.
Distance to empty may depend on
many factors such as the charge
amount of the high voltage battery,
weather, temperature, durability of
the battery, geographical features,
and driving style.
Natural degradation may occur with
the high voltage battery depending
on the number of years the vehicle is
used. This may reduce the distance
to empty.
OPSE044106N
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
465
Features of your vehicle
Warning lights
✽✽
NOTICE - Warning lights
Make sure that all warning lights
are OFF after starting the vehicle. If
any light is still ON, this indicates a
situation that needs attention.
Service warning light
This warning light illuminates :
• Once you set the POWER button
to the ON position.
- It illuminates for approximately 3
seconds
• There is a failure with a sensor,
actuator, or the electric compres-
sor for the air conditioner related to
the electric vehicle control system.
When the warning light turns ON
while driving, or does not turn OFF
after vehicle has started, have your
vehicle inspected by an authorized
Kia dealer.
Power down warning
light
This warning light illuminates :
• When the power is limited for the
safety of the electric vehicle.
- When the high voltage battery
level is below a certain threshold,
the voltage is decreasing, the
temperature of the motor or driv-
ing battery is too high or too low,
there is a failure in the cooling
system, or a failure that is dis-
rupting normal driving.
WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
Features of your vehicle
664
High voltage battery
level warning light
This warning light illuminates :
• When the high voltage battery level
is not enough.
When the warning light turns ON,
Charge the battery immediately.
Regenerative
brake warning
light
This warning light illuminates :
• The regenerative brake does not
operate and the brake does not
perform well. This causes the
brake warning lamp (red) and
regenerative brake warning lamp
(yellow) to turn ON simultaneously.
In this case, drive safely and have
your vehicle inspected by an
authorized Kia dealer.
In this case, operation of the brake
pedal may be more difficult than
normal and the braking distance
can increase.
Air bag Warning Light
This warning light illuminates:
• Once you set thePOWER button to
the ON position.
- It illuminates for approximately 6
seconds and then goes off.
• When there is a malfunction with
the SRS.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized Kia
dealer.
■ Red ■ Yellow
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
467
Features of your vehicle
Seat Belt Warning Light
This warning light informs the driver
that the seat belt is not fastened.
For more details, refer to the “Seat
Belts” in chapter 3.
Parking Brake & Brake
Fluid Warning Light
This warning light illuminates:
• Once you set the POWER button
to the ON position.
- It illuminates for approximately 3
seconds
- It remains on if the parking brake
is applied.
• When the parking brake is applied.
• When the brake fluid level in the
reservoir is low.
- If the warning light illuminates
with the parking brake released, it
indicates the brake fluid level in
reservoir is low.
If the brake fluid level in the reservoir
is low:
1.Drive carefully to the nearest safe
location and stop your vehicle.
2.Turn the vehicle off, check the brake
fluid level immediately and add fluid
as required (For more details, refer
to “Brake Fluid” in chapter 7).
Then check all brake components
for fluid leaks. If any leaks in the
brake system is still found, the
warning light remains on, or the
brakes do not operate properly, do
not drive the vehicle.
In this case, have your vehicle
towed to an authorized Kia dealer
and inspected.
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
Features of your vehicle
684
Dual-diagonal braking system
Your vehicle is equipped with dual-
diagonal braking systems. This
means you still have braking on two
wheels even if one of the dual sys-
tems should fail.
With only one of the dual systems
working, more than normal pedal
travel and greater pedal pressure are
required to stop the vehicle.
Also, the vehicle will not stop in as
short a distance with only a portion
of the brake system working.
If the brakes fail while you are driv-
ing, shift to B position for additional
engine braking and stop the vehicle
as soon as it is safe to do so.
Anti-lock Brake System
(ABS) Warning Light
This warning light illuminates:
• Once you set the POWER button
to the ON position.
- It illuminates for approximately 3
seconds and then goes off.
• When there is a malfunction with
the ABS (The normal braking sys-
tem will still be operational without
the assistance of the anti-lock
brake system).
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized Kia
dealer.
WARNING - Parking Brake
& Brake Fluid Warning Light
Driving the vehicle with a warn-
ing light ON is dangerous. If the
Parking Brake & Brake Fluid
Warning Light illuminates with
the parking brake released, it
indicates that the brake fluid
level is low.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized Kia
dealer.
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
469
Features of your vehicle
Electronic
Brake force
Distribution
(EBD) System
Warning Light
These two warning lights illuminate at
the same time while driving:
• When the ABS and regular brake
system may not work normally.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized Kia
dealer.
✽✽
NOTICE - Electronic Brake
force Distribution (EBD)
System Warning Light
When the ABS Warning Light is on
or both ABS and Parking Brake &
Brake Fluid Warning Lights are on,
the speedometer, odometer, or trip-
meter may not work. Also, the EPS
Warning Light may illuminate and
the steering effort may increase or
decrease.
In this case, have your vehicle inspect-
ed by an authorized Kia dealer as
soon as possible.
WARNING - Electronic
Brake force Distribution
(EBD) System Warning Light
When both ABS, Parking Brake,
and Brake Fluid Warning Lights
are on, the brake system will not
work normally and you may
experience an unexpected and
dangerous situation during sud-
den braking thereby increasing
the risk of a crash or injury.
In this case, avoid high speed
driving and abrupt braking.
Have your vehicle inspected by
an authorized Kia dealer as
soon as possible.
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
Features of your vehicle
704
Electronic Power
Steering (EPS) Warning
Light
This warning light illuminates:
• Once you set the POWER button
to the ON position.
- It remains on until the vehicle is in
the ready ( ) mode.
• When there is a malfunction with
the EPS.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized Kia
dealer.
Charging System
Warning Light
(for 12-volt battery)
This warning light illuminates:
• When the 12-volt battery level is
low or a failure occurs on the
charging system such as LDC.
• If the warning light turns on while
driving, move the vehicle to a safe
location, turn off and turn on the
vehicle again, and check if the
warning light turns off. If the warn-
ing light remains on, In this case,
have your vehicle inspected by an
authorized Kia dealer.
• Even if the warning lamp turns off,
have your vehicle inspected by an
authorized Kia dealer.
If you drive the vehicle while the
warning light is on, vehicle speed
may be limited and the 12-volt bat-
tery may be discharged.
❈ LDC : Low voltage DC-DC Converter.
Low Tire Pressure
Warning Light
This warning light illuminates:
• Once you set the POWER button
to the ON position.
- It illuminates for approximately 3
seconds and then goes off.
• When one or more of your tires are
significantly underinflated.
For more details, refer to “Tire
Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS)” in chapter 6.
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
471
Features of your vehicle
This warning light remains on after
blinking for approximately 60 seconds
or repeats blinking and off at the
intervals of approximately 3 seconds:
• When there is a malfunction with
the TPMS.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized Kia
dealer as soon as possible.
For more details, refer to “Tire
Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS)” in chapter 6.
• The TPMS cannot alert you to
severe and sudden tire damage
caused by external factors.
• If you notice any vehicle instability,
immediately take your foot off the
accelerator pedal, apply the brakes
gradually with light force, and slow-
ly move to a safe position off the
road.
Door Ajar Warning Light
This warning light illuminates:
When a door is not closed securely.
Tailgate Open Warning
Light
This warning light illuminates:
When the tailgate is not closed
securely.
WARNING
- Low tire pressure
• Significantly low tire pressure
makes the vehicle unstable
and can contribute to loss of
vehicle control and increased
braking distances.
• Continued driving or low pres-
sure tires will cause the tires to
overheat and fail.
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
Features of your vehicle
724
Indicator Lights
Ready indicator light
This warning light illuminates :
When the vehicle is ready to drive.
- ON: Normal driving is available.
- OFF: Normal driving is not avail-
able, or a failure has occurred.
- Blinking: Emergency driving.
When ready indicator light is OFF or
blinking, there is a failure. In this
case, have your vehicle inspected by
an authorized Kia dealer.
Charging indicator light
This warning light illuminates :
This indicator light shows the charg-
ing status of the high voltage battery.
When it is charging, the red light
turns ON. When charging is com-
plete, the green light turns ON.
Electronic Stability
Control (ESC) Indicator
Light
This indicator light illuminates:
• Once you set the POWER button
to the ON position.
- It illuminates for approximately 3
seconds and then goes off.
• When there is a malfunction with
the ESC system.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized Kia
dealer.
This indicator light blinks:
While the ESC is operating.
For more details, refer to “Electronic
Stability Control (ESC)” in chapter 5.
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
473
Features of your vehicle
Electronic Stability
Control (ESC) OFF
Indicator Light
This indicator light illuminates:
• Once you set POWER button to
the ON position.
- It illuminates for approximately 3
seconds and then goes off.
• When you deactivate the ESC sys-
tem by pressing the ESC OFF but-
ton.
For more details, refer to “Electronic
Stability Control (ESC)” in chapter 5.
ECOMINDER
®
indicator
Active ECO system
This indicator light illuminates:
• The active ECO system always
remembers the previous status
before the vehicle was turned off.
• When the Active ECO button is
pressed the ECOMINDER
®
indica-
tor (green) will illuminate to show
that the Active ECO is operating.
To turn off the Active ECO system,
press the button again.
For more details, refer to "Active
ECO systme" in the chapter 5 or
"Electric Vehicle Guide".
Immobilizer Indicator
Light
This indicator light illuminates for up
to 30 seconds:
• When the vehicle detects the
smart key in the vehicle properly
while the POWER button is ACC or
ON.
- At this time, you can start the
vehicle.
- The indicator light goes off after
the vehicle is in the ready ( )
mode.
This indicator light blinks for a few
seconds:
• When the smart key is not in the
vehicle.
- At this time, you can not start the
vehicle.
ECO
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
Features of your vehicle
744
This indicator light illuminates for 2
seconds and goes off:
• When the vehicle can not detect
the smart key which is in the vehi-
cle while the POWER button is ON.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized Kia
dealer.
This indicator light blinks:
• When the battery of the smart key
is weak.
- At this time, you can not start the
vehicle. However, you can start the
vehicle if you press the POWER
button with the smart key. (For
more details, refer to “Starting the
vehicle” in chapter 5).
• When there is a malfunction with
the immobilizer system.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized Kia
dealer.
Turn Signal Indicator
Light
This indicator light blinks:
• When you turn the turn signal light
on.
If any of the following occurs, there
may be a malfunction with the turn
signal system. In this case, have your
vehicle inspected by an authorized
Kia dealer.
- The indicator light does not blink
but illuminates.
- The indicator light blinks more
rapidly.
- The indicator light does not illumi-
nate at all.
High Beam Indicator
Light
This indicator light illuminates:
• When the headlights are on and in
the high beam position
• When the turn signal lever is pulled
into the Flash-to-Pass position.
Light ON Indicator Light
This indicator light illuminates:
• When the tail lights or headlights
are on.
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
475
Features of your vehicle
Front Fog Indicator
Light (if equipped)
This indicator light illuminates:
• When the front fog lights are on.
Cruise Indicator Light
This indicator light illuminates:
• When the cruise control system is
enabled.
For more details, refer to “Cruise
Control System” in chapter 5.
Cruise SET Indicator
Light
This indicator light illuminates:
• When the cruise control speed is set.
For more details, refer to “Cruise
Control System” in chapter 5.
CRUISE
SET
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
Features of your vehicle
764
The Parking Assist System is not a
substitute for proper and safe park-
ing and backing-up procedures.
Always drive safely and use caution
when parking. The Parking Assist
System may not detect every object
behind or in front of the vehicle.
The parking assist system assists
the driver during movement of the
vehicle by chiming if any object is
sensed within the distance of 39 in
(100 cm) in front or 47in(120cm)
behind the vehicle.
This system is a supplemental sys-
tem and it is not intended to nor does
it replace the need for extreme care
and attention of the driver.
The sensing range and objects
detectable by the sensors are limited.
When the vehicle moving, pay atten-
tion to your surroundings.
Operation of the parking
assist system
Operating condition
• This system activates when the
parking assist button is pressed
with the POWER button ON.
• The parking assist button turns on
automatically and activates the
parking assist system when you
shift the gear to the R (Reverse)
position.
PARKING ASSIST SYSTEM
OPSE044217_1
OPSE044218_1
Sensor
■ Front
■ Rear
Sensor
OPSE044041N
WARNING - Parking
Assist Warning
Never rely solely on the parking
assist system when parking the
vehicle. Always perform a visu-
al inspection to make sure the
vehicle is clear of all obstruc-
tions before moving the vehicle
in any direction. Stop immedi-
ately if you are aware of a child
anywhere near your vehicle.
Some objects may not be
detected by the sensors, due to
the object's size or material.
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
477
Features of your vehicle
• The sensing distance while back-
ing up is approximately 47 in. (120
cm) when you are driving less than
6.2 mph (10 km/h).
• The sensing distance while moving
forward is approximately 39 in.
(100 cm) when you are driving less
than 6.2 mph (10 km/h).
• When more than two objects are
sensed at the same time, the clos-
est one will be recognized first.
✽✽
NOTICE
The system may not detect and
object if the distance from the object
is already less than approximately
10 in. (25 cm) when the system is
turned ON.
Types of warning sound and indicator
Distance from object
Warning indicator
Warning sound
When driving
forward
When driving
rearward
39 in. ~ 24 in.
(100cm~60cm)
Front -
Buzzer beeps
intermittently
47 in. ~ 24 in.
(120cm~60cm)
Rear -
Buzzer beeps
intermittently
24 in. ~ 12 in.
(60cm~30cm)
Front
Buzzer beeps
intermittently
Rear -
Buzzer beeps
intermittently
12 in. (30cm)
Front
Buzzer sounds
continuously
Rear -
Buzzer sounds
continuously
✽✽
NOTICE
The indicator may differ from the illustration as objects or sensors status.
If the indicator blinks, the system should be checked by an authorized Kia
dealer.
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
Features of your vehicle
784
Non-operational conditions of
parking assist system
Parking assist system may not
operate normally when:
1. Moisture is frozen to the sensor. (It
will operate normally when moisture
melts.)
2. Sensor is covered with foreign
matter, such as snow or water, or
the sensor cover is blocked. (It will
operate normally when the materi-
al is removed or the sensor is no
longer blocked.)
3. Sensor is stained with foreign mat-
ter such as snow or water. (Sensing
range will return to normal when
removed.)
4. The parking assist button is off.
There is a possibility of parking
assist system malfunction when:
1. Driving on uneven road surfaces
such as unpaved roads, gravel,
bumps, or gradient.
2. Objects generating excessive noise
such as vehicle horns, loud motor-
cycle engines, or truck air brakes
can interfere with the sensor.
3. Heavy rain or water spray.
4. Wireless transmitters or mobile
phones present near the sensor.
5. Sensor is covered with snow.
Detecting range may decrease
when:
1. Outside air temperature is
extremely hot or cold.
2. Undetectable objects smaller than
39 in (1 m) and narrower than 5.5
in (14 cm) in diameter.
The following objects may not be
recognized by the sensor:
1. Sharp or slim objects such as
ropes, chains or small poles.
2. Objects, which tend to absorb sen-
sor frequency such as clothes,
spongy material or snow.
✽✽
NOTICE
1. The warning may not sound
sequentially depending on the
speed and shapes of the objects
detected.
2. The parking assist system may
malfunction if the vehicle bumper
height or sensor installation has
been modified. Any non-factory
installed equipment or accessories
may also interfere with the sensor
performance.
3. Sensor may not recognize objects
less than 12 in (30 cm) from the
sensor, or it may sense an incor-
rect distance. Use with caution.
(Continued)
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
479
Features of your vehicle
(Continued)
4. When the sensor is frozen or
stained with snow or water, the
sensor may be inoperative until
the stains are removed using a
soft cloth.
5. Do not push, scratch or strike the
sensor with any hard objects that
could damage the surface of the
sensor. Sensor damage could occur.
✽✽
NOTICE
This system can only sense objects
within the range and location of the
sensors, it can not detect objects in
other areas where sensors are not
installed. Also, small or slim objects,
or objects located between sensors
may not be detected.
Always visually check in front and
behind the vehicle when driving.
Be sure to inform any drivers in the
vehicle that may be unfamiliar with
the system regarding the system’s
capabilities and limitations.
Self-diagnosis
If you don’t hear an audible warning
sound or if the buzzer sounds inter-
mittently when shifting the shift lever
into the R (Reverse) position, this
may indicate a malfunction in the
parking assist system. If this occurs,
have the system checked by an
authorized Kia dealer.
Your new vehicle warranty does not
cover any accidents or damage to the
vehicle or injuries to its occupants
related to a parking assist system.
Always drive safely and cautiously.
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
Features of your vehicle
804
The rear camera display will activate
when the back-up light is ON with the
POWER button ON and the shift
lever in the R (Reverse) position.
This system is a supplemental sys-
tem that helps the driver by display-
ing objects behind the vehicle when
backing up.
Always keep the camera lens clean. If
lens is covered with foreign matter,
the camera may not operate normally.
The rear camera display is not a
safety device. It only serves to assist
the driver in identifying objects
directly behind the middle of the
vehicle.The camera does NOT cover
the complete area behind the vehi-
cle. While the camera's display is
generally accurate, objects can be
much closer than they appear in the
display screen and can be distorted
in both size and proportion.
REAR CAMERA DISPLAY
OPSE044050L
OPSE044051
WARNING - Backing up
using camera
Never rely solely on the rear
camera display when backing.
You must always use methods
of viewing the area behind you
including looking over both
shoulders as well as continu-
ously checking all three rear
view mirrors. Due to the difficul-
ty of ensuring that the area
behind you remains clear,
always back slowly and stop
immediately if you even suspect
that a person, and especially a
child, might be behind you.
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
481
Features of your vehicle
Headlamp escort (if equipped)
If you turn the POWER button to the
ACC or OFF position with the head-
lights ON, the headlights remain on
for about 5 minutes. However, if the
driver’s door is opened and closed,
the headlights are turned off after 15
seconds.
The headlights can be turned off by
pressing the lock button on the smart
key twice or turning the light switch to
the OFF or Auto position. However, if
you turn the light switch to the Auto
position when it is dark outside, the
headlights will not be turned off
immediately.
Battery saver function
• The purpose of this feature is to
prevent the battery from being dis-
charged. The system automatically
turns off the parking lights when
the driver turns the vehicle off and
opens the driver-side door (in that
order).
• With this feature, the parking lights
will turn off automatically if the driv-
er parks on the side of the road at
night.
If necessary, to keep the lights on
when the vehicle is turned off, per-
form the following:
1) Open the driver-side door.
2) Turn the parking lights OFF and
ON again using the light switch
on the steering column.
Daytime running light
(if equipped)
Daytime Running Lights (DRL) may
help make it easier for others to see
the front of your vehicle during the
day. DRL can be helpful in many dif-
ferent driving conditions, and it is
especially helpful after dawn and
before sunset.
The DRL system turns OFF when:
1. The front fog light or headlight (low
beam) switch is ON.
2. The POWER button is OFF.
3. The parking brake is applied.
LIGHTING
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
Features of your vehicle
824
Abnormal lamp operation
If there is a problem with the electric
communication system in the vehi-
cle, the position light and fog light will
not turn on even though, the parking
light and front frog light switch is
turned to the ON position. However,
when the headlight switch is turned
to the ON position, the position light
and fog light will turn on.
Abnormal lamp operation due
to stabilization of electric con-
trol system
Blinking may occur on a normally
operating lamp. This symptom
occurs due to stabilization of the
electric control system. There is no
problem with the vehicle if the lamp
turns back on after blinking.
However, if the lamp turns off after
blinking or the symptom above occurs
repeatedly, there may be a failure in
the electric control system. If this is
the case, contact an authorized Kia
dealer and have the system checked.
Lighting control
The light switch has a Headlight and
a Parking light position.
To operate the lights, turn the knob at
the end of the control lever to one of
the following positions:
(1) OFF position
(2) Parking light position
(3) Headlight position
(4) Auto light position (if equipped)
OXM049110
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
483
Features of your vehicle
Parking light position ( )
When the light switch is in the park-
ing light position (1st position), the
tail, license and instrument panel
lights will turn ON.
Headlight position ( )
When the light switch is in the head-
light position (2nd position), the
head, tail, license and instrument
panel lights will turn ON.
The POWER button must be in the
ON position to turn on the headlights.
Auto light position
When the light switch is in the AUTO
light position, the taillights and head-
lights will be turned ON or OFF auto-
matically depending on the amount
of light outside the vehicle.
OAM049041 OAM049042
OMD040095
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
Features of your vehicle
844
• Never place anything over sensor
(1) located on the instrument
panel. This will ensure better auto-
light system control.
• Don’t clean the sensor using a win-
dow cleaner. The cleaner may
leave a light film which could inter-
fere with sensor operation.
• If your vehicle has window tint or
other types of metallic coating on
the front windshield, the Auto light
system may not work properly.
High beam operation
To turn on the high beam headlights,
push the lever away from you. Pull it
back for low beams.
The high beam indicator will light
when the headlight high beams are
switched on.
To prevent the battery from being
discharged, do not leave the lights
on for a prolonged time while the
vehicle is not in the ready ( ) mode.
To flash the headlights, pull the lever
towards you. It will return to the normal
(low beam) position when released.
The headlight switch does not need to
be on to use this flashing feature.
OAM049044
OAM049043
WARNING - High beams
Do not use high beam when
there are other vehicles. Using
high beam could obstruct the
other driver's vision.
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
485
Features of your vehicle
Turn signals and lane change
signals
The POWER button must be on for
the turn signals to function. To turn
on the turn signals, move the lever
up or down (A).The green arrow indi-
cators on the instrument panel indi-
cate which turn signal is operating.
They will self-cancel after a turn is
completed. If the indicator continues
to flash after a turn, manually return
the lever to the OFF position.
To signal a lane change, move the
turn signal lever slightly and hold it in
position (B). The lever will return to
the OFF position when released.
If an indicator stays on and does not
flash or if it flashes abnormally, one of
the turn signal bulbs may be burned
out and will require replacement.
If an indicator flash is abnormally
quick or slow, a bulb may be burned
out or have a poor electrical connec-
tion in the circuit.
One-touch lane change function
(if equipped)
To activate an one-touch lane
change function, move the turn sig-
nal lever slightly and then release it.
The lane change signals will blink 3,
5 or 7 times.
You can choose one-touch lane
change blinking function in "One
touch turn lamp" of "User setting".
Refer to "User setting" in chapter 4.
✽✽
NOTICE
If an indicator flash is abnormally
quick or slow, the bulb may be
burned out or have a poor electrical
connection in the circuit.
OAM049045
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
Features of your vehicle
864
Front fog light (if equipped)
Fog lights are used to provide
improved visibility when visibility is
poor due to fog, rain or snow, etc. The
fog lights will turn on when the fog light
switch (1) is turned to the on position
after the headlight is turned on.
To turn off the fog lights, turn the fog
light switch (1) to the OFF position.
When in operation, the fog lights
consume large amounts of vehicle
electrical power. Only use the fog
lights when visibility is poor.
OAM049046N
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
487
Features of your vehicle
A : Wiper speed control
· MIST – Single wipe
· OFF – Off
· INT – Intermittent wipe
· LO – Low wiper speed
· HI – High wiper speed
B : Intermittent wipe time adjust-
ment
C : Wash with brief wipes (front)
D : Rear wiper/washer control
· ON – Continuous wipe
· INT – Intermittent wipe
(if equipped)
· OFF – Off
E : Wash with brief wipes (rear)
Windshield wipers
Operates as follows when the
POWER button is turned ON.
MIST : For a single wiping cycle, push
the lever upward and release
it with the lever in the OFF
position. The wipers will oper-
ate continuously if the lever is
pushed upward and held.
OFF : Wiper is not in operation
INT : Wiper operates intermittently at
the same wiping intervals. Use
this mode in light rain or mist.
To vary the speed setting, turn
the speed control knob (1).
WIPERS AND WASHERS
Windshield wiper/washer Rear window wiper/washer
OAM049100N/OAM049048N
OAM049101N
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
Features of your vehicle
884
LO : Normal wiper speed
HI : Fast wiper speed
✽✽
NOTICE
If there is heavy accumulation of
snow or ice on the windshield, defrost
the windshield for about 10 minutes,
or until the snow and/or ice is
removed before using the windshield
wipers to ensure proper operation.
Windshield washers
In the OFF position, pull the lever
gently toward you to spray washer
fluid on the windshield and to run the
wipers 1-3 cycles.
Use this function when the wind-
shield is dirty.
The spray and wiper operation will
continue until you release the lever.
If the washer does not work, check
the washer fluid level. If the fluid level
is not sufficient, you will need to add
appropriate non-abrasive windshield
washer fluid to the washer reservoir.
The reservoir filler neck is located in
the front of the motor compartment
on the passenger side.
OAM049102N
CAUTION - Washer pump
To prevent possible damage to
the washer pump, do not oper-
ate the washer when the fluid
reservoir is empty.
WARNING - Obscured
visibility
Do not use the washer in freez-
ing temperatures without first
warming the windshield with
the defrosters; the washer solu-
tion could freeze on the wind-
shield and obscure your vision.
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
489
Features of your vehicle
Rear window wiper and washer
switch
The rear window wiper switch is
located at the end of the wiper and
washer switch lever. Turn the switch
to the desired position to operate the
rear wiper and washer.
ON - Normal wiper operation
INT - Intermittent wiper operation
(if equipped)
OFF - Wiper is not in operation
Push the lever away from you to
spray rear washer fluid and to run the
rear wipers 1~3 cycles. The spray
and wiper operation will continue
until you release the lever.
OAM049103N
CAUTION - Wipers& wind-
shields
• To prevent possible damage
to the wipers or windshield,
do not operate the wipers
when the windshield is dry.
• To prevent damage to the wiper
blades, do not use gasoline,
kerosene, paint thinner, or
other solvents on or near them.
• To prevent damage to the
wiper arms and other compo-
nents, do not attempt to move
the wipers manually.
OXM049125
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
Features of your vehicle
904
Do not use the interior lights for
extended periods when the vehicle is
not in the ready ( ) mode.
It may cause battery discharge.
Interior lamp AUTO cut
• When all entrances are closed, if
you lock the vehicle by using the
smart key, all interior lamp will be
off after a few seconds.
• If you do not operate anything in
the vehicle after turning off the
POWER button, the lights will turn
off after 20 minutes.
Map lamp
Appuyer sur la lentille (1) ou bouton
(1) pour activer ou désactiver la
lampe de lecture.
• ROOM (2) :
- The map lamp and room lamp
stays on at all times.
- To turn off the ROOM mode,
press the ROOM button (2) once
again (not pressed.)
INTERIOR LIGHT
WARNING - Interior light
Do not use the interior lights
when driving in the dark. The
glare from the interior lights
may obstruct your view and
cause an accident.
OPS043052
OPS043053
■ Type B
■ Type A
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
491
Features of your vehicle
• DOOR (3) :
- The map lamp and room lamp
comes on when a door is opened.
The lamps go out after approxi-
mately 30 seconds.
- The map lamp and room lamp
comes on for approximately 30
seconds when doors are unlocked
with a smart key as long as the
doors are not opened.
- The map lamp and room lamp will
stay on for approximately 20 min-
utes if a door is opened with the
POWER button in the ACC or
LOCK/OFF position.
- The map lamp and room lamp will
stay on continuously if the door is
opened with the POWER button
in the ON position.
- The map lamp and room lamp will
go out immediately if the POWER
button is changed to the ON posi-
tion or all doors are locked.
- To turn off the DOOR mode,
press the DOOR button (3) once
again (not pressed).
✽✽
NOTICE
• When the lamp is turned on by
pressing the lens (1), the lamp does
not turn off even if the DOOR
mode or ROOM mode is not
selected (not pressed).
• If the ROOM button and DOOR
button are pressed at the same
time, the map lamp and room
lamp will stay on at all times
(ROOM mode will be selected).
Room lamp
Press the button to turn the light on
or off.
If the front map lamp turns on by the
front map lamp switch, the room
lamp will turn on.
OPS043054
OPS043072
■ Type B
■ Type A
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
Features of your vehicle
924
Luggage room lamp
The luggage room lamp comes on
when the tailgate is opened.
The lamp comes on as long as the
tailgate is open. To prevent unneces-
sary charging system drain, close
the tailgate securely after using the
luggage room.
Glove box lamp
The glove box lamp comes on when
the glove box is opened.
To prevent unnecessary charging
system drain, close the glove box
securely after using the glove box.
Vanity mirror lamp
Pull the sunvisor downward and you
can turn the vanity mirror lamp ON or
OFF by pushing the button.
• : To turn the lamp ON.
• O : To turn the lamp OFF.
To prevent unnecessary charging
system drain, turn off the lamp by
pushing the O button after using the
lamp.
OPS043057
OAM042336
OPS043055
OPS043056
■ Type B
■ Type A
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
493
Features of your vehicle
✽✽
NOTICE
If you want to defrost and defog the
front windshield, refer to
“Windshield defrosting and defog-
ging” in this section.
Rear window defroster
The defroster heats the window to
remove frost, fog and thin ice from
the rear window, while the vehicle is
in the ready ( ) mode.
To activate the rear window
defroster, press the rear window
defroster button located in the center
facia switch panel.
The indicator on the rear window
defroster button illuminates when the
defroster is ON.
If there is heavy accumulation of
snow on the rear window, brush it off
before operating the rear defroster.
The rear window defroster automati-
cally turns off after approximately 20
minutes or when the POWER button
is turned off. To turn off the defroster,
press the rear window defroster but-
ton again.
Outside rearview mirror defroster
If your vehicle is equipped with the
outside rearview mirror defrosters,
they will operate at the same time you
turn on the rear window defroster.
DEFROSTER
CAUTION - Conductors
To prevent damage to the con-
ductors bonded to the inside
surface of the rear window,
never use sharp instruments or
window cleaners containing
abrasives to clean the window.
OPSE045309N
OPS043152
■ Type B
■ Type A
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
Features of your vehicle
944
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM
OPSE045310N/OPSE044162N
1. Fan speed control button
2. Front windshield defroster button
3. Rear windshield defroster button
4. Temperature control knob/button
5. AUTO (automatic control) button
6. OFF button
7. HEAT button
8. Air conditioning button
9. Climate control information screen
selection button
10. Mode selection button
11. Driver Only button
12. Air intake control button
13. Climate control timer
14. Climate control display
■■
Type A
■■
Type B
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
495
Features of your vehicle
Automatic heating and air
conditioning
1. Push the AUTO button. It is indi-
cated by AUTO on the display. The
modes, fan speeds, air intake , air-
conditioning and heater will be
controlled automatically by tem-
perature setting.
2.Push the temperature control but-
ton to set the desired temperature.
(Type A)
Turn the temperature control knob
to set the desired temperature.
(Type B)
✽✽
NOTICE
• To turn the automatic operation
off, select any button or switch of
the following:
- Mode selection button
- Air conditioning (A/C) button
- Heater (HEAT) button
- DRIVER ONLY button
- Front windshield defroster button
(Press the button one more time
to deselect the front windshield
defroster function. The 'AUTO'
sign will illuminate on the infor-
mation display once again.)
- Air intake control button
- Fan speed control switch
The selected function will be con-
trolled manually while other func-
tions operate automatically.
• Regardless of the temperature set-
ting, when using automatic opera-
tion, the air conditioning system
can automatically turn on to
decrease the humidity inside the
vehicle, even if the temperature is
set to warm.
OPSE045311N
OPS043165
■ Type B
■ Type A
OPSE045312N
OPS043171
■ Type B
■ Type A
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
Features of your vehicle
964
Never place anything over the sensor
located on the instrument panel to
ensure better control of the heating
and cooling system.
Manual heating and air
conditioning
The heating and cooling system can
be controlled manually by pushing
buttons other than the AUTO button.
In this case, the system works
sequentially according to the order of
buttons selected.
When pressing any button (or turning
any knob) except AUTO button while
automatic operation, the functions
not selected will be controlled auto-
matically.
1. Start the vehicle.
2. Set the mode to the desired posi-
tion.
3. Set the temperature control to the
desired position.
4. Set the air intake control to the
outside (fresh) air position.
5. Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
6. If air conditioning is desired, turn
the air conditioning system on.
7. If heater is desired, press the
HEAT button.
Press the AUTO button in order to
convert to full automatic control of
the system.
OPS043071
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
Features of your vehicle
984
The air flow outlet port is converted
as follows:
Vent mode (B, D)
Air flow is directed toward the upper
body and face. Additionally, each out-
let can be controlled to direct the air
discharged from the outlet.
Vent-Floor mode (B, D, C, E)
Air flow is discharged towards the
face and floor.
Floor mode (C, E, A, D)
Most of the air flow is directed to the
floor, with a small amount of the air
being directed to the windshield and
side window defroster.
Floor/Defrost mode
(A, C, E, D)
Most of the air flow is directed to the
floor and the windshield with a small
amount directed to the side window
defrosters.
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
499
Features of your vehicle
Defrost mode (A, D)
Most of the air flow is directed to the
windshield with a small amount of air
directed to the side window defrosters.
Instrument panel vents
The outlet port can be opened or
closed separately using the thumb-
wheel.
Also, you can adjust the direction of
air delivered from these vents using
the vent control lever as shown.
Temperature control
• Type A
The temperature will increase to the
maximum (90°F(32°C)) by pushing
the button ( ).
OPS043059
OPSE045314N
OPS043169
■ Type B
■ Type A
OPSE045312N
OPS043171
■ Type B
■ Type A
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
Features of your vehicle
1004
The temperature will decrease to the
minimum (62°F(17°C)) by pushing
the button ( ).
When pushing the button, the tem-
perature will increase or decrease by
0.5°C/1°F. When set to the lowest
temperature setting, the air condi-
tioning will operate continuously.
• Type B
The temperature will increase to the
maximum (90°F(32°C)) by turning
the knob to the right extremely.
The temperature will decrease to the
minimum (62°F(17°C)) by turning the
knob to the left extremely.
When turning the knob, the tempera-
ture will increase or decrease by
0.5°C/1°F. When set to the lowest
temperature setting, the air condi-
tioning will operate continuously.
Temperature scale conversion
If the battery has been discharged or
disconnected, the temperature mode
display will reset to Centigrade.
This is normal condition. You can
switch the temperature scale as fol-
lows;
While pressing the AUTO button,
press the OFF button for 3 seconds
or more. The temperature scale will
change from Centigrade to
Fahrenheit, or from Fahrenheit to
Centigrade.
The temperature unit (from °C to °F
or from °F to °C) can be changed by
using the “User Settings” mode of the
LCD display.
❈ You change the temperature unit,
the temperature unit on the instru-
ment cluster is changed as well.
Air intake control
This is used to select outside (fresh)
air position or recirculated air position.
To change the air intake control posi-
tion, push the control button.
OPSE045315N
OPSE044173N
■ Type B
■ Type A
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
4101
Features of your vehicle
Recirculated air position
The indicator light on the
button illuminates when
the recirculated air posi-
tion is selected.
With the recirculated air
position selected, air from
passenger compartment
will be drawn through the
heating system and heat-
ed or cooled according to
the function selected.
❈ According to the outside tempera-
ture if the recirculation air position
is on for a long time, the air intake
position will automatically change
to the outside (fresh) air position to
ventilate the inside air.
Outside (fresh) air position
The indicator light on the
button does not illuminate
when the outside (fresh)
air position is selected.
With the outside (fresh)
air position selected, air
enters the vehicle from
outside and is heated or
cooled according to the
function selected.
WARNING - Recirculated
air
Continuous use of the climate
control system in the recirculat-
ed air position can cause
drowsiness or sleepiness, and
loss of vehicle control. Set the
air intake control to the outside
(fresh) air position as much as
possible while driving.
WARNING - Reduced visi-
bility
Continued climate control sys-
tem operation in the recirculat-
ed air position may allow
humidity to increase inside
vehicle which may fog the glass
and obscure visibility.
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
Features of your vehicle
1024
It should be noted that prolonged
operation of the heating in recirculat-
ed air position will cause fogging of
the windshield and side windows and
the air within the passenger com-
partment will become stale.
In addition, prolonged use of the air
conditioning with the recirculated air
position selected, will result in exces-
sively dry air in the passenger com-
partment.
Fan speed control
The fan speed can be set to the
desired speed by pressing the fan
speed control button.
To change the fan speed, press the
button ( ) for higher speed, or push
the button ( ) for lower speed. To
turn the fan speed control off, press
the OFF button and select outside
(fresh) air position.
WARNING - Sleeping with
AC On
Do not sleep in a vehicle with
the air conditioning or heating
system on as this may cause
serious harm or death due to a
drop in the oxygen level and/or
body temperature.
OPSE045316N
OPS043177
■ Type B
■ Type A
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
4103
Features of your vehicle
Air conditioning
Push the A/C button to turn the air
conditioning system on (indicator
light will illuminate).
Push the button again to turn the air
conditioning system off.
• Air conditioner/Heater uses energy
from the battery. If you use the
heater or air conditioner for too
long, distance to empty can be
reduced due to too much power
consumption. Turn off the heater
and air conditioner if you do not
need them.
HEAT Button
Push the HEAT button to turn the
heater on (indicator light will illuminate).
Push the button again to turn the
heater off.
OPSE045317N
OPSE044175
■ Type B
■ Type A
OPSE045318N
OPSE044253L
■ Type B
■ Type A
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
Features of your vehicle
1044
• Air conditioner/Heater uses energy
from the battery. If you use the
heater or air conditioner for too
long, distance to empty can be
reduced due to too much power
consumption. Turn off the heater
and air conditioner if you do not
need them.
Driver Only Button
If you press the driver seat air condi-
tioning button and the indicator lamp
inside the button tums on, cool air
blows only in the driver's seat. If you
use it when there is no passenger on
the front passenger seat, you can
increase the distance to empty.
If you select the driver seat air condi-
tioning in the front windshield defrost
mode ( , ) air comes out from
both left and right sides on the front
windshield.
OPSE045319N
OPSE044254L
■ Type B
■ Type A
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
4105
Features of your vehicle
Reserved Climate Control Button
(if equipped)
If you press the reserved climate
control button ( ), the indicator
lamp inside the button blinks three
times and the settings for reserved
climate control is displayed on AVN.
For details on how to set reserved
climate control, refer to the AVN
manual that is provided separately.
When reserved climate control is set
and the charging cable is connected,
the climate control begins operating
30 minutes before the set time
(departure time).
The indicator lamp lighting conditions
1.Blinking three times:
When you press the reserved cli-
mate control button and enter the
corresponding settings screen on
AVN
2.Remaining turned on:
When reserved climate control is set
3.Blinking continuously:
When the climate control is operat-
ing (operates only when the charg-
ing cable is connected)
Blower OFF
Push the OFF button to turn off the
blower. However you can still operate
the mode and air intake buttons as
long as the POWER button is in the
position ON.
OPSE044255L
OPSE045320N
OPS043179
■ Type B
■ Type A
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
Features of your vehicle
1064
Climate information screen
selection (if equipped)
Press the climate information screen
selection button to view climate infor-
mation in full screen mode.
System operation
Ventilation
1. Set the mode to the position.
2. Set the air intake control to the
outside (fresh) air position.
3. Set the temperature control to the
desired position.
4. Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
Heating
1. Set the mode to the position.
2. Set the air intake control to the
outside (fresh) air position.
3. Set the temperature control to the
desired position.
4. Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
5. If dehumidified heating is desired,
turn the air conditioning system on.
• If the windshield fogs up, set the
mode to the
or position.
Operation Tips
• To keep dust or unpleasant fumes
from entering the vehicle through
the ventilation system, temporarily
set the air intake control to the
recirculated air position. Be sure to
return the control to the fresh air
position when the irritation has
passed to keep fresh air in the
vehicle.This will help keep the driv-
er alert and comfortable.
• Air for the heating/cooling system
is drawn in through the grilles just
ahead of the windshield. Care
should be taken that these are not
blocked by leaves, snow, ice or
other obstructions.
• To prevent interior fog on the wind-
shield, set the air intake control to
the fresh air position and fan speed
to the desired position, turn on the
air conditioning system, and adjust
the temperature control to desired
temperature.
OPSE044179
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
4107
Features of your vehicle
Air conditioning
All Kia Air Conditioning Systems are
filled with R-134a refrigerant.
1. Start the vehicle. Press the air
conditioning button.
2. Set the mode to the position.
3. Set the air intake control to the
outside air or recirculated air posi-
tion.
4. Adjust the fan speed control and
temperature control to maintain
maximum comfort.
• When maximum cooling is desired,
set the temperature control to the
extreme left position, set the mode
control to the MAX A/C position,
then set the fan speed control to
the highest speed.
Air conditioning system operation tips
• If the vehicle has been parked in
direct sunlight during hot weather,
open the windows for a short time
to let the hot air inside the vehicle
escape.
• To help reduce moisture inside of
the windows on rainy or humid
days, decrease the humidity inside
the vehicle by operating the air
conditioning system.
• During air conditioning system
operation, you may occasionally
notice a slight change in vehicle
speed as the air conditioning com-
pressor cycles. This is a normal
system operation characteristic.
• Use the air conditioning system
every month only for a few minutes
to ensure maximum system per-
formance.
CAUTION - Excessive A/C
• When using the air condition-
ing system, monitor the
coolant closely while driving
up hills or in heavy traffic
when outside temperatures
are high. Air conditioning sys-
tem operation may cause
overheating. Continue to use
the blower fan but turn the air
conditioning system off if the
engine coolant temperature
gauge indicates overheating.
• When opening the windows in
humid weather air condition-
ing may create water droplets
inside the vehicle. Since
excessive water droplets may
cause damage to electrical
equipment, air conditioning
should only be used with the
windows closed.
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
Features of your vehicle
1084
• When using the air conditioning
system, you may notice clear water
dripping (or even puddling) on the
ground under the passenger side
of the vehicle.This is a normal sys-
tem operation characteristic.
• Operating the air conditioning sys-
tem in the recirculated air position
provides maximum cooling, how-
ever, continual operation in this
mode may cause the air inside the
vehicle to become stale.
• During cooling operation, you may
occasionally notice a misty air flow
because of rapid cooling and
humid air intake. This is a normal
system operation characteristic.
Climate control air filter
(if equipped)
The climate control air filter installed
behind the glove box filters the dust or
other pollutants that come into the
vehicle from the outside through the
heating and air conditioning system. If
dust or other pollutants accumulate in
the filter over a period of time, the air
flow from the air vents may decrease,
resulting in moisture accumulation on
the inside of the windshield even
when the outside (fresh) air position is
selected. If this happens, have the cli-
mate control air filter replaced by an
authorized Kia dealer.
✽✽
NOTICE
• Replace the filter every 15,000
miles or once a year.
If the vehicle is being driven in
severe conditions such as dusty or
rough roads, more frequent air
conditioner filter inspections and
changes are required.
• When the air flow rate suddenly
decreases, the system should be
checked at an authorized Kia
dealer.
1LDA5047
Outside air
Recirculated
air
Climate control
air filter
Blower
Evaporator
core
PTC heater,
interior condenser
(when equipped)
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
4109
Features of your vehicle
Checking the amount of air
conditioner refrigerant and
compressor lubricant
When the amount of refrigerant is
low, the performance of the air con-
ditioning is reduced. Overfilling also
has a negative impact on the air con-
ditioning system.
(Heater performance as well as air
conditioner performance can be
deteriorated on the vehicle that is
equipped with a heat pump.)
Therefore, if abnormal operation is
found, have the system inspected by
an authorized Kia dealer.
WARNING
The air conditioning system for
the Electric Vehicle (EV) should
be serviced by an authorized
Kia dealer. The Electric Vehicle
(EV) air conditioning system is
connected to the high voltage
system and requires special flu-
ids, tools and service proce-
dures. Improperly servicing the
Electric Vehicle (EV) air condi-
tioning system could result in
electrical shock, serious injury,
or even death.
WARNING
The oil and refrigerant in your
vehicle's air conditioning sys-
tem is under very high pres-
sure. If proper service proce-
dures are not followed an explo-
sion may result. To reduce the
risk of serious injury or death,
the air conditioning system in
your vehicle should only be
serviced by trained and certi-
fied technicians.
CAUTION - AC Repair
It is important that the correct
type and amount of oil and
refrigerant is used, otherwise
damage to the vehicle and injury
may occur. To prevent damage,
the air conditioning system in
your vehicle should only be
serviced by trained and certified
technicians.
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
Features of your vehicle
1104
Air Conditioning refrigerant
label
❈ The actual Air Conditioning refrigerant
label in the vehicle may differ from the
illustration.
Each symbols and specification on
air conditioning refrigerant label
means as below ;
1. Classification of refrigerant
2. Amount of refrigerant
3. Classification of Compressor lubri-
cant
Refer to chapter 8 for more detail
location of air conditioning refrigerant
label.
OPSE065020N
■ Example
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
4111
Features of your vehicle
• For maximum defrosting, set the
temperature control to the extreme
right/hot position and the fan speed
control to the highest speed.
• If warm air to the floor is desired
while defrosting or defogging, set the
mode to the floor-defrost position.
• Before driving, clear all snow and
ice from the windshield, rear win-
dow, outside rear view mirrors, and
all side windows.
• Clear all snow and ice from the
hood and air inlet in the cowl grille
to improve heater and defroster
efficiency and to reduce the proba-
bility of fogging up inside of the
windshield.
Automatic climate control
system
To defog inside windshield
1. Set the fan speed to the desired
position.
2. Select desired temperature.
WINDSHIELD DEFROSTING AND DEFOGGING
WARNING - Windshield
heating
Do not use the or posi-
tion during cooling operation in
extremely humid weather. The
difference between the temper-
ature of the outside air and that
of the windshield could cause
the outer surface of the wind-
shield to fog up, causing loss of
visibility. In this case, set the
mode selection knob or button
to the position and fan
speed control knob or button to
the lower speed.
OPSE045321N
OPSE044185
■ Type B
■ Type A
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
Features of your vehicle
1124
3. Press the defrost button ( ).
4. The air-conditioning and heater
will be turned on according to the
detected ambient temperature,
outside (fresh) air position and
higher fan speed will be selected
automatically.
If the air-conditioning and heater,
outside (fresh) air position and high-
er fan speed are not selected auto-
matically, adjust the corresponding
button or knob manually.
If the position is selected, with a
low fan speed, a higher fan speed
may be automatically selected.
To defrost outside windshield
1. Set fan speed to the highest posi-
tion.
2. Set temperature to the Maximum
(90°F(32°C)).
3. Press the defrost button ( ).
4. The air-conditioning and heater
will be turned on according to the
detected ambient temperature and
outside (fresh) air position will be
selected automatically.
If the position is selected, with a
low fan speed, a higher fan speed
may be automatically selected.
OPSE045322N
OPSE044186
■ Type B
■ Type A
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
4113
Features of your vehicle
Defogging logic
To reduce the possibility of fogging up
the inside of the windshield, the air
intake or air-conditioning and heater
are controlled automatically accord-
ing to certain conditions such as
or position. To cancel or return to
the defogging logic, do the following.
1. Turn the POWER button to the ON
position.
2. Press the defrost button ( ).
3. While pressing the air conditioning
button (A/C), press the air intake
control button ( ) at least 5
times within 3 seconds.
The indicator on the air intake button
blinks 3 times with 0.5 seconds of
interval. It indicates that the defog-
ging logic is canceled or returned to
the programmed status.
If the battery has been discharged or
disconnected, it will be reset to the
defog logic status.
OPSE045188N
OPSE044188
■ Type B
■ Type A
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
4115
Features of your vehicle
AUTO DEFOGGING SYSTEM
Auto defogging reduces the possibil-
ity of fogging up the inside of the
windshield by automatically sensing
the moisture of inside the windshield.
The auto defogging system operates
when the AUTO mode is on.
This indicator illuminates
when the auto defogging
system senses the mois-
ture of inside the wind-
shield and operates.
If more moisture is in the vehicle,
higher steps operate as follow.
Step 1 : Outside air position
Step 2 : Operating the air conditioning
Step 3 : Blowing air flow toward the
windshield
Step 4 : Increasing air flow toward
the windshield
If your vehicle is equipped with the
auto defogging system, it is automati-
cally activated when the conditions
are met. However, if you would like to
cancel the auto defogging system,
press the front defroster button more
than 3 seconds. To use the system,
repeat the above procedure again.
- When cancelled : The indicator in
the front defroster button will blink 3
times (interval of 1 seconds) to noti-
fy you that the system is cancelled.
- When activated : The indicator in
the front defroster button will blink 6
times (interval of 0.5 seconds) to
notify you that the system is set.
If the battery has been disconnected
or discharged, it resets to the auto
defogging status.
✽✽
NOTICE
If the A/C off is manually selected
while the auto defogging system is
on, the auto defogging indicator will
blink 3 times to give notice that the
A/C off can not be selected.
OPSE044066
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
Features of your vehicle
1164
These compartments can be used to
store small items.
• To avoid possible theft, do not
leave valuables in the storage
compartment.
• Always keep the storage compart-
ment covers closed while driving.
Do not attempt to place so many
items in the storage compartment
that the storage compartment
cover cannot close securely.
Center console storage
These compartments can be used to
store small items required by the
driver or front passenger.
To open the center console storage,
pull up the lever.
Glove box
To open the glove box, push the button
and the glove box will automatically
open. Close the glove box after use.
Always keep the glove box closed
while the vehicle is in operation.
STORAGE COMPARTMENT
OPS043062
WARNING - Flammable
materials
Do not store, propane cylinders
or other flammable/explosive
materials in the vehicle. These
items may catch fire and/or
explode if the vehicle is exposed
to hot temperatures for extended
periods.
OPSE044061
WARNING - Glove box
To reduce the risk of injury in an
accident or sudden stop, always
keep the glove box door closed
while driving.
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
4117
Features of your vehicle
Sunglass holder
To open the sunglass holder, press
the cover and the holder will slowly
open. Place your sunglasses with the
lenses facing out.
To close the sunglass holder, push it
up.
Do not place other items in the sun-
glass holder.
Luggage box
You can place a first aid kit, a reflector
triangle, tools, etc. in the box for easy
access.
OPS043198
WARNING - Sunglass
holder
• Do not keep objects except
sunglasses inside the sun-
glass holder. Such objects
can be thrown from the holder
in the event of a sudden stop
or an accident, possibly injur-
ing the passengers in the
vehicle.
• Do not open the sunglass
holder while the vehicle is
moving. The rear view mirror
of the vehicle can be blocked
by an opened sunglass holder.
OPSE044065
■ Type A
OPS043065
■ Type B
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
Features of your vehicle
1184
Cup holder
✽✽
NOTICE
When cleaning spilled liquids, do
not dry the cup holder at high tem-
perature. This may damage the cup
holder.
Cups or small beverage cans may be
placed in the cup holders.
Sunvisor
Use the sunvisor to shield direct light
through the front or side windows.
To use the sunvisor, pull it downward.
To use the sunvisor for the side window,
pull it downward, unsnap it from the
bracket (1) and swing it to the side (2).
Adjust the sunvisor extension for-
ward or backward (3).
To use the vanity mirror, pull down the
visor and slide the mirror cover (4).
To use the vanity mirror lamp, switch
it on. (if equipped)
The ticket holder (5, if equipped) is
provided for holding a tollgate ticket.
INTERIOR FEATURES
WARNING - Hot liquids
Do not place uncovered cups
with hot liquid in the cup holder
while the vehicle is in motion. If
the hot liquid spills, you burn
yourself. Such a burn to the
driver could lead to loss of con-
trol of the vehicle.
OPSE044067N
OVG049174
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
4119
Features of your vehicle
Seat warmer (if equipped)
The seat warmer is provided to warm
the front seats during cold weather.
With the POWER button in the ON
position, push either of the switches
to warm the driver's seat or the front
passenger's seat.
During mild weather or under condi-
tions where the operation of the seat
warmer is not needed, keep the
switches in the "OFF" position.
• Each time you press the switch,
the temperature setting of the seat
will change as follows :
• The seat warmer defaults to the
OFF position whenever the
POWER button is turned on.
• When pressing the switch for more
than 1.5 seconds with the seat
warmer operating, the seat warmer
will turn OFF.
CAUTION - Vanity
mirror lamp
If you use the vanity mirror
lamp, turn off the lamp before
return the sunvisor to its origi-
nal position. It could result in
battery discharge and possible
sunvisor damage.
OPS033012
■ Type A
OPS033013
■ Type B
OFF
HIGH ( )
LOW ( )
→→
→
• Type A
OFF
HIGH ( )
MIDDLE ( )*
LOW ( )
→→→
→
• Type B
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
Features of your vehicle
1204
✽✽
NOTICE
With the seat warmer switch in the
ON position, the heating system in the
seat turns off or on automatically
depending on the seat temperature.
✽✽
NOTICE
Be careful not to spill liquid such as
water or beverages on the seat. If you
spill some liquid, wipe the seat with a
dry towel. Before using the seat
warmer, dry the seat completely.
CAUTION - Seat damage
• When cleaning the seats, do
not use an organic solvent
such as paint thinner, ben-
zene, alcohol and gasoline.
Doing so may damage the sur-
face of the heater or seats.
• To prevent overheating the
seat warmer, do not place any-
thing on the seats that insu-
lates against heat, such as
blankets, cushions or seat
covers while the seat warmer
is in operation.
• Do not place heavy or sharp
objects on seats equipped
with seat warmers. Damage to
the seat warming components
could occur.
WARNING - Seat heater
burns
The seat warmer may cause
burns, even at low tempera-
tures, if used over a long period
of time. Never allow passengers
who may not be able to take
care of themselves to be
exposed to the risk of seat
heater burns.These include:
1. Infants, children, elderly or
disabled persons, or hospital
outpatients
2. Persons with sensitive skin
or those that burn easily
3. Fatigued individuals
4. Intoxicated individuals
5. Individuals taking medication
that can cause drowsiness or
sleepiness (sleeping pills,
cold tablets, etc.)
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
4121
Features of your vehicle
Seat air ventilation (if equipped)
The temperature setting of the seat
changes according to the switch
position.
• If you want to cool your seat cush-
ion, press the switch (blue color).
• Each time you press the button,
the airflow will change as follows:
• When pressing the switch for more
than 1.5 seconds with the seat air
ventilation operating, the seat air
ventilation will turn OFF.
• The seat air ventilation defaults to
the OFF position whenever the
POWER button is turned on.
Rear seat warmer (if equipped)
The seat warmer is provided to warm
the rear outboard seats during cold
weather. With the POWER button in
the ON position, push either of the
switches to warm rear seats.
During mild weather or under condi-
tions where the operation of the seat
warmer is not needed, keep the
switches in the "OFF" position.
OPS033014
OFF
HIGH ( )
MIDDLE ( )
LOW ( )
→→→
→
OPS033031
→
OFF → HIGH ( ) → LOW ( )
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
Features of your vehicle
1224
• When pressing the switch for more
than 1.5 seconds with the seat
warmer operating, the seat warmer
will turn OFF.
• The seat warmer defaults to the
OFF position whenever the
POWER button is turned on.
✽✽
NOTICE
With the seat warmer switch in the
ON position, the heating system in
the seat turns off or on automatically
depending on the seat temperature.
Power outlet (if equipped)
The power outlet is designed to pro-
vide power for mobile telephones or
other devices designed to operate
with vehicle electrical systems.
The devices should draw less than
10 amps with the vehicle is in the
ready ( ) mode.
• Use the power outlet only when the
vehicle is in the ready ( ) mode
and remove the accessory plug
after use. Using the accessory plug
for prolonged periods of time with
the vehicle is not in the ready ( )
mode could cause the battery to
discharge.
• Only use 12V electric accessories
which are less than 10A(Driver’s
side) or 15A(Passenger’s side) in
electric capacity.
• Adjust the air-conditioner or heater
to the lowest operating level when
using the power outlet.
• Close the cover when not in use.
• Some electronic devices can cause
electronic interference when
plugged into a vehicle’s power out-
let. These devices may cause
excessive audio static and malfunc-
tions in other electronic systems or
devices used in your vehicle.
OPSE044069
OPS043070
■ Front (Type A)
■ Rear (if equipped)
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
4123
Features of your vehicle
Clothes hanger (if equipped)
To use the hanger, pull down the
upper portion of hanger.
Be careful when opening and closing
the doors. Clothes, etc. may get
caught between the door gap.
Floor mat anchor(s)
When using a floor mat on the floor
carpet, make sure it attaches to the
floor mat anchor(s) in your vehicle.
This keeps the floor mat from sliding
forward.
ORP042186
WARNING - Electric
shock
Do not put a finger or a foreign
element (pin, etc.) into a power
outlet and do not touch with a
wet hand.You may get an electric
shock.
CAUTION
- Hanging
clothing
Do not hang heavy clothes, since
those may damage the hook.
OTFNCO2001
■ Driver's side ■ Passenger's side
WARNING
- After market
floor mat
Do not install aftermarket floor
mats that are not capable of
being securely attached to the
vehicle's floor mat anchors.
Unsecured floor mats can inter-
fere with pedal operation.
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
Features of your vehicle
1244
The following must be observed
when installing ANY floormat to the
vehicle.
• Ensure that the floormats are
securely attached to the vehicle's
floormat anchor(s) before driving
the vehicle.
• Do not use ANY floormat that can-
not be firmly attached to the vehi-
cle's floormat anchors.
• Do not stack floormats on top of
one another (e.g. all-weather rub-
ber mat on top of a carpeted floor-
mat). Only a single floormat should
be installed in each position.
IMPORTANT - Your vehicle was
manufactured with driver's side floor-
mat anchors that are designed to
securely hold the floormat in place.
To avoid any interference with pedal
operation, Kia recommends that only
the Kia floormat designed for use in
your vehicle be installed.
Luggage net holder
(if equipped)
To keep items from shifting in the
cargo area, you can use the holders
located in the cargo area to attach
the luggage net.
If necessary, contact your authorized
Kia dealer to obtain a luggage net.
To prevent damage to the goods or
the vehicle, care should be taken
when carrying fragile or bulky objects
in the luggage compartment.
OPS043193
WARNING - Luggage net
• Always keep your face and
body out of the luggage net
recoil path and avoid using the
luggage net when the straps
have visible signs of wear or
damage. The luggage net can
snap and cause injuries.
• All cargo should be evenly
distributed, properly secured
and never piled higher than
the seatback.
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
4125
Features of your vehicle
Cargo area cover (if equipped)
Use the cargo area cover to hide
items stored in the cargo area.
Removal and installation
To remove the cargo area cover:
1. Fold the cargo area cover up in
half.
2. Firmly hold the folded part of the
cover and lift it up.
OPS043199 OPS045355
OPS045357
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
Features of your vehicle
1264
3. While lifting the cover up, hold the
area near the front slots.Then, pull
up the cover at approximately 45°
angle.
To install the cargo area cover:
To use the cargo area cover, insert
the 4 edges into the slots.
OPS043200
WARNING - Objects
• Do not place objects on the
cargo area cover. Such objects
may be thrown about inside
the vehicle and possibly injure
vehicle occupants during an
accident or when braking.
• All cargo should be evenly
distributed, properly secured
and never piled higher than
the seatback.
CAUTION - Luggage
Since the cargo area cover may
be damaged or malformed, do
not apply excessive force to the
cover or do not put the heavy
loads on it.
WARNING
Folded cover may block the rear
view. Put the folded cover in the
appropriate position.
OPS045356
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
4127
Features of your vehicle
If you install aftermarket HID head
lamps, your vehicle’s audio and elec-
tronic devices may malfunction.
Antenna
Your vehicle uses a roof antenna to
receive AM or/and FM broadcast sig-
nals.
This antenna pole is removable. To
remove the roof antenna pole, turn it
counterclockwise. To install the roof
antenna pole, turn it clockwise.
• When reinstalling your roof anten-
na pole, it is important that it is fully
tightened to ensure proper recep-
tion.
• When cargo is loaded on the roof
rack, do not place the cargo near
the antenna pole to ensure proper
reception.
AUDIO SYSTEM
OHM048154N
CAUTION - Antenna
Before entering a place with a
low height clearance or a car
wash, remove the antenna pole
by rotating it counterclockwise.
If not, the antenna may be dam-
aged.
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
Features of your vehicle
1284
Audio remote control
(if equipped)
The steering wheel audio remote
control button may be installed.
Do not operate the audio remote
control buttons simultaneously.
VOLUME (VOL+/ VOL-) (1)
• Push the VOL + to increase volume.
• Push the VOL - to decrease volume.
SEEK/PRESET ( / ) (2)
If the SEEK/PRESET button is
pressed for 1 second or more, it will
work as follows in each mode.
RADIO mode
It will function as the AUTO SEEK
select button.
USB mode
It will function as the FF/REW button.
If the SEEK/PRESET button is
pressed for less than 1 second, it will
work as follows in each mode.
OPS043190
WARNING - Distracted
Driving
Driving while distracted can
result in a loss of vehicle control
that may lead to an accident,
severe personal injury, and
death. The driver's primary
responsibility is in the safe and
legal operation of a vehicle, and
use of any handheld devices,
other equipment, or vehicle sys-
tems which take the driver's
eyes, attention and focus away
from the safe operation of a vehi-
cle or which are not permissible
by law should never be used
during operation of the vehicle.
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
4129
Features of your vehicle
RADIO mode
It will function as the PRESET STA-
TION select buttons.
USB mode
It will function as the FILE UP/DOWN
button.
MODE (3)
Press the button to select Radio,
USB or AUX.
Detailed information for audio control
buttons is described in the following
pages in this section.
Aux, USB and iPod
®
* port
If your vehicle has an aux and/or
USB(universal serial bus) port or
iPod
®
port, you can use an aux port
to connect audio devices and an USB
port to plug in an USB and also an
iPod
®
port to plug in an iPod
®
.
When using a portable audio device
connected to the power outlet, noise
may occur during playback. If this
happens, use the power source of
the portable audio device.
*
iPod
®
is a registered trademark of Apple Inc.
OPSE044194
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
Speaker lights (if equipped)
The speaker lights that lights around
the front speaker is adjusted by turn-
ing the knob as follows.
1. OFF : The light turns off.
2. MUSIC :
The red light blinks according to the
sound of the audio.
If the audio is not turned on, the
light does not turn on.
3. MOOD :
The light color changes automati-
cally at regular interval.
4. +/- :
When the lights are on, push the
illumination button to adjust the
light intensity.
If low lighting grade is selected, the
intensity of light may be weak or
may not illuminate according to the
audio volume or selected condition.
The lighting around the front speaker
may not illuminate when the sound of
the audio is low.
Do not use the lights for extended
periods when engine is not running.
It may cause battery discharge.
✽✽
NOTICE
When the doors are opened, the
lighting system will not operate.
OPSE044195
OPSE044196
4130
Features of your vehicle
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
4131
Features of your vehicle
How vehicle audio works
AM and FM radio signals are broad-
cast from transmitter towers located
around your city. They are intercept-
ed by the radio antenna on your vehi-
cle. This signal is then processed by
the radio and sent to your vehicle
speakers.
However, in some cases the signal
coming to your vehicle may not be
strong and clear.
This can be due to factors, such as
the distance from the radio station,
closeness of other strong radio sta-
tions or the presence of buildings,
bridges or other large obstructions in
the area.
AM broadcasts can be received at
greater distances than FM broad-
casts. This is because AM radio
waves are transmitted at low fre-
quencies. These long distance,low
frequency radio waves can follow the
curvature of the earth rather than
travelling straight. In addition, they
curve around obstructions resulting
in better signal coverage.
¢¢¢
¢¢¢
JBM002
AM reception
¢¢¢
JBM001
FM reception
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
Features of your vehicle
1324
FM broadcasts are transmitted at
high frequencies and do not bend to
follow the earth's surface. Because
of this, FM broadcasts generally
begin to fade within short distances
from the station. Also, FM signals are
easily affected by buildings, moun-
tains, and obstructions. This can
lead to undesirable or unpleasant lis-
tening conditions which might lead
you to believe a problem exists with
your radio. The following conditions
are normal and do not indicate radio
trouble:
• Fading - As your vehicle moves
away from the radio station, the
signal will weaken and sound will
begin to fade. When this occurs,
we suggest that you select another
stronger station.
• Flutter/Static - Weak FM signals or
large obstructions between the
transmitter and your radio can dis-
turb the signal causing static or
fluttering noises to occur. Reducing
the treble level may lessen this
effect until the disturbance clears.
• Station Swapping - As an FM sig-
nal weakens, another more power-
ful signal near the same frequency
may begin to play. This is because
your radio is designed to lock onto
the clearest signal. If this occurs,
select another station with a
stronger signal.
• Multi-Path Cancellation - Radio
signals being received from sever-
al directions can cause distortion
or fluttering. This can be caused by
a direct and reflected signal from
the same station, or by signals
from two stations with close fre-
quencies. If this occurs, select
another station until the condition
has passed.
JBM003
FM radio station
JBM005
¢¢¢
JBM004
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
4133
Features of your vehicle
Using a cellular phone or a two-
way radio
When a cellular phone is used inside
the vehicle, noise may be produced
from the audio system. This does not
mean that something is wrong with
the audio equipment. In such a case,
try to operate mobile devices as far
from the audio equipment as possi-
ble.
When using a communication sys-
tem such as a cellular phone or a
radio set inside the vehicle, a sepa-
rate external antenna must be fitted.
When a cellular phone or a radio set
is used with an internal antenna
alone, it may interfere with the vehi-
cle's electrical system and adversely
affect safe operation of the vehicle.
WARNING - Cell phone
use
Do not use a cellular phone
while driving. Stop at a safe
location to use a cellular phone.
WARNING - Driver
Distraction
• Do not stare at the screen
while driving. Staring at the
screen for prolonged periods
of time could lead to traffic
accidents.
• Using the phone while driving
may lead to a lack of attention
of traffic conditions and
increase the likelihood of
accidents. Use the phone fea-
ture after parking the vehicle.
WARNING - Audio System
Do not disassemble, assemble,
or modify the audio system.
Such acts could result in fire or
electric shock.
WARNING - Antenna
Do not touch the antenna dur-
ing thunder or lightening as
such acts may lead to lightning
induced electric shock.
CAUTION
Refrain from use if the screen is
blank or no sound can be hear
as these signs may indicate
product malfunction.
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
Features of your vehicle
1344
• Adjust the volume to levels that
allow the driver to hear sounds from
outside of the vehicle. Driving in a
state where external sounds cannot
be heard may lead to accidents.
• Pay attention to the volume setting
when turning the device on. A sud-
den output of extreme volume
upon turning the device on could
lead to hearing impairment. (Adjust
the volume to a suitable levels
before turning off the device.)
• Turn on the car ignition before
using the audio system Do not
operate the audio system for long
periods of time with the ignition
turned off as such operations may
lead to battery discharge.
• In case of product malfunction,
please contact your place of pur-
chase or After Service center.
• Placing the audio system within an
electromagnetic environment may
result in noise interference.
CAUTION - LCD Monitor
Do not subject the device to
severe shock or impact. Direct
pressure onto the front side of
the monitor may cause damage
to the LCD or touch screen.
CAUTION
• When cleaning the device,
make sure to turn off the
audio system and use a dry
and smooth cloth.
• Never use tough materials,
chemical cloths, or solvents
(alcohol, benzene, thinners,
etc.) as such materials may
damage the device panel or
cause color/quality deteriora-
tion.
• Prevent caustic solutions such
as perfume and cosmetic oil
from contacting the dashboard
because they may cause dam-
age or discoloration.
WARNING - Distracted
Driring
Driving while distracted can
result in a loss of vehicle control
that may lead to an accident,
severe personal injury, and
death. The driver’s primary
responsibility is in the safe and
legal operation of a vehicle, and
use of any handheld devices,
other equipment, or vehicle sys-
tems which take the driver’s
eyes, attention and focus away
from the safe operation of a vehi-
cle or which are not permissible
by law should never be used dur-
ing operation of the vehicle.
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
4135
Features of your vehicle
USING THE USB DEVICE
• To use an external USB device,
make sure the device is not con-
nected when starting up the
vehicle. Connect the device after
starting up.
• If you start the engine when the
USB device is connected, it may
damage the USB device. (USB
flashdrives are very sensitive to
electric shock.)
• If the engine is started up or
turned off while the external USB
device is connected, the external
USB device may not work.
• The System may not play unau-
thenticated MP3 or WMA files.
1) It can only play MP3 files with
the compression rate
between 8Kbps ~ 320Kbps.
2) It can only play WMA music
files with the compression
rate between 8Kbps ~
320Kbps.
• Take precautions for static elec-
tricity when connecting or discon-
necting the external USB device.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• An encrypted MP3 PLAYER is
not recognizable.
• Depending on the condition of
the external USB device, the
connected external USB device
can be unrecognizable.
• When the formatted byte/sector
setting of External USB device is
not either 512BYTE or
2048BYTE, then the device will
not be recognized.
• Use only a USB device format-
ted to FAT 12/16/32.
• USB devices without USB I/F
authentication may not be recog-
nizable.
• Make sure the USB connection
terminal does not come in con-
tact with the human body or
other objects.
• If you repeatedly connect or dis-
connect the USB device in a
short period of time, it may break
the device.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• You may hear a strange noise
when connecting or disconnect-
ing a USB device.
• If you disconnect the external
USB device during playback in
USB mode, the external USB
device can be damaged or may
malfunction. Therefore, discon-
nect the external USB device
when the audio is turned off or in
another mode. (e.g, Radio)
• Depending on the type and
capacity of the external USB
device or the type of the files
stored in the device, there is a
difference in the time for recogni-
tion the device.
• Do not use the USB device for
purposes other than playing
music files.
• Playing videos through the USB
is not supported.
• Use of USB accessories such as
rechargers or heaters using USB
I/F may lower performance or
cause trouble.
(Continued)
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
Features of your vehicle
1364
(Continued)
• Some USB flash memory read-
ers (such as CF, SD, micro SD,
etc.) or external-HDD type
devices can be unrecognizable.
• Music files protected by DRM
(DIGITAL RIGHTS MANAGE-
MENT) are not recognizable.
• The data in the USB memory
may be lost while using this
audio. Always back up important
data on a personal storage
device.
• Please avoid using
USB memory prod-
ucts which can be
used as key chains or
cellular phone acces-
sories as they could cause dam-
age to the USB jack. Please
make certain only to use plug
type connector products.
(Continued)
• If you use devices such as a
USB hub purchased separately,
the vehicle’s audio system may
not recognize the USB device. In
that case, connect the USB
device directly to the multimedia
terminal of the vehicle.
• If the USB device is divided by
logical drives, only the music
files on the highest-priority drive
are recognized by car audio.
• Devices such as MP3 Player/
Cellular phone/Digital camera
can be unrecognizable by stan-
dard USB I/F can be unrecogniz-
able.
• Charging through the USB may
not be supported in some mobile
devices.
• USB HDD or USB types liable to
connection failures due to vehi-
cle vibrations are not supported.
(i-stick type)
• Some non-standard USB
devices (METAL COVER TYPE
USB) can be unrecognizable.
(Continued)
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
4137
Features of your vehicle
USING iPod
®
DEVICE
iPhone
®
is a registered grademark of
Apple inc.
• Some iPod
®
models may not sup-
port communication protocol and
files may not properly play.
Supported iPod
®
models:
- iPhone
®
3GS/4
- iPod
®
touch 1st~4th generation
- iPod
®
nano 1st~6th generation
- iPod
®
classic
• The order of search or playback of
songs in the iPod
®
can be different
from the order searched in the
audio system.
• If the iPod
®
is disabled due to its
own malfunction, reset the iPod
®
.
(Reset: Refer to iPod
®
manual)
• An iPod
®
may not operate normally
on low battery.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Some iPod
®
devices, such as the
iPhone
®
, can be connected
through the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology interface. The device
must have audio
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology capability
(such as for stereo headphone
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology ).
The device can play, but it will not
be controlled by the audio system.
• To use iPod
®
features within the
audio, use the cable provided upon
purchasing an iPod
®
device.
• Skipping or improper operation
may occur depending on the char-
acteristics of your iPod
®
/iPhone
®
device.
• If your iPhone
®
is connected to
both the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology and USB, only support
iPod
®
mode because the sound
may not be properly played in
Bluetooth
®
Audio Streaming. To
use
Bluetooth
®
Audio Streaming,
disconnect iPod
®
cable with
iPhone
®
.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• When connecting iPod
®
with the
iPod
®
Power Cable, insert the con-
nector to the multimedia socket
completely. If not inserted com-
pletely, communications between
iPod
®
and audio may be interrupt-
ed.
• When adjusting the sound effects
of the iPod
®
and the audio system,
the sound effects of both devices
will overlap and might reduce or
distort the quality of the sound.
• Deactivate (turn off) the equalizer
function of an iPod
®
when adjust-
ing the audio system’s volume, and
turn off the equalizer of the audio
system when using the equalizer of
an iPod
®
.
• When not using iPod
®
with car
audio, detach the iPod
®
cable from
iPod
®
. Otherwise, iPod
®
may
remain in accessory mode, and
may not work properly.
• Beside support 1M cable when
purchasing iPod
®
/iPhone
®
prod-
ucts, Long Cable cannot be recog-
nized.
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
Features of your vehicle
1384
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology (if equipped)
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
The
Bluetooth
®
word mark and logos
are registered trademarks owned by
Bluetooth SIG, lnc. and any use of
such marks by Kia is under license.
A
Bluetooth
®
enabled call phone is
required to use
Bluetooth
®
wireless
technology.
Before Using the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
Handsfree
What is Bluetooth
®
?
•
Bluetooth
®
refers to a short-distance
wireless networking technology
which uses a 2.4GHz ~ 2.48GHz
frequency to connect various
devices within a certain distance.
• Supported within PCs, external
devices,
Bluetooth
®
phones, PDAs,
various electronic devices, and
automotive environments,
Bluetooth
®
allows data to be trans-
mitted at high speeds without hav-
ing to use a connector cable.
•
Bluetooth
®
Handsfree refers to a
device which allows the user to
conveniently make phone calls with
Bluetooth
®
mobile phones through
the audio system.
•
Bluetooth
®
Handsfree may not be
supported in some mobile phones.
To learn more about mobile device
compatibility, visit http://www.kia.
com/us/en/content/owners/blue-
tooth
WARNING
Driving while distracted can
result in a loss of vehicle control
that may lead to an accident,
severe personal injury, and
death. The driver’s primary
responsibility is in the safe and
legal operation of a vehicle, and
use of any handheld devices,
other equipment, or vehicle sys-
tems which take the driver’s
eyes, attention and focus away
from the safe operation of a vehi-
cle or which are not permissible
by law should never be used dur-
ing operation of the vehicle.
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
4139
Features of your vehicle
Precautions for Safe Driving
•
Bluetooth
®
Handsfree is a feature
that enables drivers to practice
safe driving. Connecting the head
unit with a
Bluetooth
®
phone allows
the user to conveniently make and
receive calls and use contacts.
Before using
Bluetooth
®
, carefully
read the contents of this user’s
manual.
• Excessive use or operations while
driving may lead to negligent driv-
ing practices and result in acci-
dents. Refrain from excessive
operations while driving.
• Viewing the screen for prolonged
periods of time is dangerous and
may lead to accidents. When driv-
ing, view the screen only for short
periods of time.
When connecting a
Bluetooth
®
Phone
• Before connecting the head unit
with the mobile phone, check to
see that the mobile phone sup-
ports
Bluetooth
®
features.
• Even if the phone supports
Bluetooth
®
, the phone will not be
found during device searches if the
phone has been set to hidden state
or the
Bluetooth
®
power is turned
off. Disable the hidden state or turn
on the
Bluetooth
®
power prior to
searching/connecting with the
Head unit.
• If you do not want automatic con-
nection with your
Bluetooth
®
device, turn off the
Bluetooth
®
fea-
ture within your mobile phone.
• The Handsfree call volume and
quality may differ depending on the
mobile phone.
• Park the vehicle when connecting
the head unit with the mobile
phone.
•
Bluetooth
®
connection may
become intermittently disconnect-
ed in some mobile phones. Follow
these steps to try again.
1.Within the mobile phone, turn
the
Bluetooth
®
function off/on
and try again.
2.Turn the mobile phone power
Off/On and try again.
3.Reboot the audio system and try
again.
4.Delete all paired devices, pair
and try again.
• Handsfree call quality and volume
may differ depending on the model
of your mobile phone.
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
Features of your vehicle
1404
Voice Recognition
• When using the voice recognition
feature, only commands listed
within the user's manual are sup-
ported.
• Be aware that during the operation
of the voice recognition system,
pressing any key other than the
key terminate voice recogni-
tion mode.
• For superior voice recognition per-
formance, position the microphone
used for voice recognition above
the head of the driver’s seat and
maintain a proper position when
saying commands.
• Within the following situations,
voice recognition may not function
properly due to external sound.
- When the windows and sunroof
are open
- When the blower AC/heater is
set to high
- When entering and passing
through tunnels
(Continued)
(Continued)
- When driving on rugged and
uneven roads
- During severe rain (heavy rains,
windstorms)
• Phone related voice commands
can be used only when a
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
device is connected.
• When making calls by stating a
name, the corresponding contact
must be downloaded and stored
within the audio system.
• After downloading the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology phone book,
it takes some times to convert the
phone book data into voice infor-
mation. During this time, voice
recognition may not properly oper-
ate.
• Pronounce the voice commands
naturally and clearly as if in a nor-
mal conversation.
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
Features of your vehicle
1424
SYSTEM CONTROLLERS
AND FUNCTIONS
❈ Display and settings may differ
depending on the selected audio.
Audio Head Unit
(1)
Changes to FM/AM/SiriusXM
TM
mode.
Each time the key is pressed, the
mode is changed in order of FM1
➟
FM2 ➟ AM ➟ SAT1 ➟ SAT2 ➟ SAT3.
❈ In Setup>Display, the radio pop up
screen will be displayed when
[Mode Pop up] is turned .
When the pop up screen is dis-
played, use the TUNE knob or
keys ~ to select the
desired mode.
(2)
Changes to USB(iPod
®
), AUX, My
Music, BT Audio mode.
Each time the key is pressed, the
mode is changed in order of
USB(iPod
®
), AUX, My Music, BT
Audio.
❈ In Setup>Display, the media pop
up screen will be displayed when
[Mode Pop up] is turned .
When the pop up screen is dis-
played, use the TUNE knob or
keys ~ to select the
desired mode.
(3)
Operates Phone Screen
❈ When a phone is not connected,
the connection screen is dis-
played.
(4)
Briefly press the key (under 0.8 sec-
onds) : Moves to the Display, Sound,
Clock, Phone, System setting modes
Press and hold the key (over 0.8 sec-
onds) : Move to the Time setting screen
(5)
Radio Mode : Automatically search-
es for broadcast frequencies.
USB, iPod
®
, My Music modes
- Briefly press the key (under 0.8
seconds): Moves to next or previ-
ous song (file)
- Press and hold the key (over 0.8
seconds): Rewinds or fast-forwards
the current song.
BT Audio mode : Moves to next or
previous song(file)
❈ The Play/Pause feature may oper-
ate differently depending on the
mobile phone.
SEEK
TRACK
SETUP
CLOCK
PHONE
51
On
MEDIA
61
On
RADIO
PS34001N
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
4143
Features of your vehicle
(6) PWR/VOL knob
Power : Turns power On/Off by
pressing the knob
Volume : Sets volume by turning
the knob left/right
(7) ~ (Preset)
Radio mode: Saves frequencies
(channels) or receives saved fre-
quencies (channels)
USB, iPod
®
, My Music mode
- : Repeat
- : Random
In the Radio, Media, Setup, and
Menu pop up screen, the number
menu is selected.
(8)
Each time the button is pressed, it
sets the screen Off
➟ Screen On ➟
Screen Off
❈ Audio operation is maintained and
only the screen will be turned Off.
In the screen Off state, press any
key to turn the screen On again.
(9)
Radio mode
- Shortly press the key : Previews
each broadcast for 5 seconds
each.
- Press and hold the key (over 0.8
seconds): Previews the broadcasts
saved in Preset ~ for 5
seconds each.
❈ Press the key again to
continue listening to the current
frequency.
❈ SAT Radio does not support the
Preset scan feature.
USB, My Music mode
- Briefly press the key (under 0.8
seconds): Previews each song
(file) for 10 seconds each.
❈ Press the key again to
continue listening to the current
song (file).
(10)
Displays menus for the current mode.
❈ iPod
®
List : Move to parent category
MENU
SCAN
SCAN
61
SCAN
DISP
2
RDM
1
RPT
61
PS34001N
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
Features of your vehicle
1444
(11)
Go to previous depth(no previous
screen)
(12)
Radio mode
- SiriusXM
®
RADIO : Category
Search
- USB mode : Folder Search
(13) TUNE knob
AM/FM mode :
- Changes frequency by turning the
knob left/right.
SiriusXM
®
Radio Mode:
- Changes the station by turning the
knob left/right. Press knob to
select station.
USB, iPod
®
, My Music mode:
- Searches songs (files) by turning
the knob left/right.
❈ When the desired song is displayed,
press the knob to play the song.
Moves focus in all selection menus
and selects menus.
CAT
FOLDER
BACK
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
4145
Features of your vehicle
SETUP
Display Settings
Press the key Select
[Display] through TUNE knob or
key Select menu through
TUNE knob
Mode Pop up
[Mode Pop up] Changes /
selection mode
• During On state, press the
or key to display the mode
change pop up screen.
Media Display
When playing an MP3 file, select the
desired display info from ‘Folder/File’
or ‘Album/Artist/Song’.
MEDIA
RADIO
OffOn
1
SETUP
CLOCK
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
Features of your vehicle
1464
SOUND SETTINGS
Press the key Select
[Sound] through TUNE knob or
key Select menu through
TUNE knob
Sound Settings
This menu allows you to set the
‘Bass, Middle, Treble’ and the Sound
Fader and Balance.
Select [Sound Settings] Select
menu through TUNE knob Turn
TUNE knob left/right to set
• Bass, Middle, Treble : Selects the
sound tone.
• Fader, Balance : Moves the sound
fader and balance.
• Default : Restores default settings.
❈ Back : While adjusting values,
pressing the TUNE knob will
restore the parent menu.
Speed Dependent Volume Control
This feature will gradually increase
the volume as speed increases to
offset outside noise.
Select [Speed Dependent Vol.] Set
[On/Off] of TUNE knob
Voice Recognition Volume
Adjusts voice recognition volume.
Select [Voice Recognition Vol.] Set
volume of
TUNE
knob
2
SETUP
CLOCK
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
4147
Features of your vehicle
CLOCK SETTINGS
Press the key Select
[Clock] through TUNE knob or
key Select menu through
TUNE knob
Sound Settings
This menu is used to set the time.
Select [Clock Settings] Set through
TUNE knob Press TUNE knob
❈ Adjust the number currently in
focus to set the [hour] and press
the tune knob to set the [minute]
and [AM/PM].
Calendar Settings
This menu is used to set the date
(MM/DD/YYYY).
Select [Calendar Settings] Set through
TUNE knob Press TUNE knob
❈ Adjust the number currently in
focus to make the settings and
press the tune knob to move to the
next setting. (Set in order of
Year/Month/Day)
Time Format
This function is used to set the
12/24 hour time format of the
audio system. Select [Time
Format] Set 12Hr / 24Hr through
TUNE
knob
Clock Display when Power is OFF
Select [Clock Disp.(Pwr Off) Set
/
through
TUNE
knob
: Displays time/date on screen
: Turn off.
Off
On
OffOn
3
SETUP
CLOCK
WARNING
- Clock Setting
Distraction
Do not adjust the clock while
driving. You may lose your
steering control and cause
severe personal injury or acci-
dents.
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
Features of your vehicle
1484
SYSTEM SETTINGS
Press the key Select
[System] Select menu through
TUNE knob
Memory Information
Displays currently used memory and
total system memory.
Select [Memory Information] OK
The currently used memory is dis-
played on the left side while the total
system memory is displayed on the
right side.
Prompt Feedback
This feature is used to change voice
command feedback between Normal
and Expert modes.
Select [Prompt Feedback] Set
through
TUNE
knob
• On : This mode is for beginner
users and provides detailed
instructions during voice command
operation.
• Off : This mode is for expert users
and omits some information during
voice command operation. (When
using Expert mode, guidance
instructions can be heard through
the [Help] or [Menu] commands.
Language
This menu is used to set the display
and voice recognition language.
Select [Language] Set through
TUNE knob
❈ The system will reboot after the
language is changed.
❈ Language support by region
- English, Francais, Espanol
SETUP
CLOCK
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
4149
Features of your vehicle
RADIO : FM, AM OR SIRIUS
®
SEEK
Press the key
• Briefly pressing the key (under 0.8
seconds): Automatically searches
for the next station.
• Pressing and holding the key (over
0.8 seconds): While holding the key,
frequency changes without stop-
ping. When the key is released,
automatically searches for the next
frequency from that point.
Preset SEEK
Press the ~ key
• Briefly pressing the key (under 0.8
seconds): Plays the frequency
saved in the corresponding key.
• Pressing and holding the key (over
0.8 seconds): Pressing and holding
the desired key from ~
will save the currently playing
broadcast to the selected key and
sound a BEEP.
SCAN
Press the key
• Briefly pressing the key (under 0.8
seconds): The broadcast frequency
increases and previews each
broadcast for 5 seconds each. After
scanning all frequencies, returns
and plays the current broadcast fre-
quency.
• Pressing and holding the key (over
0.8 seconds): Previews the broad-
casts saved in Preset ~
for 5 seconds each.
Selecting through manual
search
Turn the TUNE knob left/right to
adjust the frequency.
• FM : Changes by 200KHz
• AM : Changes by 10KHz
61
SCAN
61
61
SEEK
TRACK
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
Features of your vehicle
1504
MENU
Within key are the A.Store
(Auto Store) and Info functions.
A.Store
Press the key Set [A.Store]
through TUNE knob or key.
Saves broadcasts with superior
reception to ~ keys. If no
frequencies are received, then the
most recently received frequency will
be broadcast.
61
1
MENU
MENU
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
4151
Features of your vehicle
SiriusXM
®
Satellite Radio
information
Satellite Radio channels:
Enjoy SiriusXM Satellite Radio with a
3-month trial subscription to the
Sirius Select package.You’ll get over
140 channels, including commercial-
free music, plus all your favorite
sports, exclusive talk, entertainment,
and a selection of premium program-
ming. For more information and a
complete list of SiriusXM channels,
visit siriusxm.com in the United
States, siriusxm.ca in Canada, or call
SiriusXM at 1-888-539-7474.
Satellite Radio reception
factors:
To receive the satellite signal, your
vehicle has been equipped with a
satellite radio antenna located on the
roof of your vehicle. The vehicle roof
provides the best location for an
unobstructed, open view of the sky, a
requirement of a satellite radio sys-
tem. Like AM/FM, there are several
factors that can affect satellite radio
reception performance:
• Antenna obstructions: For optimal
reception performance, keep the
antenna clear of snow and ice
build-up and keep luggage and
other material as far away from the
antenna as possible.
• Terrain: Hills, mountains, tall build-
ings, bridges, tunnels, freeway
overpasses, parking garages,
dense tree foliage and thunder-
storms can interfere with your
reception.
SiriusXM Satellite Radio service:
SiriusXM is a subscription-based
satellite radio service that broad-
casts music, sports, news and enter-
tainment programming to radio
receivers, which are available for
installation in motor vehicles or facto-
ry installed, as well as for the home,
portable and wireless devices, and
through an Internet connection on
personal computer.
Vehicles that are equipped with a
factory installed SiriusXM Satellite
Radio system include:
• Hardware and an introductory trial
subscription term, which begins on
the date of sale or lease of the
vehicle.
• For a small upgrade fee, access to
SiriusXM music channels, and
other select channels over the
Internet using any computer con-
nected to the Internet (U.S. cus-
tomers only).
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
Features of your vehicle
1524
For information on extended sub-
scription terms, contact SiriusXM at
1-888-539-7474.
NOTE:
SiriusXM services require a sub-
scription sold separately, or as a
package, by Sirius XM Radio Inc. If
you decide to continue service
after your trial, the subscription
plan you choose will automatical-
ly renew thereafter and you will be
charged according to your chosen
payment method at then-current
rates. Fees and taxes apply. To
cancel you must call SiriusXM at
1-866-635-2349. See SiriusXM
Customer Agreement for com-
plete terms at www.siriusxm.com.
SiriusXM U.S. satellite and data
services are available only in the
48 contiguous USA, DC and PR
(with coverage limitations).
SiriusXM satellite service is also
available in Canada; see www.sir-
iusxm. ca. All fees and program-
ming subject to change. Sirius,
XM and all related marks and
logos are trademarks of Sirius XM
Radio Inc. Sirius, XM and all relat-
ed marks and logos are trade-
marks of Sirius XM Radio Inc.
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
4153
Features of your vehicle
SiriusXM RADIO
Using
SiriusXM Satellite Radio
Your Kia vehicle is equipped with a 3-
month trial subscription to SiriusXM
so you have access to over 140
channels of music, information, and
entertainment programming.
Activation
In order to extend or reactivate your
Sirius Select subscription, you will
need to contact SiriusXM Customer
Care at 1-800-643-2112. Have your
12-digit RID (Radio Identification
Number) / ESN (Electronic Serial
Number) ready. To retrieve the RID /
ESN, turn on the radio, press the
key, and tune to channel
zero.
Please note that the vehicle will need
to be turned on, in Sirius mode, and
have an unobstructed view of the sky
in order for the radio to receive the
activation signal.
SEEK
Press the key
• Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8
seconds): select previous or next
channel.
• Pressing and holding the key (over
0.8 seconds): continuously move
to previous or next channel.
❈ If the “Category” icon is displayed,
channels are changed within the
current category.
SCAN
Press the key
• Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8
seconds): Previews each broad-
cast for 10 seconds each
❈ Press the key again to
continue listening to the current
frequency
❈ If the “Category” icon is displayed,
channels are changed within the
current category.
Category
Press the key Set
through the TUNE knob
• The display will indicate the catego-
ry menus, highlight the category
that the current channel belongs to.
• In the Category List Mode, press
the key to navigate cat-
egory list.
• Press the tune knob to select the
lowest channel in the highlighted
category.
❈ If channel is selected by selecting
category, then the “CATEGORY”
icon is displayed at the top of the
screen.
CAT
FOLDER
CAT
FOLDER
SCAN
SCAN
SEEK
TRACK
RADIO
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
Features of your vehicle
1544
Preset
Press the key ~
• Briefly pressing the key (under 0.8
seconds): Plays the frequency
saved in the corresponding key.
• Pressing and holding the key (over
0.8 seconds): Pressing and holding
the desired key from ~
will save the current broadcast to
the selected key and sound a
BEEP.
✽✽
Troubleshooting
1. Antenna Error
If this message is displayed, the
antenna or antenna cable is bro-
ken or unplugged. Please consult
with your Kia dealership.
2. Acquiring Signal
If this message is displayed, it
means that the antenna is covered
and that the SIRIUS
®
Satellite
Radio signal is not available.
Ensure the antenna is uncovered
and has a clear view of the sky.
Tune
• Rotate TUNE knob : Changes
the channel number or scrolls cat-
egory list.
• Press TUNE knob : Selects the
menu.
Menu
Select category menu through the
TUNE knob Press the key
Select [ Info] through the TUNE
knob or key
Info (Information)
Displays the Artist/Song info of the
current song.
1
RPT
MENU
61
61RADIO
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
4155
Features of your vehicle
BASIC METHOD OF USE :
USB / iPod
®
/ My Music
Press the key to change the
mod mode in order of USB(iPod
®
) ➟
AUX ➟ My Music ➟ BT Audio.
The folder/file name is displayed on
the screen.
<USB>
<My Music>
❈ The USB music is automatically
played when a USB is connected.
Repeat
While song (file) is playing
(RPT) key
USB, iPod
®
, My Music mode: RPT on
screen
• To repeat one song (press the key)
: Repeats the current song.
USB mode: FLD.RPT on screen
• To repeat folder (pressing twice):
repeats all files within the current
folder.
❈ Press the key again to turn
off repeat.
Random
While song (file) is playing
(RDM) key
My Music mode: RDM on screen
• Random (press the key) : Plays all
songs in random order.
USB mode: FLD.RDM on screen
• Folder Random (press the key) :
Plays all files within the current
folder in random order.
iPod
®
mode: ALL RDM on screen
• All Random (press the key) : Plays
all files in random order.
USB : ALL RDM on screen
• All Random (pressing twice): Plays
all files in random order.
❈ Press the key again to turn
off random.
2
RDM
2
RDM
1
RPT
1
RPT
MEDIA
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
Features of your vehicle
1564
Changing Song/File
While song (file) is playing
key
• Shortly pressing the key : Plays the
current song from the beginning.
❈ If the key is pressed
again within 2 second, the previ-
ous song is played.
• Pressing and holding the key (over
0.8 seconds): Rewinds the song.
While song (file) is playing
key
• Shortly pressing the key : Plays the
next song.
• Pressing and holding the key (over
0.8 seconds) : Fast forwards the
song.
Scan
While song (file) is playing
key
• Shortly pressing the key : Scans all
songs from the next song for 10
seconds each.
❈ Press the key again to turn
off.
❈ The SCAN function is not support-
ed in iPod
®
mode.
Folder Search : USB Mode
While file is playing
(Folder Up) key
• Searches the next folder.
While file is playing
(Folder Down) key
• Searches the parent folder.
❈ If a folder is selected by pressing
the TUNE knob, the first file
within the selected folder will be
played.
❈ In iPod
®
mode, moves to the
Parent Folder.
Searching Songs (File)
• Turning TUNE knob : Searches
for songs (files)
• Pressing TUNE knob : Plays
selected song (file).
CAT
FOLDER
CAT
FOLDER
SCAN
SCAN
SEEK
TRACK
SEEK
TRACK
SEEK
TRACK
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
4157
Features of your vehicle
MENU : USB
Press the USB mode key to
set the Repeat, Folder Random,
Folder Repeat, All Random,
Information, and Copy features.
Repeat
Press the key Set [ RPT]
through the TUNE knob or
key to repeat the current song.
❈ Press RPT again to turn off.
Folder Random
Press the key Set [ F.RDM]
through the
TUNE
knob or
key to randomly play songs within the
current folder.
❈ Press F.RDM again to turn off.
Folder Repeat
Press the key Set [ F.RPT]
through the TUNE knob or
key to repeat songs within the cur-
rent folder.
❈ Press F.RPT again to turn off.
All Random
Press the key Set [
A.RDM] through the TUNE knob
or key to randomly play all
songs within the USB.
❈ Press A.RDM again to turn off.
Information
Press the key Set [ Info]
through the TUNE knob or
key to display information of the cur-
rent song.
❈ Press the key to turn off
info display.
MENU
5
MENU
4
MENU
3
MENU
2
RDM
MENU
1
RPT
MENU
MENU
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
Features of your vehicle
1584
Copy
Press the key Set [ Copy]
through the TUNE knob or
key.
This is used to copy the current song
into My Music. You can play the
copied Music in My Music mode.
❈ If another key is pressed while
copying is in progress, a pop up
asking you whether to cancel
copying is displayed.
❈ If another media is connected or
inserted (USB, iPod
®
, AUX) while
copying is in progress, copying is
canceled.
❈ Music will not be played while
copying is in progress.
MENU : iPod
®
In iPod
®
mode, press the key
to set the Repeat, Random,
Information and Search features.
Repeat
Press the key Set [ RPT]
through the TUNE knob or
key to repeat the current song.
❈ Press RPT again to turn repeat off.
Random
Press the key Set [ RDM]
through the TUNE knob or
key.
Plays all songs within the currently
playing category in random order.
❈ Press RDM again to turn off.
Information
Press the key Set [ Info]
through the TUNE knob or key.
Displays information of the current
song.
❈ Press the key to turn off
info display.
Search
Press the key Set [
Search] through the TUNE knob
or key.
Displays iPod
®
category list.
❈ Searching iPod
®
category is
key pressed, move to par-
ent category.
MENU
4
MENU
MENU
3
MENU
2
RDM
MENU
1
RPT
MENU
MENU
6
MENU
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
4159
Features of your vehicle
MENU : My Music Mode
In My Music mode, press the
key to set the Repeat, Random,
Information, Delete, Delete All, and
Delete Selection features.
Repeat
Press the key Set [ RPT]
through the TUNE knob or
key.
Repeats the currently playing song.
❈ Press RPT again to turn repeat off.
Random
Press the key Set [ RDM]
through the TUNE knob or
key.
Plays all songs in random order.
❈ Press RDM again to turn random off.
Information
Press the key Set [ Info]
through the TUNE knob or
key.
Displays information of the current
song.
❈ Press the key to turn off
info display.
Delete
Press the key Set [ Delete]
through the TUNE knob or
key.
• Deletes currently playing file
In the play screen, pressing delete
will delete the currently playing song.
• Deletes file from list
➀ Select the file you wish to delete
by using the TUNE knob.
➁ Press the key and select
the delete menu to delete the
selected file.
Delete All
Press the key Set [ Del.All]
through the TUNE knob or
key.
Deletes all songs of My Music.
5
MENU
MENU
4
MENU
MENU
3
MENU
2
RDM
MENU
1
RPT
MENU
MENU
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
Features of your vehicle
1604
Delete Selection
Press the key Set [
Del.Sel] through the TUNE knob
or key.
Songs within My Music are selected
and deleted.
➀ Select the songs you wish to
delete from the list.
➁ After selecting, press key
and select the delete menu.
My Music
• Even if memory is available, a
maximum of 6,000 songs can be
stored.
• The same song can be copied up
to 1,000 times.
• Memory info can be checked in the
System menu of Setup.
AUX
AUX is used to play external MEDIA
currently connected with the AUX
terminal.
AUX mode will automatically start
when an external device is connect-
ed with the AUX terminal.
If an external device is connected,
you can also press the key to
change to AUX mode.
❈ AUX mode cannot be started
unless there is an external device
connected to the AUX terminal.
AUX
Fully insert the AUX cable into the
AUX terminal for use.
MEDIA
MENU
6
MENU
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
4161
Features of your vehicle
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
AUDIO (if equipped)
What is
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology
?
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
allows devices to be connected in a
short distance, including hands-free
devices, stereo headsets, wireless
remote controllers, etc. For more
information, visit
the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
website at
www.Bluetooth.com
Before using
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology audio features
•
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
audio may not be supported
depending on the compatibility of
your
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology mobile phone.
• In order to use
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology audio, you must first
pair and connect the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology mobile phone.
• The
Bluetooth
®
word mark and logos
are registered trademarks owned by
Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of
such marks by Kia is under license.
Other trademarks and trade names
are those of their respective owners.
A
Bluetooth
®
enabled cell phone is
required to use
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology
•
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
audio can be used only when the
[Audio Streaming] of Phone is
turned .
❈ Setting
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology
Audio Streaming :
Press the key Select
[Phone] Select [Audio Streaming]
through the TUNE knob Set
/
Off
On
SETUP
CLOCK
On
WARNING
Driving while distracted can
result in a loss of vehicle control
that may lead to an accident,
severe personal injury, and
death. The driver’s primary
responsibility is in the safe and
legal operation of a vehicle, and
use of any handheld devices,
other equipment, or vehicle sys-
tems which take the driver’s
eyes, attention and focus away
from the safe operation of a vehi-
cle or which are not permissible
by law should never be used dur-
ing operation of the vehicle.
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
Features of your vehicle
1624
Starting
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology Audio
• Press the key to change
the mode in order of USB➟AUX
➟My Music➟BT Audio.
• If BT Audio is selected,
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology audio will start
playing.
❈ Audio may not automatically start
playing in some mobile phones.
Using the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology audio features
• Play / Stop
Press the TUNE knob to play and
pause the current song.
❈ The title / artist info may not be
supported in some mobile phone.
When it is not supported, no
title/no artist will be displayed.
• Previous / Next song
Press or
to
play
previous or next song.
❈ The previous song / next song /
play / pause functions may not be
supported in some mobile
phones.
SEEK
TRACK
SEEK
TRACK
MEDIA
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
4163
Features of your vehicle
PHONE(IF EQUIPPED)
Before using the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology phone features
• In order to use
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology phone, you must first
pair and connect the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology mobile phone.
• If the mobile phone is not paired or
connected, it is not possible to
enter Phone mode. Once a phone
is paired or connected, the guid-
ance screen will be displayed.
• If Priority is set upon vehicle igni-
tion (IGN/ACC ON), the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology phone will be
automatically connected. Even if
you are outside, the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology phone will be
automatically connected once you
are in the vicinity of the vehicle. If
you do not want automatic
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
phone connection, set the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
power to OFF
Making a call using the
Steering-wheel mounted controls
(1) button : Mode changes
each time the button pressed.
(2) VOLUME button : Raises or low-
ers speaker volume.
(3) / button :
RADIO mode
- Briefly press the key: Move to
next or previous preset channel.
- Press and hold the key:
Automatically searches for
broadcast frequencies.
USB, iPod
®
, My Music Modes
- Briefly press the key: Move to
next or previous song.
- Press and hold the key: Rewinds
or fast-forwards the current song.
(4) button : Activates voice recog-
nition.
(5) button : Places and transfers
calls.
(6) button : Ends calls or cancels
functions.
MODE
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
Features of your vehicle
1644
• Check call history and making call
➀ Briefly press (under 0.8 seconds)
the key on the steering
remote controller.
➁ The call history list will be dis-
played on the screen.
➂ Press the key again to con-
nect a call to the selected number.
• Redialing the most recently called
number
➀ Press and hold (over 0.8 seconds)
the key on the steering
remote controller.
➁ The most recently called number
is redialed.
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
Pairing a
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology Device (if equipped)
What is Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology Pairing?
Pairing refers to the process of syn-
chronizing your
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology phone or device with the
car audio system for connection.
Pairing is necessary to connect and
use the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology feature.
The
Bluetooth
®
word mark and logos
are registered trademarks owned by
Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of
such marks by Kia is under license.
Other trademarks and trade names
are those of their respective owners.
A
Bluetooth
®
enabled cell phone is
required to use
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology
WARNING
Driving while distracted can
result in a loss of vehicle control
that may lead to an accident,
severe personal injury, and
death. The driver’s primary
responsibility is in the safe and
legal operation of a vehicle, and
use of any handheld devices,
other equipment, or vehicle sys-
tems which take the driver’s
eyes, attention and focus away
from the safe operation of a vehi-
cle or which are not permissible
by law should never be used dur-
ing operation of the vehicle.
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
4165
Features of your vehicle
Pairing Key / Key
on the Steering Remote
Controller
When No Devices have been
Paired
1.Press the key or the
key on the steering remote controller.
The following screen is displayed.
2.Select [OK] button to enter the Pair
Phone screen.
1)Car Name : Name of device as
shown when searching from your
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
device
2) Passkey : Passkey used to pair
the device
3.From your
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology device (i.e. Mobile
Phone), search and select your car
audio system.
[Non SSP supported device]
(SSP: Secure Simple Pairing)
4.After a few moments, a screen is
displayed where the passkey is
entered. Enter the passkey “0000”
to pair your
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology device with the car
audio system.
[SSP supported device]
4.After a few moments, a screen is
displayed 6 digits passkey.
Check the passkey on your
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
device and confirm.
5.Once pairing is complete, the fol-
lowing screen is displayed.
PHONE
PHONE
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
Features of your vehicle
1664
During the pairing process, make sure
that all connection requests on the
phone are accepted for phonebook
download and to allow acceptance of all
future connection requests. " and "Visit
http://www.kia.com/us/en/content/own
ers/bluetooth for additional information
on pairing your Bluetooth-enabled
mobile phone, and to view a phone
compatibility list.
• If
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
devices are paired but none are
currently connected, pressing the
key or the key on the
steering wheel displays the follow-
ing screen. Select [Pair] button to
pair a new device or select
[Connect] to connect a previously
paired device.
PHONE
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
4167
Features of your vehicle
Pairing through [PHONE]
Setup
Press the key Select
[Phone] Select [Pair Phone]
Select TUNE knob
1. The following steps are the same
as those described in the section
"When No Devices have been
Paired" on the previous page.
•
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
features supported within the vehi-
cle are as follows. Some features
may not be supported depending
on your
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology device.
- Outgoing/Incoming Handsfree
calls
- Operations during a call (Switch
to Private, Switch to call waiting,
MIC on/off)
- Downloading Call History
- Downloading Mobile Contacts
-
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
device auto connection
- Bluetooth Audio Streaming
• Up to five
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology devices can be paired
to the Car Handsfree system.
• Only one
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology device can be con-
nected at a time.
• Other devices cannot be paired
while a
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology device is connected.
• Only
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology Handsfree and
Bluetooth audio related features
are supported.
• Bluetooth related operations are
possible only within devices that
support Handsfree or audio fea-
tures, such as a
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology mobile phone
or a Bluetooth audio device.
• If a connected
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology device becomes dis-
connected due to being out of
communication range, turning the
device OFF, or a
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology communica-
tion error, corresponding
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
devices are automatically
searched and reconnected.
• If the system becomes unstable
due to communication errors
between the car Handsfree and the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
device, reset the device by turning
off and back on again. Upon reset-
ting
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology device, the system will
be restored.
SETUP
CLOCK
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
Features of your vehicle
1684
• After pairing is complete, a con-
tacts download request is sent
once to the mobile phone. Some
mobile phones may require confir-
mation upon receiving a download
request, ensure your mobile phone
accepts the connection. Refer to
your phones user’s manual for
additional information regarding
phone pairing and connections.
Connecting a Device
Press the key Select
[Phone] Select [Phone List]
1) Connected Phone : Device that is
currently connected
2) Paired Phone : Device that is
paired but not connected
From the paired phone list, select the
device you want to connect and
select [Connect].
SETUP
CLOCK
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
4169
Features of your vehicle
Changing Priority
What is Priority?
It is possible to pair up to five
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
devices with the car audio system.
The "Change Priority" feature is used
to set the connection priority of
paired phones.
Press the key Select
[Phone] Select [Phone List]
From the paired phone list, select
the phone you want to switch to the
highest priority, then select [Change
Priority] button from the Menu. The
selected device will be changed to
the highest priority.
• Priority icon will be displayed when
the selected phone is set as a pri-
ority phone.
SETUP
CLOCK
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
Features of your vehicle
1704
Disconnecting a Device
Press the key Select
[Phone] Select [Phone List]
From the paired phone list, select the
currently connected device and
select [Disconnect] button.
Deleting a Device
Press the key Select
[Phone] Select [Phone List]
From the paired phone list, select the
device you want to delete and select
[Delete] button.
• When deleting the currently con-
nected device, the device will auto-
matically be disconnected to pro-
ceed with the deleting process.
• If a paired
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology device is deleted, the
device’s call history and contacts
data will also be deleted.
• To re-use a deleted device, you
must pair the device again.
SETUP
CLOCK
SETUP
CLOCK
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
4171
Features of your vehicle
USING
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology(if equipped)
Phone Menu Screen
Phone Menus
With a
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
device connected, press the
key to display the Phone menu
screen.
1) Favorite : Up to 20 frequently
used contacts saved for easy
access.
2) Call History : Displays the call his-
tory list screen
3) Contacts : Displays the Contacts
list screen
4) Setup : Displays Phone related
settings.
• If you select the [Call History] but-
ton but there is no call history data,
a prompt is displayed which asks to
download call history data.
• If you select the [Contacts] button
but there is no contacts data
stored, a prompt is displayed which
asks to download contacts data.
• This feature may not be supported
in some mobile phones. For more
information on download support,
refer to your mobile phone user’s
manual.
Answering Calls
Answering a Call
Answering a call with a
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology device connect-
ed will display the following screen.
To accept the call, press key on
the steering wheel while the call is
incoming.
1) Caller : Displays the other caller's
name when the incoming caller is
saved within your contacts
2) Incoming Number : Displays the
incoming number
PHONE
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
Features of your vehicle
1724
• When an incoming call pop-up is
displayed, most Audio and SETUP
mode features are disabled. Only
the call volume will operate.
• The telephone number may not be
properly displayed in some mobile
phones.
• When a call is answered with the
mobile phone, the call mode will
automatically revert to Private
mode.
Favorites
Press the key Select
[Favorites]
1) Saved favorite contact : Connects
call upon selection
2) To add favorite : Downloaded con-
tacts be saved as favorite.
• To save Favorite, contacts should
be downloaded.
• Contact saved in Favorites will not
be automatically updated if the
contact has been updated in the
phone. To update Favorites, delete
the Favorite and create a new
Favorite.
Call History
Press the key Select [Call
History]
A list of incoming, outgoing and
missed calls is displayed.
• Call history may not be saved in the
call history list in some mobile
phones.
• Calls received with hidden caller ID
will not be saved in the call history
list.
• Calling through the call history is not
possible when there is no call histo-
ry stored or a
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology phone is not connected.
• Up to 50 received, dialed and
missed calls are stored in Call
History.
• Time of received/dialed calls and
call time information are not stored
in Call History.
PHONE PHONE
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
4173
Features of your vehicle
Contacts
Press the key Select
[Contacts]
The list of saved phone book entries
is displayed.
NOTE:
Find a contact in an alphabetical
order, press the key.
• Up to 1,000 contacts saved in your
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
phone can be downloaded into the
car contacts. Contacts that have
been downloaded to the car cannot
be edited or deleted on the phone.
• Mobile phone contacts are man-
aged separately for each paired
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
device (max 5 devices x 1,000 con-
tacts each). Previously down-
loaded data is maintained even if
the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
device has been disconnected.
(However, the contacts and call his-
tory saved to the phone will be delet-
ed if a paired phone is deleted.)
• It is possible to download contacts
during Bluetooth streaming audio.
• When downloading contacts, the
icon will be displayed within the
status bar.
• It is not possible to begin down-
loading a contact list when the con-
tact download feature has been
turned off within the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology device. In
addition, some devices may
require device authorization upon
attempting to download contacts. If
downloading does not normally
occur, check the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology device set-
tings or the screen state.
• The contacts download feature
may not be supported in some
mobile phones. For more informa-
tion of supported
Bluetooth
®
devices and function support, refer
to your phone’s user manual.
MENU
PHONE
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
Features of your vehicle
1744
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology Setting
The
Bluetooth
®
word mark and logos
are registered trademarks owned by
Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of
such marks by Kia is under license.
Other trademarks and trade names
are those of their respective owners.
A
Bluetooth
®
enabled cell phone is
required to use
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology
Pairing a New Device
Press the key Select
[Phone] Select [Pair Phone]
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
devices can be paired with the audio
system.
For more information, refer to the
“Pairing through Phone Setup” sec-
tion within
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology.
Viewing Paired Phone List
Press the key Select
[Phone] Select [Phone List]
This feature is used to view mobile
phones that have been paired with
the audio system. Upon selecting a
paired phone, the setup menu is dis-
played.
For more information, refer to the
“Setting
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology Connection” section within
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology.
SETUP
CLOCK
SETUP
CLOCK
WARNING
Driving while distracted can
result in a loss of vehicle control
that may lead to an accident,
severe personal injury, and
death. The driver’s primary
responsibility is in the safe and
legal operation of a vehicle, and
use of any handheld devices,
other equipment, or vehicle sys-
tems which take the driver’s
eyes, attention and focus away
from the safe operation of a vehi-
cle or which are not permissible
by law should never be used dur-
ing operation of the vehicle.
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
4175
Features of your vehicle
1) Connect/Disconnect Phone :
Connect/ disconnects currently
selected phone
2) Change Priority : Sets currently
selected phone to highest connec-
tion priority
3) Delete : Deletes the currently
selected phone
4) Return : Moves to the previous
screen
• To learn more about whether your
mobile phone supports contacts
downloads, refer to your mobile
phone user’s manual.
• The contacts for only the connect-
ed phone can be downloaded
Downloading Contacts
Press the key Select
[Phone] Select [Contacts Download]
As the contacts are downloaded
from the mobile phone, a download
progress bar is displayed.
• Upon downloading phone con-
tacts, the previous corresponding
data is deleted.
• This feature may not be supported
in some mobile phones.
• Voice Recognition may not operate
while contacts are being down-
loaded.
Outgoing Volume
Press the key Select
[Phone] Select [Outgoing Volume]
Use TUNE knob to adjust the out-
going volume level.
• While on a call, the volume can be
changed by using the
key.
SEEK
TRACK
SETUP
CLOCK
SETUP
CLOCK
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
Features of your vehicle
1764
Turning Bluetooth System Off
Press the key Select
[Phone] Select [Bluetooth System
Off]
Once
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
is turned off,
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology related features will not
be supported within the audio sys-
tem.
• To turn
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology back on, go to
[Phone] and select “Yes”.
SETUP
CLOCK
SETUP
CLOCK
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
4177
Features of your vehicle
VOICE RECOGNITION
Using Voice Recognition
Starting Voice Recognition
Shortly press the key on the
steering wheel. Say a command
If prompt feedback is in [ON], then
the system will say “Please say a
command after the beep (BEEP)”
• If prompt feedback is in [OFF]
mode, then the system will only
say “(BEEP)”
• To change Prompt Feedback
[On]/[Off], go to [System]
[Prompt Feedback]
• For proper recognition, say the
command after the voice instruc-
tion and beep tone.
Skipping Prompt Messages
While prompt message is being stat-
ed Shortly press the key on the
steering remote controller
The prompt message is immediately
ended and the beep tone will sound.
After the “beep”, say the voice com-
mand.
Re-starting Voice Recognition
While system waits for a command
Shortly press the key on the
steering remote controller
The command wait state is immedi-
ately ended and the beep ton will
sound. After the “beep”, say the voice
command.
SETUP
CLOCK
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
Features of your vehicle
1784
ENDING VOICE
RECOGNITION
While Voice Recognition is operating
Press and hold the key on the
steering remote controller
• While using voice command,
pressing any steering wheel con-
trol or a different key will end voice
command.
• When the system is waiting for a
voice command, say “cancel” or
“end” to end voice command.
• When the system is waiting for a
voice command, press and hold
the key on the steering wheel
to end voice command.
Voice Recognition and Phone
Contact Tips:
The Kia Voice Recognition System
may have difficulty understanding
some accents or uncommon
names. When using Voice
Recognition to place a call, speak in
a moderate tone, with clear pronun-
ciation
To maximize the use of Voice
Recognition, consider these guide-
lines when storing contacts:
• Do not store single-name entries
(e.g., “Bob”, “Mom”, etc.). Instead,
always use full names (including
first and last names) for these con-
tacts
• Do not use special characters
(e.g., '@', '-', '*', '&', etc.)
• Do not use abbreviations (i.e., use
"Lieutenant" instead of "Lt.") or
acronyms (i.e., use "County
Finance Department" instead of
"C. F. D."; Be sure to say the name
exactly as it is entered in the con-
tacts list
• Do not use acronyms (i.e., use
“County Finance Department”
instead of “CFD”).
• If a name is not recognized from
the contact list, change it to a more
descriptive name (e.g., use
“Grandpa Joseph” instead of “Pa
Joe”).
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
4179
Features of your vehicle
Illustration on using voice commands
• Starting voice command.
Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8 seconds):
• Skipping Prompt Messages
Briefly pressing the key (under 0.8 seconds):
• End voice command.
Briefly pressing the key (under 0.8 seconds):
while guidance message is being stated
More Help
Contacts
Cancel
More Help
Please say a command after
the beep (BEEP)
Please say a...
Contacts.
Please say the name of the contact you want
to call.
(BEEP)
Please say a command
after the beep (BEEP)
Beep Beep.. (end beep)
Briefly pressing the
key (under 0.8 seconds)
Beep~
More Help
Here are some examples of mode commands.
You can say a radio type like 'FM', 'AM', or 'Satellite'.
You can also say a media source like 'USB', 'My
Music', or 'iPod
®
'.
Additionally, there are phone commands like
"Contacts', 'Call History', or 'Dial Number".
You can find more detailed commands in the user's
manual.
Please say a command after the beep.
More Help
Here are some examples of mode commands.
You can say a radio type like 'FM', 'AM', or 'Satellite'.
You can also say a media source like 'USB', 'My
Music', or 'iPod
®
'.
Additionally, there are phone commands like
"Contacts', 'Call History', or 'Dial Number".
You can find more detailed commands in the user's
manual.
Please say a command after the beep.
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
Features of your vehicle
1804
Voice Command List
• Common Commands: These commands can be used in most operations. (However a few commands may not be
available during certain operations)
Command Function
More Help Provides guidance on commands that can be
used anywhere in the system.
Help Provides guidance on commands that can be
used within the current mode.
Call<Name> Calls <Name> saved in Contacts
Ex) Call “John Smith”
Call <Name> Calls <Name> to the number that is saved as
"Mobile" in Contacts
Ex) Call "John Smith" on Mobile
Call <Name> Calls <Name> to the number that is saved as
"Office" in Contacts
Ex) Call "John Smith" in Office
Call <Name> Calls <Name> to the number that is saved as
"Home" in Contacts
Ex) Call "John Smith" at Home
Call <Name> Calls <Name> to the number that is saved as
"Other" in Contacts
Ex) Call "John Smith" on Other
Phone Provides guidance on Phone related com-
mands. After saying this command, say
“Favorites”,“Call History”, “Contacts” or ”Dial
Number” execute corresponding functions.
Favorites Display the Favorite screen.
Call History Displays the Call History screen.
Command Function
Contacts Displays the Contacts screen. After saying
this command, say the name of a contact
saved in the Contacts to automatically con-
nect the call.
Dial Number Display the Dial number screen. After saying
this command, you can say the number that
you want to call.
Redial Connects the most recently called number.
Tutorial Provide guidance on how to use voice
recognition and Bluetooth
®
connections
•
When listening to the radio, displays the next
radio screen. (FM1
➟
FM2
➟
AM
➟
SAT1
➟
SAT2
➟
SAT3
➟
FM1)
Radio
•
When listening to a different mode, displays
the most recently played radio screen.
•
When currently listening to the FM radio,
maintains the current state.
•
When listening to a different mode, displays
the most recently played FM screen.
FM1(FM One) Displays the FM1 screen.
FM2(FM Two) Displays the FM2 screen.
AM Displays the AM screen.
on Mobile
in Office
at Home
on Other
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
4181
Features of your vehicle
Command Function
FM Preset 1~6 Plays the most recently played broadcast
saved in FM Preset 1~6.
AM Preset 1~6 Plays the broadcast saved in AM Preset 1~6.
FM 87.5~107.9 Plays the FM broadcast of the corresponding
frequency.
AM 530~1710 Plays the AM broadcast of the corresponding
frequency.
SiriusXM
®
•
When currently listening to the SiriusXM
®
,
maintains the current state.
•
When listening to a different mode, displays
the most recently played SiriusXM
®
screen.
SiriusXM
®
(Satellite)
Displays the selected SiriusXM
®
screen.
SiriusXM
®
Channel Plays the selected SiriusXM
®
channel.
Media Moves to the most recently played media
screen.
USB Plays USB music.
iPod
®
Plays iPod
®
music.
Command Function
My Music Plays the music saved in My Music.
AUX (Auxiliary) Plays the connected external device.
Bluetooth
®
Audio Plays the music saved in connected Bluetooth
®
device.
Please repeat Repeats the most recent comment.
Mute Mutes the sound.
Cancel (Exit) Ends voice command.
0~223
1~3
(Satellite)
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
Features of your vehicle
1824
• FM/AM radio commands: Commands available during
FM, AM radio operation.
• Satellite radio commands: Commands that can be
used while listening to Satellite Radio.
Command Function
Preset 1~6 Plays the broadcast station saved in Preset 1~6.
Scan Scans receivable frequencies from the current
broadcast and plays for 10 seconds each.
Preset Scan Moves to the next preset from the current
present and plays for 10 seconds each.
Information Displays the information of the current broad-
cast.(This feature can be used when receiving
RBDS broadcasts.)
Command Function
Channel 0~223 Plays the selected Satellite Radio channel.
Scan Scans receivable channels from the current
broadcast and plays for 10 seconds each.
Preset 1~6 Plays the broadcast saved in Preset 1~6.
Information Displays the information of the current broad-
cast.
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
4183
Features of your vehicle
• USB commands: Commands available during USB
operation.
•iPod
®
Commands: Commands available during iPod
®
operation.
Command Function
Random Randomly plays the files within the current
folder.
Random Off Cancels random play to play files in sequential
order.
Repeat Repeats the current file.
Repeat Off Cancels repeat play to play files in sequential
order.
Information Displays the information screen of the current
file.
Next Folder Play the first file in the next folder.
Previous Folder Play the first file in the previous folder.
Command Function
Random Randomly plays the songs within the current
category.
Random Off Cancels random play to play songs in sequen-
tial order.
Repeat Repeats the current song.
Repeat Off Cancels repeat play to play songs in sequen-
tial order.
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
Features of your vehicle
1844
• My Music Commands: Commands available during
My Music operation.
•
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology Audio Commands:
Commands available during
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology audio streaming from mobile phone oper-
ation Command Operation.
Command Function
Random Randomly plays all saved files.
Random Off Cancels random play to play files in sequential
order.
Repeat Repeats the current file.
Repeat Off Cancels repeat play to play files in sequential
order.
Delete Deletes the current file. You will bypass an
additional confirmation process.
Command Function
Play Plays the currently paused song.
Pause Pauses the current song.
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
4185
Features of your vehicle
iPod
®
is a registered trademark of Apple Inc. iPod
®
mobile digital device sold separately. The
Bluetooth
®
word mark and logos are registered
trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any
use of such marks by Kia is under license.
SiriusXM services require a subscription sold sep-
arately, or as a package, by Sirius XM Radio Inc. If
you decide to continue service after your trial, the
subscription plan you choose will automatically
renew thereafter and you will be charged according
to your chosen payment method at then-current
rates. Fees and taxes apply.To cancel you must call
SiriusXM at 1-866-635-2349. See SiriusXM
Customer Agreement for complete terms at
www.siriusxm.com. SiriusXM U.S. satellite and data
services are available only in the 48 contiguous
USA, DC and PR (with coverage limitations).
SiriusXM satellite service is also available in
Canada; see www.siriusxm.ca. All fees and pro-
gramming subject to change. Sirius, XM and all
related marks and logos are trademarks of Sirius
XM Radio Inc. Sirius, XM and all related marks and
logos are trademarks of Sirius XM Radio Inc.
Android™ is a trademark of Google, Inc. BlackBerry
is a registered trademark of Research In Motion
Limited (RIM). All other marks, channel names and
logos are the property of their respective owners.
All rights reserved.
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
Driving your vehicle
Before driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
• Before entering vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
• Necessary inspections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
• Before starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
POWER button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
• Illuminated POWER button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
• POWER button position. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
• Starting the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
• Pedestrian Warning System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
• Turing off the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Active ECO operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Reduction gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
• Reduction gear operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
• Good driving practices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
Brake system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
• Power brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
• Electric parking brake (EPB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
• Anti-lock brake system (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
• Electronic stability control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
• Vehicle stability management (VSM) . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28
• Hill-start assist control (HAC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29
• Good braking practices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30
Cruise control system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32
• Cruise control switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33
• To set cruise control speed: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33
• To increase cruise control set speed: . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34
• To decrease the cruising speed: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34
• To temporarily accelerate with the cruise
control on: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34
• To cancel cruise control, do one of the following: . . 5-35
• To resume cruising speed at more than
approximately 20 mph (30 km/h):. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35
• To turn cruise control off, do one of the
following: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36
Economical operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37
Special driving conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39
• Hazardous driving conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39
• Reducing the risk of a rollover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39
• Rocking the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-40
• Smooth cornering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41
• Driving at night . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41
• Driving in the rain. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-42
• Driving in flooded areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-42
• Driving off-road. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-43
• Highway driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-43
5
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
Winter driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-44
• Snowy or icy conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-44
• Use high quality ethylene glycol coolant. . . . . . . . . . 5-46
• Check battery and cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-46
• To keep locks from freezing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-46
• Use approved window washer anti-freeze
in system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-46
• Don’t let your parking brake freeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-46
• Don't let ice and snow accumulate underneath . . . . 5-47
• Carry emergency equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-47
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-47
Vehicle load limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-48
• Tire and loading information label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-48
• Certification label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-51
Vehicle weight glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-53
• Base curb weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-53
• Vehicle curb weight. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-53
• Cargo weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-53
• GAW (Gross axle weight) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-53
• GAWR (Gross axle weight rating). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-53
• GVW (Gross vehicle weight) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-53
• GVWR (Gross vehicle weight rating) . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-53
5
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
53
Driving your vehicle
Before entering vehicle
• Be sure that all windows, outside
mirror(s), and outside lights are
clean.
• Check the condition of the tires.
• Check under the vehicle for any
sign of leaks.
• Be sure there are no obstacles
behind you if you intend to back up.
Necessary inspections
Fluid levels, such as coolant, brake
fluid, and washer fluid should be
checked on a regular basis, at the
exact interval depending on the fluid.
Further details are provided in chap-
ter 7, “Maintenance”.
Before starting
• Close and lock all doors.
• Position the seat so that all con-
trols are easily reached.
• Buckle your seat belt.
• Adjust the inside and outside
rearview mirrors.
• Be sure that all lights work.
• Check all gauges.
• Check the operation of warning
lights when the POWER button is
turned to the ON position.
• Release the parking brake and
make sure the brake warning light
goes out.
For safe operation, be sure you are
familiar with your vehicle and its
equipment.
BEFORE DRIVING
WARNING - Distracted
driving
Focus on the road while driving.
The driver's primary responsi-
bility is in the safe and legal
operation of the vehicle. Use of
any handled devices, other
equipment or vehicle systems
that distract the drive should
not be used during vehicle
operation.
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
Driving your vehicle
45
WARNING - Check sur-
roundings
Always check the surrounding
areas near your vehicle for peo-
ple, especially children, before
putting a vehicle into D (Drive)
or R (Reverse).
WARNING - Loose
objects
Securely store items in your
vehicle. When you make a sud-
den stop or turn the steering
wheel rapidly, loose objects
may drop on the floor and it
could interfere with the opera-
tion of the foot pedals, possibly
causing an accident.
WARNING - Driving while
intoxicated
Do not drive while intoxicated.
Drinking and driving is danger-
ous. Even a small amount of
alcohol will affect your reflexes,
perceptions and judgment.
Driving while under the influ-
ence of drugs is as dangerous
as or more dangerous than driv-
ing drunk.
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
55
Driving your vehicle
Illuminated POWER button
Whenever the front door is opened,
the POWER button will illuminate for
your convenience.The light will go off
after about 30 seconds when the
door is closed.
When all entrances are closed, if you
lock the vehicle by using the smart
key, the light will go off immediately.
POWER button position
OFF
To turn off the vehicle, press the
POWER button with the shift lever in
the P (Park) position. When you
press the POWER button without the
shift lever in the P (Park) position, the
POWER button will not change to the
OFF position but to the ACC posi-
tion.
In an emergency situation while the
vehicle is in motion, you are able to
turn the vehicle off and to the ACC
position by pressing the POWER
button for more than 2 seconds or 3
times successively within 3 seconds.
If the vehicle is still moving, you can
restart the vehicle without depress-
ing the brake pedal by pressing the
POWER button with the shift lever in
the N (Neutral) position.
ACC (Accessory)
Press the POWER button while it is
in the OFF position without depress-
ing the brake pedal.
If the POWER button is in the ACC
position for more than 1 hour, the
POWER button is turned off auto-
matically to prevent battery dis-
charge.
POWER BUTTON
OPSE054001
Not illuminated
Amber
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
Driving your vehicle
65
ON
Press the POWER button while it is
in the ACC position without depress-
ing the brake pedal.
The warning lights can be checked
before the vehicle is started. Do not
leave the POWER button in the ON
position for a long time, otherwise
the battery may discharge.
START/RUN
To start the vehicle, depress the
brake pedal and press the POWER
button with the shift lever in the P
(Park) position.
If you press the POWER button with-
out depressing the brake pedal, the
vehicle will not start and the POWER
button changes as follow:
OFF ➔ ACC ➔ ON ➔ OFF or ACC
✽✽
NOTICE
If you leave the POWER button in
the ACC or ON position for a long
time, the battery will discharge.
Redish orange
Not illuminated
WARNING - Starting
vehicle
Never press the POWER button
while the vehicle is in motion
except in an emergency. If the
vehicle stops while the vehicle
is in motion, this would result in
loss of directional control and
braking function, which could
cause an accident.
WARNING - Leaving the
Vehicle
To avoid unexpected or sudden
vehicle movement, never leave
your vehicle if the transmission
is not locked in the P (Park)
position and the parking brake
is fully engaged. Before leaving
the driver's seat, always make
sure the shift lever is engaged in
P (Park), set the parking brake
fully and shut the engine off.
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
57
Driving your vehicle
Starting the vehicle
1. Carry the smart key or leave it
inside the vehicle.
2. Make sure the parking brake is
firmly applied
3. Place the transaxle shift lever in P
(Park). Depress the brake pedal
fully.
4. Press the POWER button until the
ready " " indicator light in the
cluster is turned on.
• Even if the smart key is in the vehi-
cle, if it is far away from you, the
vehicle may not start.
• When the POWER button is in the
ACC position or above, if any door
is opened, the system checks for
the smart key. If the smart key is
not in the vehicle, a message "key
is not in the vehicle" will appear on
the LCD display. And if all doors
are closed, the chime will sound for
5 seconds. The indicator or warn-
ing will turn off while the vehicle is
moving. Always have the smart key
with you.
CAUTION
If the vehicle stalls while the
vehicle is in motion, do not
attempt to move the shift lever
to the P (Park) position. If the
traffic and road conditions per-
mit, you may put the shift lever
in the N (Neutral) position while
the vehicle is still moving and
press the POWER button in an
attempt to restart the vehicle.
WARNING - Proper
footwear
Always wear appropriate shoes
when operating your vehicle.
Unsuitable shoes (high heels, ski
boots, sandals, etc.) may inter-
fere with your ability to use the
brake and accelerator pedals.
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
Driving your vehicle
85
• If the battery is weak or the smart
key does not work correctly, you
can start the vehicle by pressing
the POWER button with the smart
key.
The side with the lock button
should contact the POWER button
directly.
When you press the POWER but-
ton directly with the smart key, the
smart key should contact the
POWER button at a right angle.
• When the stop lamp fuse is blown,
you can't start the vehicle normally.
Replace the fuse with a new one. If
it is not possible, you can start the
vehicle by pressing the POWER
button for 10 seconds while it is in
the ACC position. The vehicle can
start with depressing the brake
pedal.
Do not press the POWER button for
more than 10 seconds except when
the stop lamp fuse is blown.
OPSE054005
WARNING - Unintended
vehicle movement
Never leave the smart key in the
vehicle with children or vehicle
occupants who are unfamiliar
with the vehicle operation.
Pushing the POWER button
while the smart key is in the
vehicle may result in unintend-
ed vehicle movement.
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
59
Driving your vehicle
Pedestrian Warning System
The Pedestrian Warning System
generates engine sound for pedestri-
ans to hear vehicle sound because
there is little sound while the Electric
Vehicle (EV) is operating.
If the vehicle is moving low speed,
the Pedestrian Warning System will
operated.
- When the reduction gear is shifted to
[R], the Pedestrian Warning System
will be operated immediately.
Turing off the Vehicle
1. Depress the brake pedal fully.
2. Place the shift lever in the P
(Park).
3. Apply the parking brake firmly.
4. Press the POWER button to turn
the vehicle off.
5. Make sure the " (ready)" indi-
cator lights on the instrument clus-
ter are turned off.
✽✽
NOTICE
If the " (ready)" indicator light
on the instrument cluster is still on,
be careful that the vehicle is not
turned off and can move when you
place the shift lever in any position
except P (Park).
OPSE054006
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
Driving your vehicle
105
Active ECO operation
Active ECO helps improve energy
efficiency by controlling certain
motor and climate contol system
operating parameters. Energy effi-
ciency depends on the driver's driv-
ing habit and road condition.
• When the Active ECO button is
pressed the ECO indicator (green)
will illuminate to show that the
Active ECO is operating.
• When the Active ECO is activated,
it will remain on until the Active
ECO button is pressed again.
Active ECO does not turn off when
the vehicle is restarted. To turn off
Active ECO, press the Active ECO
button again.
• If Active ECO is turned off, the sys-
tem will return to normal mode.
ACTIVE ECO SYSTEM
OPSE054016N
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
Driving your vehicle
125
Reduction gear operation
When stopped on an incline, do not
hold the vehicle with the motor
power. Use the service brake or the
parking brake.
Transaxle ranges
The indicator in the instrument clus-
ter displays the shift lever position
when the POWER button is in the
ON position.
P (Park)
Always come to a complete stop
before shifting into P (Park). This
position locks the gear and prevents
the drive wheels from rotating.
Shifting into P (Park) while the vehi-
cle is in motion will cause the drive
wheels to lock which will cause you
to lose control of the vehicle.
WARNING - Leaving the
vehicle
Before leaving the driver’s seat,
always make sure the shift lever
is in the P (Park) position; then
set the parking brake fully and
shut the vehicle off. Do not use
the P position in place of the
parking brake. Always make
sure the shift lever is latched in
the P position and set the park-
ing brake fully. Unexpected and
sudden vehicle movement can
occur if these precautions are
not followed.
CAUTION - Reduction
gear
To avoid damage to your reduc-
tion gear, do not accelerate the
vehicle in R (Reverse) or any
forward gear position with the
brakes on. The reduction gear
may be damaged if you shift
into P (Park) while the vehicle is
in motion.
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
513
Driving your vehicle
R (Reverse)
Use this position to drive the vehicle
backward.
N (Neutral)
The wheels and gear are not
engaged. The vehicle will roll freely
even on the slightest incline unless
the parking brake or service brakes
are applied.
D (Drive)
This is the normal forward driving
position. The gear will automatically
shift providing the best energy econ-
omy and power.
✽✽
NOTICE
Always come to a complete stop
before shifting into D (Drive).
B (Regenerative brake): maximum
regenerative braking mode
Use it when you desire to use regen-
erative braking.
It is useful when you drive on a long
downhill on a highway, mountain
trails, or a slope.
❈ If you use regenerative braking,
you can achieve the same effect
as engine brake of a combustion
engine.
CAUTION - Shifting
Always come to a complete stop
before shifting into or out of R
(Reverse); you may damage the
gear if you shift into R (Reverse)
while the vehicle is in motion,
except when “Rocking the vehi-
cle” explained in this section.
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
Driving your vehicle
145
Shift lock system
For your safety, the reduction gear
has a shift lock system which pre-
vents shifting the gear from P (Park)
into R (Reverse) unless the brake
pedal is depressed.
To shift the gear from P (Park) into R
(Reverse):
1. Depress and hold the brake pedal.
2. Start the vehicle or turn the
POWER button to the ON posi-
tion.
3. Move the shift lever.
If the brake pedal is repeatedly
depressed and released with the
shift lever in the P (Park) position, a
chattering noise near the shift lever
may be heard. It is a normal condi-
tion.
Shift-lock override
If the shift lever cannot be moved
from the P (Park) position into R
(Reverse) position with the brake
pedal depressed, continue depress-
ing the brake, then do the following:
1. Carefully remove the cap covering
the shift-lock access hole (1).
2. Insert a screwdriver into the
access hole and press down on
the screwdriver.
3. Move the shift lever.
4. Have your vehicle inspected by an
authorized Kia dealer immediately.
• While the charging cable is con-
nected, you cannot use the shift
lever for safety reasons.
WARNING - Shifting from
park
Always fully depress the brake
pedal before and while shifting
out of the P (Park) position into
another position to avoid inad-
vertent motion of the vehicle
which could injure persons in
or around the vehicle.
OPSE044263L
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
515
Driving your vehicle
Good driving practices
• Never move the gear shift lever
from P (Park) to any other position
with the accelerator pedal
depressed.
• Never move the gear shift lever into
P (Park) when the vehicle is in
motion.
• Slow down before shifting to a
lower gear. Otherwise, the lower
gear may not be engaged.
• Always use the parking brake. Do
not depend on placing the shift
lever in P (Park) to keep the vehicle
from moving.
• Optimum vehicle performance and
economy is obtained by smoothly
depressing and releasing the
accelerator pedal.
Moving up a steep grade from a
standing start
To move up a steep grade from a
standing start, depress the brake
pedal, shift the shift lever to D
(Drive). Select the appropriate gear
depending on load weight and steep-
ness of the grade, and release the
parking brake. Depress the accelera-
tor gradually while releasing the
service brakes.
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
Driving your vehicle
165
Power brakes
Your vehicle's brake system is
power-assisted by the electric
hydraulic pump.
In the event the brakes lose power
because of a brake control system
malfunction, unstable power supply
or some other reason, you can still
stop your vehicle by applying greater
force to the brake pedal than you
normally would. The stopping dis-
tance, however will be longer. Please
have the system checked as soon as
possible.
If the brake pedal does not return to
its normal position when released,
there may be a malfunction in the
brake system. Take your vehicle to
an authorized Kia dealer and have
the system checked.
Wet brakes may impair the vehicle’s
ability to safely slow down; the vehi-
cle may also pull to one side when
the brakes are applied. Applying the
brakes lightly will indicate whether
they have been affected in this way.
Always test your brakes in this fash-
ion after driving through deep water.
To dry the brakes, apply them lightly
while maintaining a safe forward
speed until brake performance
returns to normal.
BRAKE SYSTEM
WARNING - Steep hill
braking
Avoid continuous application of
the brakes when descending a
long or steep hill by shifting to a
lower gear. Continuous brake
application will cause the brakes
to overheat and could result in a
temporary loss of braking per-
formance.
WARNING
Do not turn off the vehicle while
going down a hill. The brake
booster may not work suffi-
ciently and the braking distance
may be longer.
CAUTION
Do not depress the brake pedal
continuously without READY
( ) status. The battery may be
discharged.
CAUTION - Brake Pedal
Do not drive with your foot rest-
ing on the brake pedal. This will
create abnormally high brake
temperatures which can cause
excessive brake lining and pad
wear.
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
517
Driving your vehicle
In the event of brake failure
If service brakes fail to operate while
the vehicle is in motion, you can
make an emergency stop with the
parking brake. The stopping dis-
tance, however, will be much greater
than normal.
Disc brakes wear indicator
When your brake pads are worn and
new pads are required, you will hear
a high-pitched warning sound from
your front brakes or rear brakes. You
may hear this sound come and go or
it may occur whenever you depress
the brake pedal.
Please remember that some driving
conditions or climates may cause a
brake squeal when you first apply (or
lightly apply) the brakes. This is nor-
mal and does not indicate a problem
with your brakes.
Always replace the front or rear
brake pads as pairs.
WARNING - Parking brake
Applying the parking brake
while the vehicle is moving at
normal speeds can cause a
sudden loss of control of the
vehicle. If you must use the
parking brake to stop the vehi-
cle, use great caution in apply-
ing the brake.
WARNING - Brake wear
Do not ignore high pitched
whining sounds from your
brakes. If you ignore this audi-
ble warning, you will eventually
lose braking performance,
which could lead to a serious
accident.
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
Driving your vehicle
185
Electric parking brake (EPB)
Applying the parking brake
To apply the EPB (electric parking
brake):
1. Depress the brake pedal.
2. Pull up the EPB switch.
Make sure the warning light
comes on.
✽✽
NOTICE
A click or electric brake motor
whine sound may be heard while
operating or releasing the EPB, but
these conditions are normal and
indicate that the EPB is functioning
properly.
Releasing the parking brake
To release the EPB (electric parking
brake), press the EPB switch in the
following condition:
• Have the POWER button in the ON
position.
• Depress the brake pedal.
Make sure the brake warning light
goes off.
OPSE054009N
OPSE054008N
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
519
Driving your vehicle
To release EPB (electric parking
brake) automatically:
• Shift lever in P (Park)
With the vehicle is in the ready
( ) mode depress the brake
pedal and shift out of P (Park) to R
(Reverse) or D (Drive).
• Shift lever in N (Neutral)
With the vehicle is in the ready
( ) mode depress the brake
pedal and shift out of N (Neutral) to
R (Reverse) or D (Drive).
1. The vehicle is in the ready ( )
mode.
2. Fasten the driver's seat belt.
3. Close the driver's door, tailgate.
4. Depress the accelerator pedal
while the shift lever is in R(Rear)
with trunk closed, D (Drive).
Make sure the brake warning light
goes off.
✽✽
NOTICE
• You can engage the EPB even
though the POWER button is in
the OFF position, but you cannot
release it.
• Depress the brake pedal and
release the parking brake manual-
ly with the EPB switch when you
drive downhill or when backing
up the vehicle.
Do not follow the above procedure
when driving on a flat level ground.
The vehicle may suddenly move for-
ward.
✽✽
NOTICE
If the parking brake warning light
is still on even though the EPB
has been released, have the system
checked by an authorized Kia dealer.
EPB (electric parking brake) may be
automatically applied when:
• Requested by other systems
CAUTION
Do not drive your vehicle with
the EPB applied. It may cause
excessive brake pad and brake
rotor wear.
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
Driving your vehicle
205
System warning
• If you try to drive off depressing the
accelerator pedal with the EPB
applied, but the EPB doesn't
release automatically, a warning
will sound and a message will
appear.
• If the driver's seat belt is not fas-
tened and any door, the tailgate is
opened, a warning will sound and
a message will appear.
• If there is a problem with the vehi-
cle, a warning may sound and a
message may appear.
If the above situation occurs, depress
the brake pedal and release EPB by
pressing the EPB switch.
• A click or electric brake motor
whine sound may be heard while
operating or releasing the EPB, but
these conditions are normal and
indicate that the EPB is functioning
properly.
• When leaving your keys with a
parking lot attendant or valet, make
sure to inform him/her how to oper-
ate the EPB.
• When you automatically release
EPB by depressing the accelerator
pedal, depress it slowly.
OPSE054012L
WARNING - Parking
Brake Use
• Never allow a passenger to
touch the parking brake. If the
parking brake is released
unintentionally, serious injury
may occur.
• All vehicles should always
have the parking brake fully
engaged when parked to
avoid inadvertent movement
of the car which can injure
occupants or pedestrians.
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
521
Driving your vehicle
EPB malfunction indicator
This warning light illuminates if the
POWER button is changed to the ON
position and goes off in approximate-
ly 3 seconds if the system is opera-
tion normally.
If the EPB malfunction indicator
remains on, comes on while driving,
or does not come on when the
POWER button is changed to the ON
position, this indicates that the EPB
may have malfunctioned.
If this occurs, have your vehicle
checked by an authorized Kia dealer
as soon as possible.
The EPB malfunction indicator may
illuminate when the ESC indicator
comes on to indicate that the ESC is
not working properly, but it does not
indicate a malfunction of the EPB.
• The EPB warning light may illumi-
nate if the EPB switch operates
abnormally. Shut the vehicle power
off and turn it on again after a few
minutes. The warning light will go
off and the EPB switch will operate
normally. However, if the EPB
warning light is still on, have the
system checked by an authorized
Kia dealer.
• If the parking brake warning light
does not illuminate or blinks
even though the EPB switch was
pulled up, the EPB is not applied.
• If the brake warning light ( ) is
blinking while the [EPB] warning
light is on, press the electric park-
ing brake (EPB) switch once to
release the parking brake and turn
off the vehicle.
Turn on the vehicle again and pull
the EPB switch to engage the
parking brake. Check if the [EPB]
warning light turns off. If the [EPB]
warning lamp remains on, contact
an authorized Kia dealer and have
the system checked.
OPSE054010
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
Driving your vehicle
225
Emergency braking
If there is a problem with the brake
pedal while driving, emergency brak-
ing is possible by pulling up and
holding the EPB switch. Braking is
possible only while you are holding
the EPB switch.
✽✽
NOTICE
During emergency braking by the
EPB, the parking brake warning
light will illuminate to indicate that
the system is operating.
If you notice a continuous noise or
burning smell when the EPB is used
for emergency braking, have your
vehicle checked by an authorized Kia
dealer.
When the EPB (electric parking
brake) is not released
If the EPB does not release normal-
ly, take your vehicle to an authorized
Kia dealer by loading the vehicle on
a flatbed tow truck and have the sys-
tem checked.
Anti-lock brake system (ABS)
ABS (or ESC) will not prevent acci-
dents due to improper or dangerous
driving maneuvers. Even though
vehicle control is improved during
emergency braking, always maintain
a safe distance between you and
objects ahead. Vehicle speeds
should always be reduced during
extreme road conditions. The vehicle
should be driven at reduced speeds
in the following circumstances:
• When driving on rough, gravel or
snow-covered roads
• When driving with tire chains
installed
• When driving on roads where the
road surface is pitted or has differ-
ent surface heights.
Driving in these conditions increase
the stopping distance for your vehi-
cle.
WARNING
Do not operate the electric park-
ing brake while the vehicle is
moving except in an emergency
situation. Applying the electric
parking brake while the vehicle
is moving at normal speeds can
cause a sudden loss of control
of the vehicle. If you must use
the electric parking brake to
stop the vehicle, use great cau-
tion in applying the brake.
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
523
Driving your vehicle
The ABS continuously senses the
speed of the wheels. If the wheels
are going to lock, the ABS system
repeatedly modulates the hydraulic
brake pressure to the wheels.
When you apply your brakes under
conditions which may lock the
wheels, you may hear a “tik-tik’’
sound from the brakes, or feel a cor-
responding sensation in the brake
pedal. This is normal and it means
your ABS is active.
In order to obtain the maximum ben-
efit from your ABS in an emergency
situation, do not attempt to modulate
your brake pressure and do not try to
pump your brakes. Press your brake
pedal as hard as possible or as hard
as the situation allows the ABS to
control the force being delivered to
the brakes.
✽✽
NOTICE
A click sound may be heard in the
motor compartment when the vehi-
cle begins to move after the vehicle is
started. These conditions are normal
and indicate that the anti-lock brake
system is functioning properly.
• Even with the anti-lock brake sys-
tem, your vehicle still requires suf-
ficient stopping distance. Always
maintain a safe distance from the
vehicle in front of you.
• Always slow down when cornering.
The anti-lock brake system cannot
prevent accidents resulting from
excessive speeds.
• On loose or uneven road surfaces,
operation of the anti-lock brake
system may result in a longer stop-
ping distance than for vehicles
equipped with a conventional
brake system.
The ABS warning light will stay on for
approximately 3 seconds after the
POWER button is ON. During that
time, the ABS will go through self-
diagnosis and the light will go off if
everything is normal. If the light stays
on, you may have a problem with
your ABS. Contact an authorized Kia
dealer as soon as possible.
W-78
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
Driving your vehicle
245
• When you drive on a road having
poor traction, such as an icy road,
and have operated your brakes
continuously, the ABS will be active
continuously and the ABS warning
light may illuminate. Pull your vehi-
cle over to a safe place and turn off
the POWER button.
• Restart the vehicle. If the ABS
warning light goes off, then your
ABS system is normal. Otherwise,
you may have a problem with the
ABS. Contact an authorized Kia
dealer as soon as possible.
✽✽
NOTICE
When you jump start your vehicle
because of a drained battery, the
ABS warning light may turn on.
This happens because of low battery
voltage. It does not mean your ABS
has malfunctioned.
• Do not pump your brakes!
• Have the battery recharged before
driving the vehicle.
Electronic stability control
(ESC)
The Electronic Stability control
(ESC) system is designed to stabi-
lize the vehicle during cornering
maneuvers. ESC checks where you
are steering and where the vehicle is
actually going. ESC applies the
brakes on individual wheels to stabi-
lize the vehicle.
Electronic stability control (ESC) will
not prevent accidents. Excessive
speed in turns, abrupt maneuvers and
hydroplaning on wet surfaces can still
result in serious accidents. Only a
safe and attentive driver can prevent
accidents by avoiding maneuvers that
cause the vehicle to lose traction.
Even with ESC installed, always fol-
low all the normal precautions for driv-
ing - including driving at safe speeds
for the conditions.
The Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
system is an electronic system
designed to help the driver maintain
vehicle control under adverse condi-
tions. It is not a substitute for safe driv-
ing practices. Factors including speed,
road conditions and driver steering
input can all affect whether ESC will be
effective in preventing a loss of control.
It is still your responsibility to drive and
corner at reasonable speeds and to
leave a sufficient margin of safety.
When you apply your brakes under
conditions which may lock the wheels,
you may hear a “tik-tik’’ sound from the
brakes, or feel a corresponding sensa-
tion in the brake pedal. This is normal
and it means your ESC is active.
OPSE054011
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
525
Driving your vehicle
✽✽
NOTICE
A click sound may be heard in the
motor compartment when the vehi-
cle begins to move after the vehicle is
started. These conditions are normal
and indicate that the Electronic
Stability Control System is function-
ing properly.
✽✽
NOTICE
For maximum protection, always
wear your seat belt. No system, no
matter how advanced, can compen-
sate for all driver error and/or driv-
ing conditions. Always drive
responsibly.
ESC operation
ESC ON condition
• When the POWER button
is turned ON, ESC and
ESC OFF indicator lights
illuminate for approximately
3 seconds, then ESC is
turned on.
• Press the ESC OFF but-
ton for at least half a sec-
ond after turning the igni-
tion ON to turn ESC off.
(ESC OFF indicator will
illuminate). To turn the
ESC on, press the ESC
OFF button (ESC OFF
indicator light will go off).
• When starting the vehicle,
you may hear a slight tick-
ing sound. This is the ESC
performing an automatic
system self-check and does
not indicate a problem.
When operating
When the ESC is in opera-
tion, the ESC indicator light
blinks.
• When the Electronic
Stability Control is operat-
ing properly, you can feel a
slight pulsation in the vehi-
cle. This is only the effect
of brake control and indi-
cates nothing unusual.
-
WARNING
Electronic stability control (ESC)
will not prevent accidents.
Excessive speed in turns, abrupt
maneuvers and hydroplaning on
wet surfaces can still result in
serious accidents. Only a safe
and attentive driver can prevent
accidents by avoiding maneu-
vers that cause the vehicle to
lose traction. Even with ESC
installed, always follow all the
normal precautions for driving -
including driving at safe speeds
for the conditions.
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
Driving your vehicle
265
ESC operation off
ESC OFF state
This car has 2 kinds of ESC
off states.
If the POWER button is turn
off when ESC is off, ESC
remains off. Upon restarting
the vehicle, the ESC will
automatically turn on again.
• ESC off state 1
To cancel ESC operation, press the
ESC OFF button (ESC OFF )
shortly (ESC OFF indicator light
(ESC OFF ) illuminates). At this
state, the vehicle control function
does not operate. It means the trac-
tion control function does not oper-
ate. Brake control function only oper-
ates.
• ESC off state 2
To cancel ESC operation, press the
ESC OFF button (ESC OFF ) for
more than 3 seconds. ESC OFF indi-
cator light (ESC OFF ) illuminates
and ESC OFF warning chime will
sound. At this state, the vehicle con-
trol function and brake control func-
tion do not operate. It means the car
stability control function does not
operate any more.
OPSE054014LOPSE054013L
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
527
Driving your vehicle
Indicator light
When POWER button is turned to
ON, the indicator light illuminates,
then goes off if the ESC system is
operating normally.
The ESC indicator light blinks when-
ever ESC is operating or illuminates
when ESC fails to operate.
The ESC OFF indicator light comes
on when the ESC is turned off with
the button.
ESC OFF usage
When driving
• ESC should be turned on for daily
driving whenever possible.
• To turn ESC off while driving, press
the ESC OFF button while driving
on a flat road surface.
CAUTION
Driving with varying tire or
wheel sizes may cause the ESC
system to malfunction. When
replacing tires, make sure they
are the same size as your origi-
nal tires.
WARNING - Operating
ESC
Never press the ESC OFF but-
ton while ESC is operating (ESC
indicator light blinks).
If ESC is turned off while ESC is
operating, the vehicle may slip
out of control.
WARNING - Electronic sta-
bility control
Drive carefully even though
your vehicle has Electronic
Stability Control. It can only
assist you in maintaining con-
trol under certain circum-
stances.
■ ESC indicator light
■ ESC OFF indicator light
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
Driving your vehicle
285
✽✽
NOTICE
• When operating the vehicle on a
dynamometer, ensure that the
ESC is turned off (ESC OFF light
illuminated). If the ESC is left on,
it may prevent the vehicle speed
from increasing, and result in false
diagnosis.
• Turning the ESC off does not
affect ABS or brake system opera-
tion.
Vehicle stability management
(VSM)
This system provides further
enhancements to vehicle stability
and steering responses when a vehi-
cle is driving on a slippery road or a
vehicle detects changes in coeffi-
cient of friction between right wheels
and left wheels when braking.
VSM operation
When the VSM is in operation, ESC
indicator light ( ) blinks.
When the vehicle stability manage-
ment is operating properly, you can
feel a slight pulsation in the vehicle
and/or abnormal steering responses
(EPS). This is only the effect of brake
and EPS control and indicates noth-
ing unusual.
The VSM does not operate when:
• Driving on bank road such as gra-
dient or incline
• Driving in reverse
• ESC OFF indicator light ( )
remains on the instrument cluster
• EPS indicator light remains on the
instrument cluster
VSM operation off
If you press the ESC OFF button to
turn off the ESC, the VSM will also
cancel and the ESC OFF indicator
light ( ) illuminates.
To turn on the VSM, press the button
again. The ESC OFF indicator light
goes out.
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
529
Driving your vehicle
Malfunction indicator
The VSM can be deactivated even if
you don’t cancel the VSM operation
by pressing the ESC OFF button. It
indicates that a malfunction has
been detected somewhere in the
Electric Power Steering system or
VSM system. If the ESC indicator
light ( ) or EPS warning light
remains on, take your vehicle to an
authorized Kia dealer and have the
system checked.
✽✽
NOTICE
• The VSM is designed to function
above approximately 13 mph (22
km/h) on curves.
• The VSM is designed to function
above approximately 6 mph (10
km/h) when a vehicle is braking on
a split-mu road. The split-mu road
is made of surfaces which have dif-
ferent friction forces.
• The Vehicle Stability Management
system is not a substitute for safe
driving practices but a supplemen-
tary function only. It is the respon-
sibility of the driver to always check
the speed and the distance to the
vehicle ahead. Always hold the
steering wheel firmly while driving.
• Your vehicle is designed to activate
according to the driver’s intention,
even with installed VSM. Always
follow all the normal precautions
for driving at safe speeds for the
conditions – including driving in
clement weather and on a slippery
road.
Hill-start assist control (HAC)
A vehicle has the tendency to roll
back on a steep hill when it starts to
go after stopping. The Hill-start
Assist Control (HAC) prevents the
vehicle from rolling back by applying
the brakes automatically for about 2
seconds. The brakes are released
when the accelerator pedal is
depressed or after about 2 seconds.
The HAC is activated only for about 2
seconds, so when the vehicle is
starting off always depress the accel-
erator pedal.
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
Driving your vehicle
305
Good braking practices
• Check to be sure the parking brake
is not engaged and the parking
brake indicator light is out before
driving away.
• Driving through water may get the
brakes wet. They can also get wet
when the vehicle is washed. Wet
brakes can be dangerous! Your
vehicle will not stop as quickly if the
brakes are wet. Wet brakes may
cause the vehicle to pull to one
side.
To dry the brakes, apply the brakes
lightly until the braking action
returns to normal, taking care to
keep the vehicle under control at
all times. If the braking action does
not return to normal, stop as soon
as it is safe to do so and call an
authorized Kia dealer for assis-
tance.
• Don't coast down hills with the
vehicle out of gear.This is extreme-
ly hazardous. Keep the vehicle in
gear at all times, use the brakes to
slow down, then shift to a lower
gear so that regenerative braking
will help you maintain a safe
speed.
• Don't "ride" the brake pedal.
Resting your foot on the brake
pedal while driving can be danger-
ous because the brakes might
overheat and lose their effective-
ness. It also increases the wear of
the brake components.
• If a tire goes flat while you are driv-
ing, apply the brakes gently and
keep the vehicle pointed straight
ahead while you slow down. When
you are moving slowly enough for it
to be safe to do so, pull off the road
and stop in a safe place.
WARNING - Maintaining
Brake Pressure on Incline
HAC does not replace the need
to apply brakes while stopped
on an incline. While stopped,
make sure you maintain brake
pressure sufficient to prevent
your vehicle from rolling back-
ward and causing an accident.
Don’t release the brake pedal
until you are ready to accelerate
forward.
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
531
Driving your vehicle
• If your vehicle is equipped with an
automatic transaxle, don't let your
vehicle creep forward. To avoid
creeping forward, keep your foot
firmly on the brake pedal when the
vehicle is stopped.
• Be cautious when parking on a hill.
Firmly engage the parking brake
and place the shift lever in P (auto-
matic transaxle) or in first or
reverse gear (manual transaxle). If
your vehicle is facing downhill, turn
the front wheels into the curb to
help keep the vehicle from rolling. If
your vehicle is facing uphill, turn
the front wheels away from the
curb to help keep the vehicle from
rolling. If there is no curb or if it is
required by other conditions to
keep the vehicle from rolling, block
the wheels.
• Under some conditions your park-
ing brake can freeze in the
engaged position. This is most like-
ly to happen when there is an
accumulation of snow or ice
around or near the rear brakes or if
the brakes are wet. If there is a risk
that the parking brake may freeze,
apply it only temporarily while you
put the shift lever in P (automatic
transaxle) or in first or reverse gear
(manual transaxle) and block the
rear wheels so the vehicle cannot
roll. Then release the parking
brake.
• Do not hold the vehicle on the
upgrade with the accelerator
pedal.This can cause the transaxle
to overheat. Always use the brake
pedal or parking brake.
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
Driving your vehicle
325
1. Cruise indicator
2. Cruise set indicator
The cruise control system allows you
to program the vehicle to maintain a
constant speed without pressing the
accelerator pedal.
This system is designed to function
above approximately 20 mph (30
km/h).
• If the cruise control is left on
(CRUISE indicator light in the
instrument cluster illuminated), the
cruise control can be switched on
accidentally. Keep the cruise con-
trol system off (CRUISE indicator
light OFF) when the cruise control
is not in use, to avoid inadvertently
setting a speed.
• Use the cruise control system only
when traveling on open highways
in good weather.
• Do not use the cruise control driv-
ing in heavy or varying traffic, or on
slippery (rainy, icy or snow-cov-
ered) or winding roads or over 6%
up-hill or down-hill roads.
✽✽
NOTICE
• During normal cruise control opera-
tion, when the SET switch is activat-
ed or reactivated after applying the
brakes, the cruise control will ener-
gize after approximately 3 seconds.
The delay is normal.
• To activate cruise control, depress
the brake pedal at least once after
turning the POWER button to the
ON position or starting the vehicle.
This is to check if the brake switch
which is important part to cancel
cruise control is in normal condition.
CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
OPS053015
WARNING - Misuse of
Cruise Control
Do not use cruise control if the
traffic situation does not allow
you to drive safely at a constant
speed and with sufficient dis-
tance to the vehicle in front.
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
533
Driving your vehicle
Cruise control switch
CRUISE : Turns cruise control sys-
tem on or off.
CANCEL: Cancels cruise control
operation.
RES+: Resumes or increases cruise
control speed.
SET-: Sets or decreases cruise con-
trol speed.
To set cruise control speed:
1. Press the CRUISE button on the
steering wheel to turn the system
on. The CRUISE indicator light in
the instrument cluster will illumi-
nate.
2. Accelerate to the desired speed,
which must be more than 20 mph
(30 km/h).
3. Push the SET - switch, and
release it at the desired speed.
The SET indicator light in the
instrument cluster will illuminate.
Release the accelerator pedal at
the same time. The desired speed
will automatically be maintained.
On a steep grade, the vehicle may
slow down or speed up slightly while
going uphill or downhill.
OPS053016 OPS053017
OPS053018
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
Driving your vehicle
345
To increase cruise control set
speed:
Follow either of these procedures:
• Push the RES + switch and hold it.
Your vehicle will accelerate.
Release the lever at the speed you
want.
• Push the RES + switch and
release it immediately.
The cruising speed will increase by
1 mph (or 2km/h) each time you
move the lever up (to RES+) in this
manner.
To decrease the cruising
speed:
Follow either of these procedures:
• Push the SET - switch and hold it.
Your vehicle will gradually slow
down. Release the lever at the
speed you want to maintain.
• Push the SET - switch and release
it immediately.
The cruising speed will decrease
by 1 mph (2 km/h) each time you
move the lever down (to SET-) in
this manner.
To temporarily accelerate with
the cruise control on:
If you want to speed up temporarily
when the cruise control is on,
depress the accelerator pedal.
Increased speed will not interfere
with cruise control operation or
change the set speed.
To return to the set speed, take your
foot off the accelerator.
OPS053019 OPS053018
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
535
Driving your vehicle
To cancel cruise control, do
one of the following:
• Press the brake pedal.
• Shift into N (Neutral).
• Push the CANCEL switch located
on the steering wheel.
• Decrease the vehicle speed lower
than the memory speed by approx-
imately 12mph(20km/h).
• Decrease the vehicle speed to less
than approximately 15 mph (25
km/h).
• Pull up the EPB(Electric parking
brake) switch.
Each of these actions will cancel
cruise control operation (the SET
indicator light in the instrument clus-
ter will go off), but it will not turn the
system off. If you wish to resume
cruise control operation, push the
RES + switch located on your steer-
ing wheel.You will return to your pre-
viously preset speed.
To resume cruising speed at
more than approximately 20
mph (30 km/h):
If any method other than the
CRUISE button was used to cancel
cruising speed and the system is still
activated, the most recent set speed
will automatically resume when the
RES+ switch is pushed.
It will not resume, however, if the
vehicle speed has dropped below
approximately 20 mph (30 km/h).
OPS053020
OPS053019
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
Driving your vehicle
365
To turn cruise control off, do
one of the following:
• Press the CRUISE button (the
CRUISE indicator light in the
instrument cluster will go off).
• Turn the vehicle off.
Both of these actions cancel cruise
control operation. If you want to
resume cruise control operation,
repeat the steps provided in “To set
cruise control speed” on the previous
page.
OPS053017
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
537
Driving your vehicle
Your vehicle's energy economy
depends mainly on your style of driv-
ing, where you drive and when you
drive.
Each of these factors affects how
many miles (kilometers) you can get
from a capacity (kwh) of battery. To
operate your vehicle as economical-
ly as possible, use the following driv-
ing suggestions to help save money
in both energy and repairs:
• Drive smoothly. Accelerate at a
moderate rate. Don't make "jack-
rabbit" starts or full-throttle shifts
and maintain a steady cruising
speed. Don't race between stop-
lights. Try to adjust your speed to
the traffic so you don't have to
change speeds unnecessarily.
Avoid heavy traffic whenever pos-
sible. Always maintain a safe dis-
tance from other vehicles so you
can avoid unnecessary braking.
This also reduces brake wear.
• Drive at a moderate speed. The
faster you drive, the more energy
your vehicle uses. Driving at a
moderate speed, especially on the
highway, is one of the most effec-
tive ways to reduce energy con-
sumption.
• Don't "ride" the brake or clutch
pedal. This can increase energy
consumption and also increase
wear on these components. In
addition, driving with your foot rest-
ing on the brake pedal may cause
the brakes to overheat, which
reduces their effectiveness and
may lead to more serious conse-
quences.
• Take care of your tires. Keep them
inflated to the recommended pres-
sure. Incorrect inflation, either too
much or too little, results in unnec-
essary tire wear. Check the tire
pressures at least once a month.
• Be sure that the wheels are
aligned correctly. Improper align-
ment can result from hitting curbs
or driving too fast over irregular
surfaces. Poor alignment causes
faster tire wear and may also result
in other problems as well as
greater energy consumption.
• Keep your vehicle in good condi-
tion. For better energy economy
and reduced maintenance costs,
maintain your vehicle in accor-
dance with the maintenance
schedule in section 7. If you drive
your vehicle in severe conditions,
more frequent maintenance is
required (see section 7 for details).
• Keep your vehicle clean. For maxi-
mum service, your vehicle should
be kept clean and free of corrosive
materials. It is especially important
that mud, dirt, ice, etc. not be
allowed to accumulate on the
underside of the vehicle. This extra
weight can result in increased
energy consumption and also con-
tribute to corrosion.
ECONOMICAL OPERATION
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
Driving your vehicle
385
• Travel lightly. Don't carry unneces-
sary weight in your vehicle. Weight
reduces energy economy.
• Open windows at high speeds can
reduce energy economy.
• Energy economy is less in cross-
winds and headwinds. To help off-
set some of this loss, slow down
when driving in these conditions.
Keeping a vehicle in good operating
condition is important both for econ-
omy and safety. Therefore, have an
authorized Kia dealer perform
scheduled inspections and mainte-
nance.
WARNING
- Vehicle off during motion
Never turn the POWER button
off to coast down hills or any-
time the vehicle is in motion.
The power steering and power
brakes will not function proper-
ly without the vehicle is in the
ready ( ) mode. In addition,
turning off the POWER button
while driving could engage the
steering wheel lock resulting in
loss of vehicle steering. Keep
the vehicle is in the ready ( )
mode and gear lever in
B(Braking) position for engine
braking effect.
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
539
Driving your vehicle
Hazardous driving conditions
When hazardous driving conditions
are encountered such as water,
snow, ice, mud, sand, or similar haz-
ards, follow these suggestions:
• Drive cautiously and allow extra
distance for braking.
• Avoid sudden braking or steering.
• When braking with non-ABS
brakes pump the brake pedal with
a light up-and-down motion until
the vehicle is stopped.
Do not pump the brake pedal on a
vehicle equipped with ABS.
• If stalled in snow, mud, or sand,
use second gear. Accelerate slow-
ly to avoid spinning the drive
wheels.
• Use sand, rock salt, or other non-
slip material under the drive
wheels to provide traction when
stalled in ice, snow, or mud.
Reducing the risk of a rollover
This multi-purpose passenger vehi-
cle is defined as a Crossover Utility
Vehicle (CUV). CUV’s have higher
ground clearance and a narrower
track to make them capable of per-
forming in a wide variety of off-road
applications. Specific design charac-
teristics give them a higher center of
gravity than ordinary vehicles. An
advantage of the higher ground
clearance is a better view of the
road, which allows you to anticipate
problems. They are not designed for
cornering at the same speeds as
conventional passenger vehicles,
any more than low-slung sports vehi-
cles are designed to perform satis-
factorily in off-road conditions. Due to
this risk, driver and passengers are
strongly recommended to buckle
their seat belts. In a rollover crash,
an unbelted person is more likely to
die than a person wearing a seat
belt.There are steps that a driver can
make to reduce the risk of a rollover.
SPECIAL DRIVING CONDITIONS
WARNING - Downshifting
Do not downshift with an auto-
matic transaxle while driving on
slippery surfaces. The sudden
change in tire speed could
cause the tires to skid and
result in an accident.
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
Driving your vehicle
405
If at all possible, avoid sharp turns or
abrupt maneuvers, do not load your
roof rack with heavy cargo, and
never modify your vehicle in any way.
Rocking the vehicle
If it is necessary to rock the vehicle
to free it from snow, sand, or mud,
first turn the steering wheel right and
left to clear the area around your
front wheels. Then, shift back and
forth between R (Reverse) and any
forward gear. Do not race the vehicle,
and spin the wheels as little as pos-
sible. If you are still stuck after a few
tries, have the vehicle pulled out by a
tow vehicle to avoid overheating and
possible damage to the gear.
The ESC system should be turned
OFF prior to rocking the vehicle.
CAUTION - Vehicle rocking
Prolonged rocking may cause
overheating, gear damage or
failure, and tire damage.
WARNING - Replacement
tires
Always use the size and type of
tires recommended in the tire
section of the manual.
Installation of variant tires can
affect the safety and perform-
ance of your vehicle.
WARNING
- Sudden vehicle movement
Do not attempt to rock the vehi-
cle if people or objects are near-
by. The vehicle may suddenly
move forward or backwards as
it becomes unstuck.
CAUTION - Spinning tires
Do not spin the wheels, espe-
cially at speeds more than 35
mph (56 km/h). Spinning the
wheels at high speeds when the
vehicle is stationary could
cause a tire to overheat which
could result in tire damage that
may injure bystanders.
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
541
Driving your vehicle
Smooth cornering
Avoid braking or gear changing in
corners, especially when roads are
wet. Ideally, corners should always
be taken under gentle acceleration. If
you follow these suggestions, tire
wear will be held to a minimum.
Driving at night
Because night driving presents more
hazards than driving in the daylight,
here are some important tips to
remember:
• Slow down and keep more dis-
tance between you and other vehi-
cles, as it may be more difficult to
see at night, especially in areas
where there may not be any street
lights.
• Adjust your mirrors to reduce the
glare from other driver's head-
lights.
• Keep your headlights clean and
properly aimed. (On vehicles not
equipped with the automatic head-
light aiming feature.) Dirty or
improperly aimed headlights will
make it much more difficult to see
at night.
• Avoid staring directly at the head-
lights of oncoming vehicles. You
could be temporarily blinded, and it
will take several seconds for your
eyes to readjust to the darkness.
OUN056051 OCM053010
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
Driving your vehicle
425
Driving in the rain
Rain and wet roads can make driving
dangerous, especially if you’re not
prepared for the slick pavement.
Here are a few things to consider
when driving in the rain:
• A heavy rainfall will make it harder
to see and will increase the dis-
tance needed to stop your vehicle,
so slow down.
• Keep your windshield wiping
equipment in good shape. Replace
your windshield wiper blades when
they show signs of streaking or
missing areas on the windshield.
• If your tires are not in good condi-
tion, making a quick stop on wet
pavement can cause a skid and
possibly lead to an accident. Be
sure your tires are in good shape.
• Turn on your headlights to make it
easier for others to see you.
• Driving too fast through large pud-
dles can affect your brakes. If you
must go through puddles, try to
drive through them slowly.
• If you believe you may have gotten
your brakes wet, apply them lightly
while driving until normal braking
operation returns.
Driving in flooded areas
Avoid driving through flooded areas
unless you are sure the water is no
higher than the bottom of the wheel
hub. Drive through any water slowly.
Allow adequate stopping distance
because brake performance may be
affected.
After driving through water, dry the
brakes by gently applying them sev-
eral times while the vehicle is moving
slowly.
1VQA3003
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
543
Driving your vehicle
Driving off-road
Drive carefully off-road because your
vehicle may be damaged by rocks or
roots of trees. Become familiar with
the off-road conditions where you
are going to drive before you begin
driving.
Highway driving
Tires
Adjust the tire inflation pressures to
specification. Low tire inflation pres-
sures will result in overheating and
possible failure of the tires.
Avoid using worn or damaged tires
which may result in reduced traction
or tire failure.
Never exceed the maximum tire
inflation pressure shown on the tires.
WARNING - Under/over
inflated tires
Always check the tires for prop-
er inflation before driving.
Underinflated or overinflated
tires can cause poor handling,
loss of vehicle control, and sud-
den tire failure leading to acci-
dents, injuries, and even death.
For proper tire pressures, refer
to “Tires and wheels” in section
8.
WARNING - Tire tread
Always check the tire tread
before driving your vehicle.
Worn-out tires can result in loss
of vehicle control. Worn-out
tires should be replaced as
soon as possible. For further
information and tread limits,
refer to "Tires and wheels" in
section 7.
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
Driving your vehicle
445
Severe weather conditions in the
winter result in greater wear and
other problems. To minimize the
problems of winter driving, you
should follow these suggestions:
Snowy or icy conditions
To drive your vehicle in deep snow, it
may be necessary to use snow tires
or to install tire chains on your tires.
If snow tires are needed, it is neces-
sary to select tires equivalent in size
and type of the original equipment
tires. Failure to do so may adversely
affect the safety and handling of your
vehicle. Furthermore, speeding,
rapid acceleration, sudden brake
applications, and sharp turns are
potentially very hazardous practices.
During deceleration, use regenera-
tive braking to the fullest extent.
Sudden brake applications on snowy
or icy roads may cause skids to
occur. You need to keep sufficient
distance between the vehicle in
operation in front of your vehicle.
Also, apply the brake gently. It should
be noted that installing tire chains on
the tire will provide a greater driving
force, but will not prevent side skids.
✽✽
NOTICE
Tire chains are not legal in all states.
Check state laws before fitting tire
chains.
Snow tires
If you mount snow tires on your vehi-
cle, make sure they are radial tires of
the same size and load range as the
original tires. Mount snow tires on all
four wheels to balance your vehicle’s
handling in all weather conditions.
Keep in mind that the traction provid-
ed by snow tires on dry roads may
not be as high as your vehicle's orig-
inal equipment tires.You should drive
cautiously even when the roads are
clear. Check with the tire dealer for
maximum speed recommendations.
Do not install studded tires without
first checking local, state and munic-
ipal regulations for possible restric-
tions against their use.
WINTER DRIVING
1VQA3005
WARNING - Snow tire
size
Snow tires should be equivalent
in size and type to the vehicle's
standard tires. Otherwise, the
safety and handling of your vehi-
cle may be adversely affected.
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
545
Driving your vehicle
Tire chains
Since the sidewalls of radial tires are
thinner, they can be damaged by
mounting some types of snow chains
on them. Therefore, the use of snow
tires is recommended instead of
snow chains. Do not mount tire
chains on vehicles equipped with
aluminum wheels; snow chains may
cause damage to the wheels. If snow
chains must be used, use wire-type
chains with a thickness of less than
0.59 in (15 mm). Damage to your
vehicle caused by improper snow
chain use is not covered by your
vehicle manufacturers warranty.
When using tire chains, install them
on the front tires only.
Chain installation
When installing chains, follow the
manufacturer's instructions and
mount them as tightly as you can.
Drive slowly with chains installed. If
you hear the chains contacting the
body or chassis, stop and tighten
them. If they still make contact, slow
down until it stops. Remove the
chains as soon as you begin driving
on cleared roads.
When mounting snow chains, park
the vehicle on level ground away from
traffic. Turn on the vehicle Hazard
Warning flashers and place a triangu-
lar emergency warning device behind
the vehicle if available. Always place
the vehicle in P (Park), apply the
parking brake and turn off the vehicle
before installing snow chains.
• The use of chains may adversely
affect vehicle handling.
• Do not exceed 20 mph (30 km/h)
or the chain manufacturer’s recom-
mended speed limit, whichever is
lower.
• Drive carefully and avoid bumps,
holes, sharp turns, and other road
hazards, which may cause the
vehicle to bounce.
• Avoid sharp turns or locked-wheel
braking.
1VQA3007
CAUTION - Snow chains
Make sure the snow chains are
the correct size and type for
your tires. Incorrect snow
chains can cause damage to the
vehicle body and suspension
and may not be covered by your
vehicle manufacturer warranty.
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
Driving your vehicle
465
Use high quality ethylene gly-
col coolant
Your vehicle is delivered with high qual-
ity ethylene glycol coolant in the cool-
ing system. It is the only type of coolant
that should be used because it helps
prevent corrosion in the cooling sys-
tem, lubricates the water pump and
prevents freezing. Be sure to replace
or replenish your coolant in accor-
dance with the maintenance schedule
in section 7. Before winter, have your
coolant tested to assure that its freez-
ing point is sufficient for the tempera-
tures anticipated during the winter.
Check battery and cables
Winter puts additional burdens on
the battery system. Visually inspect
the battery and cables as described
in section 7. The level of charge in
your battery can be checked by an
authorized Kia dealer or a service
station.
To keep locks from freezing
To keep the locks from freezing,
squirt an approved de-icer fluid or
glycerine into the key opening. If a
lock is covered with ice, squirt it with
an approved de-icing fluid to remove
the ice. If the lock is frozen internally,
you may be able to thaw it out by
using a heated key. Handle the heat-
ed key with care to avoid injury.
Use approved window washer
anti-freeze in system
To keep the water in the window
washer system from freezing, add an
approved window washer anti-freeze
solution in accordance with instruc-
tions on the container. Window wash-
er anti-freeze is available from an
authorized Kia dealer and most auto
parts outlets. Do not use coolant or
other types of anti-freeze as these
may damage the paint finish.
Don’t let your parking brake
freeze
Under some conditions your parking
brake can freeze in the engaged
position.This is most likely to happen
when there is an accumulation of
snow or ice around or near the rear
brakes or if the brakes are wet. If
there is a risk the parking brake may
freeze, apply it only temporarily while
you put the gear shift lever in P
(Park, automatic transaxle) or in first
or reverse gear (manual transaxle)
and block the rear wheels so the
vehicle cannot roll. Then release the
parking brake.
CAUTION - Snow chains
• Chains that are the wrong size
or improperly installed can
damage your vehicle's brake
lines, suspension, body and
wheels.
• Stop driving and retighten the
chains any time you hear them
hitting the vehicle.
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
547
Driving your vehicle
Don't let ice and snow accu-
mulate underneath
Under some conditions, snow and
ice can build up under the fenders
and interfere with the steering. When
driving in severe winter conditions
where this may happen, you should
periodically check underneath the
vehicle to be sure the movement of
the front wheels and the steering
components are not obstructed.
Carry emergency equipment
Depending on the severity of the
weather, you should carry appropri-
ate emergency equipment. Some of
the items you may want to carry
include tow straps or chains, flash-
light, emergency flares, sand, shov-
el, jumper cables, window scraper,
gloves, ground cloth, coveralls, blan-
ket, etc.
We do not recommend using this
vehicle for trailer towing.
TRAILER TOWING
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
Driving your vehicle
485
Tire and loading information
label
The label located on the driver's door
sill gives the original tire size, cold
tire pressures recommended for your
vehicle, the number of people that
can be in your vehicle and vehicle
capacity weight.
Vehicle capacity weight:
827 lbs. (375 kg)
Vehicle capacity weight is the maxi-
mum combined weight of occupants
and cargo. If your vehicle is equipped
with a trailer, the combined weight
includes the tongue load.
Seating capacity:
Total - 5 persons
(Front seat : 2 persons,
Rear seat : 3 persons)
Seating capacity is the maximum
number of occupants including a
driver, your vehicle may carry.
However, the seating capacity may
be reduced based upon the weight of
all of the occupants, and the weight
of the cargo being carried or towed.
Do not overload the vehicle as there
is a limit to the total weight, or load
limit including occupants and cargo,
the vehicle can carry.
Towing capacity:
We do not recommend using this
vehicle for trailer towing.
VEHICLE LOAD LIMIT
OPS053105N
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
549
Driving your vehicle
Cargo capacity:
The cargo capacity of your vehicle
will increase or decrease depending
on the weight and the number of
occupants and the tongue load, if
your vehicle is equipped with a trail-
er.
Steps for determining correct
load limit
1. Locate the statement "The com-
bined weight of occupants and
cargo should never exceed XXX
kg or XXX lbs.'' on your vehicle's
placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of
the driver and passengers that will
be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of
the driver and passengers from
XXX kg or XXX lbs.
4. The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and lug-
gage load capacity. For example, if
the "XXX" amount equals 1400
lbs. and there will be five 150 lbs.
passengers in your vehicle, the
amount of available cargo and lug-
gage load capacity is 650 lbs.
(1400-750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs.)
5. Determine the combined weight of
luggage and cargo being loaded
on the vehicle. That weight may
not safely exceed the available
cargo and luggage load capacity
calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trail-
er, load from your trailer will be
transferred to your vehicle.
Consult this manual to determine
how this reduces the available
cargo and luggage load capacity
of your vehicle.
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
Driving your vehicle
505
Refer to your vehicle’s tire and loading information label for specific information about your vehicle's capacity weight
and seating positions. The combined weight of the driver, passengers and cargo should never exceed your vehicle's
capacity weight.
C190F01JM
Item Description Total
A
Vehicle Capacity 1400 lbs
Weight (635 kg)
Subtract Occupant
B Weight
300 lbs
150 lbs (68 kg) × 2
(136 kg)
C
Available Cargo and
1100 lbs
Luggage weight (499 kg)
Example 1
ABC
C190F02JM
Item Description Total
A
Vehicle Capacity 1400 lbs
Weight (635 kg)
Subtract Occupant
B Weight
750 lbs
150 lbs (68 kg) × 5
(340 kg)
C
Available Cargo and
650 lbs
Luggage weight (295 kg)
ABC
Example 2
C190F03JM
Item Description Total
A
Vehicle Capacity 1400 lbs
Weight (635 kg)
Subtract Occupant
B Weight
860 lbs
172 lbs (78 kg) × 5
(390 kg)
C
Available Cargo and
540 lbs
Luggage weight (245 kg)
ABC
Example 3
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
551
Driving your vehicle
Certification label
The certification label is located on
the driver's door sill at the center pil-
lar.
This label shows the maximum
allowable weight of the fully loaded
vehicle. This is called the GVWR
(Gross Vehicle Weight Rating). The
GVWR includes the weight of the
vehicle, all occupants, fuel and
cargo.
This label also tells you the maxi-
mum weight that can be supported
by the front and rear axles, called
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).
To find out the actual loads on your
front and rear axles, you need to go
to a weigh station and weigh your
vehicle.Your dealer can help you with
this. Be sure to spread out your load
equally on both sides of the center-
line.
The label will help you decide how
much cargo and installed equipment
your vehicle can carry.
If you carry items inside your vehicle
- like suitcases, tools, packages, or
anything else - they are moving as
fast as the vehicle. If you have to stop
or turn quickly, or if there is a crash,
the items will keep going and can
cause an injury if they strike the driv-
er or a passenger.
OEN056020
WARNING - Over loading
Never exceed the GVWR for
your vehicle, the GAWR for
either the front or rear axle and
vehicle capacity weight.
Exceeding these ratings can
affect your vehicle’s handling
and braking ability.
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
Driving your vehicle
525
✽✽
NOTICE
Overloading your vehicle may cause
damage. Repairs would not be cov-
ered by your warranty. Do not over-
load your vehicle.
WARNING - Loose cargo
Do not travel with unsecured
blunt objects in the passenger
compartment of your vehicle
(e.g. suit cases or unsecured
child seats). These items may
strike occupant during a sud-
den stop or crash.
WARNING - Over loading
Do not overload your vehicle.
Overloading your vehicle can
cause heat buildup in your vehi-
cle's tires and possible tire fail-
ure, increased stopping dis-
tances and poor vehicle han-
dling all of which may result in a
crash.
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
553
Driving your vehicle
This section will guide you in the
proper loading of your vehicle and/or
trailer, to keep your loaded vehicle
weight within its design rating capa-
bility, with or without a trailer.
Properly loading your vehicle will
provide maximum return of the vehi-
cle design performance. Before load-
ing your vehicle, familiarize yourself
with the following terms for determin-
ing your vehicle's weight ratings, with
or without a trailer, from the vehicle's
specifications and the certification
label:
Base curb weight
This is the weight of the vehicle
including all standard equipment. It
does not include passengers, cargo,
or optional equipment.
Vehicle curb weight
This is the weight of your new vehicle
when you picked it up from your deal-
er plus any aftermarket equipment.
Cargo weight
This figure includes all weight added
to the Base Curb Weight, including
cargo and optional equipment.
GAW (Gross axle weight)
This is the total weight placed on
each axle (front and rear) - including
vehicle curb weight and all payload.
GAWR
(Gross axle weight rating)
This is the maximum allowable
weight that can be carried by a single
axle (front or rear). These numbers
are shown on the certification label.
The total load on each axle must
never exceed its GAWR.
GVW (Gross vehicle weight)
This is the Base Curb Weight plus
actual Cargo Weight plus passen-
gers.
GVWR
(Gross vehicle weight rating)
This is the maximum allowable
weight of the fully loaded vehicle
(including all options, equipment,
passengers and cargo). The GVWR
is shown on the certification label
located on the driver’s door sill.
VEHICLE WEIGHT GLOSSARY
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
What to do in an emergency
Road warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
• Hazard warning flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
In case of an emergency while driving. . . . . . . . . . 6-3
• If the vehicle stalls at a crossroad or crossing . . . . . . 6-3
• If you have a flat tire while driving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
• If vehicle stalls while driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
If the vehicle will not start. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
• If vehicle doesn’t turn over or turns over slowly. . . . 6-4
Emergency starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
• Jump starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
• Push-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
If the vehicle overheats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) . . . . . . 6-9
• Low tire pressure indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
• TPMS malfunction indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
• Changing a tire with TPMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
If you have a flat tire (with Tire Mobility Kit) . . 6-14
• Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
• Components of the Tire Mobility Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
• Using the Tire Mobility Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17
• Distributing the sealant. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
• Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20
• Towing service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20
• Removable towing hook (front) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21
• Emergency towing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22
6
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
What to do in an emergency
26
ROAD WARNING
Hazard warning flasher
The hazard warning flasher serves
as a warning to other drivers to exer-
cise extreme caution when
approaching, overtaking, or passing
your vehicle.
It should be used whenever emer-
gency repairs are being made or
when the vehicle is stopped near the
edge of a roadway.
Depress the flasher switch with the
ignition switch in any position. The
flasher switch is located in the center
console switch panel. All turn signal
lights will flash simultaneously.
• The hazard warning flasher oper-
ates whether your vehicle is run-
ning or not.
• The turn signals do not work when
the hazard flasher is on.
• Care must be taken when using
the hazard warning flasher while
the vehicle is being towed.
OPSE064018L
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
63
What to do in an emergency
If the vehicle stalls at a cross-
road or crossing
If the vehicle stalls at a crossroad or
crossing, set the shift lever in the N
(Neutral) position and then push the
vehicle to a safe place.
If you have a flat tire while
driving
If a tire goes flat while you are driv-
ing:
1. Take your foot off the accelerator
pedal and let the vehicle slow
down while driving straight ahead.
Do not apply the brakes immedi-
ately or attempt to pull off the road
as this may cause a loss of con-
trol. When the vehicle has slowed
to such a speed that it is safe to do
so, brake carefully and pull off the
road. Drive off the road as far as
possible and park on a firm level
ground. If you are on a divided
highway, do not park in the medi-
an area between the two traffic
lanes.
2. When the vehicle is stopped, turn
on your emergency hazard flash-
ers, set the parking brake and put
the transaxle in P.
3. Have all passengers get out of the
vehicle. Be sure they all get out on
the side of the vehicle that is away
from traffic.
4. When changing a flat tire, follow
the instruction provided later in
this section.
If the vehicle stalls while driv-
ing
1. Reduce your speed gradually,
keeping a straight line. Move cau-
tiously off the road to a safe place.
2. Turn on your emergency flashers.
3. Try to start the vehicle again. If
your vehicle will not start, contact
an authorized Kia dealer or seek
other qualified assistance.
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY WHILE DRIVING
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
What to do in an emergency
46
IF THE VEHICLE WILL NOT START
If vehicle doesn't turn over or
turns over slowly
1. Be sure the shift lever is in N
(Neutral) or P (Park) and the
emergency brake is set.
2. Check the battery connections to
be sure they are clean and tight.
3. Turn on the interior light. If the light
dims or goes out when you oper-
ate the starter, the battery is dis-
charged.
4. Check the starter connections to
be sure they are securely tight-
ened.
5. Do not push or pull the vehicle to
start it. See instructions for "Jump
starting".
WARNING - Push/pull
start
Do not push or pull the vehicle
to start it. Push or pull starting
may cause the catalytic con-
verter to overload and create a
fire hazard.
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
65
What to do in an emergency
EMERGENCY STARTING
Connect cables in numerical order
and disconnect in reverse order.
Jump starting
Jump starting can be dangerous if
done incorrectly. Therefore, to avoid
harm to yourself or damage to your
vehicle or battery, follow these jump
starting procedures. If in doubt, we
strongly recommend that you have a
competent technician or towing serv-
ice jump start your vehicle.
CAUTION - 12 volt battery
Use only a 12-volt jumper sys-
tem. You can damage a 12-volt
starting motor, ignition system,
and other electrical parts
beyond repair by use of a 24-
volt power supply (either two
12-volt batteries in series or a
24-volt motor generator set).
WARNING - Battery
Never attempt to check the elec-
trolyte level of the battery as
this may cause the battery to
rupture or explode causing seri-
ous injury.
1VQA4001
Discharged
battery
Jumper Cables
Booster
battery
(-)
(+)
(+)
(-)
WARNING - Frozen
batteries
Do not attempt to jump start the
vehicle if the discharged battery
is frozen or if the electrolyte
level is low as the battery may
rupture or explode.
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
What to do in an emergency
66
Jump starting procedure
1. Make sure the booster battery is
12-volt and that its negative termi-
nal is grounded.
2. If the booster battery is in another
vehicle, do not allow the vehicles
to come in contact.
3. Turn off all unnecessary electrical
loads.
4. Connect the jumper cables in the
exact sequence shown in the illus-
tration. First connect one end of a
jumper cable to the positive termi-
nal of the discharged battery (1),
then connect the other end to the
positive terminal of the booster
battery (2).
Proceed to connect one end of the
other jumper cable to the negative
terminal of the booster battery (3),
then the other end to a solid, sta-
tionary, metallic point away from
the battery (4). Do not connect it to
or near any part that moves when
the vehicle is started.
Do not allow the jumper cables to
contact anything except the cor-
rect battery terminals or the cor-
rect ground. Do not lean over the
battery when making connections.
WARNING - Battery
Keep all flames or sparks away
from the battery. The battery
produces hydrogen gas which
will explode if exposed to flame
or sparks.
WARNING - Sulfuric acid
risk
When jump starting your vehi-
cle be careful not to get acid on
yourself, your clothing or on the
vehicle. Automobile batteries
contain sulfuric acid. This is
poisonous and highly corro-
sive.
WARNING
- Battery
cables
Do not connect the jumper
cable from the negative terminal
of the booster battery to the
negative terminal of the dis-
charged battery. This can cause
the discharged battery to over-
heat and crack, releasing bat-
tery acid.
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
67
What to do in an emergency
5. Start the vehicle with the booster
battery and the auxiliary battery
begins to charge when EV ready
light glows, then start the vehicle
with the discharged battery. If the
first starting attempt is not suc-
cessful, wait a few minutes before
making another attempt in order to
allow the discharged battery to
recharge.
If the cause of your battery discharg-
ing is not apparent, you should have
your vehicle checked by an author-
ized Kia dealer.
Push-starting
Your reduction gear equipped vehicle
should not be push-started.
WARNING - Tow starting
vehicle
Never tow a vehicle to start it
because the sudden surge for-
ward when the engine starts
could cause a collision with the
towing vehicle.
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
What to do in an emergency
86
IF THE VEHICLE OVERHEATS
1. Pull off the road and stop as soon
as it is safe to do so.
2. Place the shift lever in P and set
the parking brake. If the air condi-
tioning is on, turn it off.
3. If coolant is running out under the
vehicle or steam is coming out
from underneath the hood, stop
the vehicle. Do not open the hood
until the coolant has stopped run-
ning or the steaming has stopped.
If there is no visible loss of coolant
and no steam, leave the vehicle
running and check to be sure cool-
ing fan is operating. If the fan is not
running, turn the vehicle off.
4. Check for coolant leaking from the
radiator, hoses or under the vehi-
cle. (If the air conditioning had
been in use, it is normal for cold
water to be draining from it when
you stop).
5. If you cannot find the cause of the
overheating, wait until the radiator
temperature has returned to nor-
mal.Then, if coolant has been lost,
carefully add coolant to the reser-
voir to bring the fluid level in the
reservoir up to the halfway mark.
6. Proceed with caution, keeping
alert for further signs of overheat-
ing. If overheating happens again,
call an authorized Kia dealer for
assistance.
Serious loss of coolant indicates
there is a leak in the cooling system
and this should be checked as soon
as possible by an authorized Kia
dealer.
WARNING - Radiator cap
Do not remove the radiator cap
when the radiator is hot. This
may result in coolant being
blown out of the opening and
cause serious burns.
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
69
What to do in an emergency
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS)
(1) Low tire pressure telltale /
TPMS malfunction indicator
Each tire, including the spare (if pro-
vided), should be checked monthly
when cold and inflated to the inflation
pressure recommended by the vehi-
cle manufacturer on the vehicle plac-
ard or tire inflation pressure label. (If
your vehicle has tires of a different
size than the size indicated on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pres-
sure label, you should determine the
proper tire inflation pressure for
those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your
vehicle has been equipped with a tire
pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
that illuminates a low tire pressure
telltale when one or more of your
tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pres-
sure telltale illuminates, you should
stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the
proper pressure. Driving on a signifi-
cantly under-inflated tire causes the
tire to overheat and can lead to tire
failure. Under-inflation also reduces
fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and
may affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a
substitute for proper tire mainte-
nance, and it is the driver’s responsi-
bility to maintain correct tire pres-
sure, even if under-inflation has not
reached the level to trigger illumina-
tion of the TPMS low tire pressure
telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped
with a TPMS malfunction indicator to
indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS mal-
function indicator is combined with
the low tire pressure telltale. When
the system detects a malfunction,
the telltale will flash for approximate-
ly one minute and then remain con-
tinuously illuminated. This sequence
will continue upon subsequent vehi-
cle start-ups as long as the malfunc-
tion exists. When the malfunction
indicator is illuminated, the system
may not be able to detect or signal
low tire pressure as intended. TPMS
malfunctions may occur for a variety
of reasons, including the installation
of replacement or alternate tires or
wheels on the vehicle that prevent
the TPMS from functioning properly.
OPS063002/Q
OPSE044275L/Q
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
What to do in an emergency
106
Always check the TPMS malfunction
telltale after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle to
ensure that the replacement or alter-
nate tires and wheels allow the TPMS
to continue to function properly.
✽✽
NOTICE
If the TPMS, Low Tire Pressure
indicator do not illuminate for 3 sec-
onds when the ignition switch is
turned to the ON position or vehicle
is running, or if they remain illumi-
nated after coming on for approxi-
mately 3 seconds, take your vehicle
to your nearest authorized Kia deal-
er and have the system checked.
Low tire pressure tell-
tale
When the tire pressure monitoring
system warning indicators are illumi-
nated, one or more of your tires is
significantly under-inflated.
If the telltale illuminates, immediately
reduce your speed, avoid hard cor-
nering and anticipate increased stop-
ping distances. You should stop and
check your tires as soon as possible.
Inflate the tires to the proper pres-
sure as indicated on the vehicle’s
placard or tire inflation pressure label
located on the driver’s side center pil-
lar outer panel. If you cannot reach a
service station or if the tire cannot
hold the newly added air, replace the
low pressure tire with the spare tire.
Then the Low Tire Pressure telltale
may flash for approximately one
minute and then remain continuously
illuminated after restarting and about
10 minutes of continuous driving at
speed above 15.5 mph (25 km/h)
before you have the low pressure tire
repaired and replaced on the vehicle.
In winter or cold weather, the low tire
pressure telltale may be illuminated if
the tire pressure was adjusted to the
recommended tire inflation pressure
in warm weather. It does not mean
your TPMS is malfunctioning
because the decreased temperature
leads to a proportional lowering of
tire pressure.
When you drive your vehicle from a
warm area to a cold area or from a
cold area to a warm area, or the out-
side temperature is greatly higher or
lower, you should check the tire infla-
tion pressure and adjust the tires to
the recommended tire inflation pres-
sure.
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
611
What to do in an emergency
TPMS (Tire Pressure
Monitoring System)
malfunction indicator
The TPMS malfunction indicator will
illuminate after it blinks for approxi-
mately one minute when there is a
problem with the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System. Have the system
checked by an authorized Kia dealer
as soon as possible to determine the
cause of the problem.
• The TPMS malfunction indicator
may blink for approximately 1
minute and then remain continuous-
ly illuminated if the vehicle is moving
around electric power supply cables
or radios transmitters such as at
police stations, government and
public offices, broadcasting sta-
tions, military installations, airports,
or transmitting towers, etc. This can
interfere with normal operation of
the Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS).
• The TPMS malfunction indicator
may blink for approximately 1
minute and then remain continuous-
ly illuminated if snow chains are
used or some separate electronic
devices such as notebook comput-
er, mobile charger, remote starter or
navigation etc., are used in the vehi-
cle. This can interfere with normal
operation of the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS).
WARNING - Low pressure
damage
Do not drive on low pressure
tires. Significantly low tire pres-
sure can cause the tires to over-
heat and fail making the vehicle
unstable resulting in increased
braking distances and a loss of
vehicle control.
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
What to do in an emergency
126
Changing a tire with TPMS
If you have a flat tire, the Low Tire
Pressure telltale will come on. Have
the flat tire repaired by an authorized
Kia dealer as soon as possible or
replace the flat tire with the spare
tire.
Each wheel is equipped with a tire
pressure sensor mounted inside the
tire behind the valve stem. You must
use TPMS specific wheels. It is rec-
ommended that you always have
your tires serviced by an authorized
Kia dealer.
Even if you replace the low pressure
tire with the spare tire, the Low Tire
Pressure telltale will remain on until
the low pressure tire is repaired and
placed on the vehicle.
After you replace the low pressure
tire with the spare tire, the TPMS
malfunction indicator may illuminate
after a few minutes because the
TPMS sensor mounted on the spare
wheel is not initiated.
Once the low pressure tire is reinflat-
ed to the recommended pressure
and installed on the vehicle or the
TPMS sensor mounted on the
replaced spare wheel is initiated by
an authorized Kia dealer, the TPMS
malfunction indicator and the low tire
pressure telltale will extinguish within
a few minutes of driving.
If the indicator is not extinguished
after a few minutes of driving, please
visit an authorized Kia dealer.
If an original mounted tire is replaced
with the spare tire, the TPMS sensor
on the replaced spare wheel should
be initiated and the TPMS sensor on
the original mounted wheel should
be deactivated. If the TPMS sensor
on the original mounted wheel locat-
ed in the spare tire carrier still acti-
vates, the tire pressure monitoring
system may not operate properly.
Have the tire with TPMS serviced or
replaced by an authorized Kia deal-
er.
CAUTION - Repair
Agents
Never use a puncture-repairing
agent not approved by Kia to
repair and/or inflate a low pres-
sure tire. The tire sealant not
approved by Kia may damage
the tire pressure sensor.
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
613
What to do in an emergency
You may not be able to identify a low
tire by simply looking at it. Always
use a good quality tire pressure
gauge to measure the tire's inflation
pressure. Please note that a tire that
is hot (from being driven) will have a
higher pressure measurement than a
tire that is cold (from sitting station-
ary for at least 3 hours and driven
less than 1 mile (1.6 km) during that
3 hour period).
Allow the tire to cool before measur-
ing the inflation pressure. Always be
sure the tire is cold before inflating to
the recommended pressure.
Do not use any tire sealant if your
vehicle is equipped with a Tire
Pressure Monitoring System. The liq-
uid sealant can damage the tire
pressure sensors.
• The TPMS cannot alert you to
severe and sudden tire damage
caused by external factors such as
nails or road debris.
• If you feel any vehicle instability,
immediately take your foot off the
accelerator, apply the brakes grad-
ually and with light force, and slow-
ly move to a safe position off the
road.
✽✽
NOTICE - Protecting TPMS
Tampering with, modifying, or dis-
abling the Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS) components may
interfere with the system's ability to
warn the driver of low tire pressure
conditions and/or TPMS malfunc-
tions. Tampering with, modifying,
or disabling the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) compo-
nents may void the warranty for
that portion of the vehicle.
This device complies with Part
15 of the FCC rules.
Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1.This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2.This device must accept any inter-
ference received, including inter-
ference that may cause undesired
operation.
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
What to do in an emergency
146
IF YOU HAVE A FLAT TIRE (TIRE MOBILITY KIT)
For safe operation, carefully read
and follow the instructions in this
manual before use.
(1) Compressor
(2) Sealant bottle
The Tire Mobility Kit is a temporary
fix to the tire and the tire should be
inspected by an authorized Kia deal-
er as soon as possible.
When two or more tires are flat, do
not use the tire mobility kit because
the supported one sealant of Tire
Mobility Kit is only used for one flat
tire.
Introduction
With the Tire Mobility Kit you stay
mobile even after experiencing a tire
puncture.
The system of compressor and sealing
compound effectively and comfortably
seals most punctures in a passenger
car tire caused by nails or similar
objects and reinflates the tire.
After you ensured that the tire is prop-
erly sealed you can drive cautiously on
the tire (distance up to 200 km (120
miles)) at a max. speed of (80 km/h) in
order to reach a service station or tire
dealer for the tire replacement.
OPSE064002
OPSE064001
WARNING - Tire wall
Do not use the Tire Mobility Kit
to repair punctures in the tire
walls. This can result in an acci-
dent due to tire failure.
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
615
What to do in an emergency
It is possible that some tires, espe-
cially with larger punctures or dam-
age to the sidewall, cannot be sealed
completely.
Air pressure loss in the tire may
adversely affect tire performance.
For this reason, you should avoid
abrupt steering or other driving
maneuvers, especially if the vehicle
is heavily loaded or if a trailer is in
use.
The Tire Mobility Kit is not designed
or intended as a permanent tire
repair method and is to be used for
one tire only.
This instruction shows you step by
step how to temporarily seal the
puncture simply and reliably.
Read the section "Notes on the safe
use of the Tire Mobility Kit".
Notes on the suggested use of
the Tire Mobility Kit
• Park your car at the side of the road
so that you can work with the Tire
Mobility Kit away from moving traf-
fic.
• To be sure your vehicle will not
move, even when you're on fairly
level ground, always set your park-
ing brake.
• Only use the Tire Mobility Kit for
sealing/inflation passenger car tires.
Only punctured areas located with-
in the tread region of the tire can be
sealed using the tire mobility kit.
• Do not use on motorcycles, bicycles
or any other type of tires.
• When the tire and wheel are dam-
aged, do not use Tire Mobility Kit for
your safety.
• Use of the Tire Mobility Kit may not
be effective for tire damage larger
than approximately 0.24 in (6 mm).
Please contact the nearest Kia
dealership if the tire cannot be
made roadworthy with the Tire
Mobility Kit.
• Do not use the Tire Mobility Kit if a
tire is severely damaged by driving
run flat or with insufficient air pres-
sure.
• Do not remove any foreign objects
such as nails or screws that have
penetrated the tire.
• Provided the car is outdoors, leave
the vehicle running. Otherwise
operating the compressor may
eventually drain the car battery.
• Never leave the Tire Mobility Kit
unattended while it is being used.
• Do not leave the compressor run-
ning for more than 10 min. at a time
or it may overheat.
• Do not use the Tire Mobility Kit if
the ambient temperature is below -
22°F (-30°C).
• Before using the TMK, read the
precautionary advice printed on
the sealant bottle!
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
What to do in an emergency
166
0. Speed restriction label
1. Sealant bottle and label with
speed restriction
2. Filling hose from sealant bottle to
wheel
3. Connectors and cable for the
power outlet direct connection
4. Holder for the sealant bottle
5. Compressor
6. On/off switch
7. Pressure gauge for displaying the
tire inflation pressure
8. Screw cap for reducing tire infla-
tion pressure
9. Hose to connect compressor and
sealant bottle or compressor and
wheel
Connectors, cable and connection
hose are stored in the compressor
housing.
Strictly follow the specified
sequence, otherwise the sealant
may escape under high pressure.
Components of the Tire Mobility Kit
OAM060015L
WARNING - Expired
sealant
Do not use the Tire sealant after
the sealant has expired (i.e.
pasted the expiration date on
the sealant container). This can
increase the risk of tire failure.
WARNING - Sealant
• Keep out of reach of children.
• Avoid contact with eyes.
• Do not swallow.
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
617
What to do in an emergency
Using the Tire Mobility Kit
1. Detach the speed restriction label
(0) from the sealant bottle (1), and
place it in a highly visible place
inside the vehicle such as on the
steering wheel to remind the driv-
er not to drive too fast.
2. Screw connection hose (9) onto
the connector of the sealant bottle.
3. Ensure that screw cap (8) is
closed.
4. Unscrew the valve cap from the
valve of the defective wheel and
screw filling hose (2) of the
sealant bottle onto the valve.
5. Insert the sealant bottle into the
housing (4) of the compressor so
that the bottle is upright.
✽✽
NOTICE
If a foreign object is seen that has
punctured the tire, do not remove it
before using Tire Mobility Kit.
6. Ensure that the compressor is
switched off, position 0.
7. Plug the compressor power cord
into the front passenger side
power outlet (180W) of the vehicle.
Only use the front passenger side
power outlet when connecting the
power cord.
OPSE064002 OPS063016
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
What to do in an emergency
186
8. With the vehicle start/stop button
position on or ignition switch posi-
tion on, switch on the compressor
and let it run for approximately
5~7 minutes to fill the sealant up
to proper pressure. (refer to the
Tire and Wheels, chapter 8). The
inflation pressure of the tire after
filling is unimportant and will be
checked/corrected later.
Be careful not to overinflate the
tire and stay away from the tire
when filling it.
9. Switch off the compressor.
10. Detach the hoses from the
sealant bottle connector and
from the tire valve.
Return the Tire Mobility Kit to its stor-
age location in the vehicle.
Distributing the sealant
11. Immediately drive approximately
4~6miles (7~10km or, about
10min) to evenly distribute the
sealant in the tire.
Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph
(80 km/h). If possible, do not fall
below a speed of 12 mph (20 km/h).
While driving, if you experience any
unusual vibration, ride disturbance or
noise, reduce your speed and drive
with caution until you can safely pull
off of the side of the road.
Call for road side service or towing.
When you use the Tire Mobility Kit,
the tire pressure sensors and wheel
may be stained by sealant.
Therefore, remove the tire pressure
sensors and wheel stained by
sealant and we recommend that
inspect at an authorized Kia dealer.
WARNING - Carbon
monoxide
Do not leave your vehicle run-
ning in a poorly ventilated area
for extended periods of time.
Carbon monoxide poisoning
and suffocation can occur.
WARNING - Tire pressure
Do not attempt to drive your
vehicle if the tire pressure is
below 29 PSI(200kpa). This
could result in an accident due
to sudden tire failure.
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
619
What to do in an emergency
Checking the tire inflation pres-
sure
1. After driving approximately 4
~6miles (7~10km or about 10min),
stop at a safety location.
2. Connect connection hose (9) of
the compressor directly to the tire
valve.
3. Plug the compressor power cord
into the vehicle power outlet.
4. Adjust the tire inflation pressure to
the recommended tire inflation.
With the ignition switched on, pro-
ceed as follows.
- To increase the inflation pres-
sure : Switch on the compres-
sor, position I. To check the cur-
rent inflation pressure setting,
briefly switch off the compressor.
✽✽
NOTICE
The pressure gauge may show high-
er than actual reading when the
compressor is running. To get an
accurate tire pressure, the compres-
sor needs to be turned off.
- To reduce the inflation pres-
sure: Loosen the screw cap (8)
on the compressor hose.
Technical Data
System voltage: DC 12 V
Working voltage: DC 10 - 15 V
Amperage rating: max. 15 A
Suitable for use at temperatures:
-22 ~ +158°F (-30 ~ +70°C)
Max. working pressure:
87 psi (6 bar)
Size
Compressor: 6.7 x 5.9 x 2.4 in.
(170 x 150 x 60 mm)
Sealant bottle: 3.3 x 2.8 ø in.
(85 x 70 ø mm)
Compressor weight:
1.77 lbs (0.8 kg)
Sealant volume:
12.2 cu. in. (200 ml)
CAUTION - Tire pressure
sensor
When you use the Tire Mobility
Kit including sealant not
approved by Kia, the tire pres-
sure sensors may be damaged
by sealant. The sealant on the
tire pressure sensor and wheel
should be removed when you
replace the tire with a new one
and inspect the tire pressure
sensors in authorized dealer.
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
What to do in an emergency
206
TOWING
Towing service
If emergency towing is necessary,
we recommend having it done by an
authorized Kia dealer or a commer-
cial tow-truck service. Proper lifting
and towing procedures are neces-
sary to prevent damage to the vehi-
cle. The use of wheel dollies or
flatbed is recommended.
For trailer towing guidelines informa-
tion, refer to “Trailer towing” in chap-
ter 5.
If towing is required, lift all four wheels
off the ground and tow the vehicle. If
you must tow the vehicle using only
two wheels, lift the front wheels off the
ground and tow the vehicle.
OPSE064003
dolly
dolly
WARNING - Side and cur-
tain air bag
If your vehicle is equipped with
side and curtain air bags, set
the ignition switch to LOCK or
ACC position when the vehicle
is being towed. The side and
curtain air bag may deploy
when the ignition is ON and the
rollover sensor detects the situ-
ation as a rollover.
OPSE064005
CAUTION - Towing
• Do not tow the vehicle back-
wards with the front wheels on
the ground as this may cause
damage to the vehicle.
• Do not tow with sling-type
equipment. Use wheel lift or
flatbed equipment.
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
621
What to do in an emergency
When towing your vehicle in an
emergency without wheel dollies :
1. Set the ignition switch in the ACC
position.
2. Place the transaxle shift lever in N
(Neutral).
3. Release the parking brake.
Removable towing hook
1. Remove the towing hook from the
tool case.
2. Remove the hole cover pressing
the lower part of the cover on the
front bumper.
WARNING - Towing EV
Never tow the vehicle with the
front wheels on the ground (for-
ward or backward), as this may
cause damage to the motor or a
vehicle fire.
CAUTION - Towing gear
position
Failure to place the shift lever in
N (Neutral) may cause internal
damage to the transaxle.
WARNING - Towing EV
• If you tow the vehicle while the
front wheels are touching the
ground, the vehicle motor may
generate electricity and the
motor components may be
damaged or a fire may occur.
• When a vehicle fire occurs
due to the battery, there is a
risk of a second fire. Contact
the fire department when tow-
ing the vehicle.
OPSE064006
OPSE064008
■ Front
■ Rear
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
What to do in an emergency
226
3. Install the towing hook by turning it
clockwise into the hole until it is
fully secured.
4. Remove the towing hook and
install the cover after use.
Emergency towing
If towing is necessary, we recom-
mend you to have it done by an
authorized Kia dealer or a com-
mercial tow truck service.
If towing service is not available in an
emergency, your vehicle may be
temporarily towed using a cable or
chain secured to the emergency tow-
ing hook under the front (or rear) of
the vehicle. Use extreme caution
when towing the vehicle. A driver
must be in the vehicle to steer it and
operate the brakes.
Towing in this manner may be done
only on hard-surfaced roads for a
short distance and at low speeds.
Also, the wheels, axles, power train,
steering and brakes must all be in
good condition.
• Do not use the tow hooks to pull a
vehicle out of mud, sand or other
conditions from which the vehicle
cannot be driven out under its own
power.
• Avoid towing a vehicle heavier than
the vehicle doing the towing.
• The drivers of both vehicles should
communicate with each other fre-
quently.
OPSE064007
OPSE064009
■ Front
■ Rear
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
623
What to do in an emergency
• Attach a towing strap to the tow
hook.
• Using a portion of the vehicle other
than the tow hooks for towing may
damage the body of your vehicle.
• Only use a cable or chain specifi-
cally intended for use in towing
vehicles. Securely fasten the cable
or chain to the towing hook provid-
ed.
• Before emergency towing, check
that the hook is not broken or dam-
aged.
• Fasten the towing cable or chain
securely to the hook.
• Do not jerk the hook. Apply it
steadily and with even force.
• To avoid damaging the hook, do
not pull from the side or at a verti-
cal angle. Always pull straight
ahead.
• Use a towing strap less than 16
feet (5 m) long. Attach a white or
red cloth (about 12 inches (30 cm)
wide) in the middle of the strap for
easy visibility.
• Drive carefully so that the towing
strap is not loose during towing.
Emergency towing precautions
• Turn the ignition switch to ACC so
the steering wheel isn’t locked.
• Place the shift lever in N (Neutral).
• Release the parking brake.
• Press the brake pedal with more
force than usual since you will have
reduced brake performance.
• More steering effort will be
required because the power steer-
ing system will be disabled.
• If you are driving down a long hill,
the brakes may overheat and brake
performance will be reduced. Stop
often and let the brakes cool off.
OPA067014
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
✽✽
NOTICE
Before towing, check the reduction
gear for fluid leaks under your vehi-
cle. If the reduction gear fluid is
leaking, a flatbed equipment or tow-
ing dolly must be used.
CAUTION
To avoid serious damage to the
reduction gear, limit the vehicle
speed to 10 mph (15 km/h) and
drive less than 1 mile (1.5 km)
when towing.
624
What to do in an emergency
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
Maintenance
Motor room compartment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Maintenance services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
• Owner’s responsibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
• Owner maintenance precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Owner maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
• Owner maintenance schedule. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Scheduled maintenance service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
Explanation of scheduled maintenance items . . . 7-19
Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21
• Checking the coolant level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21
• Changing the coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-23
Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-24
• Checking the brake fluid level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-24
Washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-26
• Checking the washer fluid level. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-26
Climate control air filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-27
• Filter inspection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-27
• Filter replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-27
Wiper blades. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-29
• Blade inspection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-29
• Blade replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-29
Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-33
• For best battery service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-33
• Battery recharging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-34
• Reset items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-35
Tires and wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-36
• Tire care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-36
• Recommended cold tire inflation pressures . . . . . . . 7-36
• Checking tire inflation pressure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-37
• Tire rotation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-38
• Wheel alignment and tire balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-39
• Tire replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-40
• Wheel replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-40
• Tire traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-41
• Tire maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-41
• Tire sidewall labeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-41
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-51
• Fuse/relay panel description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-56
Light bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-63
• Front light replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-64
• Side repeater light bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-68
• Rear combination light bulb replacement . . . . . . . . 7-68
• High mounted stop light bulb replacement . . . . . . . 7-70
• License plate light bulb replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-71
• Interior light bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-72
Appearance care. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-73
• Exterior care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-73
• Interior care. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-78
California perchlorate notice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-80
7
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
Maintenance
27
MOTOR ROOM COMPARTMENT
OPSE075001
1. Coolant reservoir
2. Brake fluid reservoir
3. Fuse box
4. Positive battery terminal
5. Negative battery terminal
6. Radiator cap
7. Windshield washer fluid reservoir
❈ The actual motor compartment in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
73
Maintenance
MAINTENANCE SERVICES
You should exercise the utmost care
to prevent damage to your vehicle
and injury to yourself whenever per-
forming any maintenance or inspec-
tion procedures.
Should you have any doubts con-
cerning the inspection or servicing of
your vehicle, we strongly recom-
mend that you have an authorized
Kia dealer perform this work.
An authorized Kia dealer has factory
trained technicians and genuine Kia
parts to service your vehicle proper-
ly. For expert advice and quality serv-
ice, see an authorized Kia dealer.
Inadequate, incomplete or insuffi-
cient servicing may result in opera-
tional problems with your vehicle that
could lead to vehicle damage, an
accident, or personal injury.
Owner’s responsibility
✽✽
NOTICE
Maintenance Service and Record
Retention are the owner's responsi-
bility.
You should retain documents that
show proper maintenance has been
performed on your vehicle in accor-
dance with the scheduled mainte-
nance service charts shown on the
following pages. You need this infor-
mation to establish your compliance
with the servicing and maintenance
requirements of your vehicle war-
ranties.
Detailed warranty information is pro-
vided in your Warranty & Consumer
Information manual.
Repairs and adjustments required as
a result of improper maintenance or
a lack of required maintenance are
not covered.
We recommend you have your vehi-
cle maintained and repaired by an
authorized Kia dealer. An authorized
Kia dealer meets Kia’s high service
quality standards and receives tech-
nical support from Kia in order to pro-
vide you with a high level of service
satisfaction.
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
Maintenance
47
Owner maintenance precau-
tions
Improper or incomplete service may
result in problems. This section gives
instructions only for the maintenance
items that are easy to perform.
As explained earlier in this section,
several procedures can be done only
by an authorized Kia dealer with spe-
cial tools.
✽✽
NOTICE
Improper owner maintenance dur-
ing the warranty period may affect
warranty coverage. For details, read
the separate Warranty & Consumer
Information manual provided with
the vehicle. If you're unsure about
any servicing or maintenance proce-
dure, have it done by an authorized
Kia dealer.
WARNING - Maintenance
work
Do not wear jewelry or loose
clothing while working under
the hood of your vehicle with
ready ( ) mode. These can
become entangled in moving
parts, if you must run the vehi-
cle in the ready ( ) mode while
working under the hood, make
certain that you remove all jew-
elry (especially rings, bracelets,
watches, and necklaces) and all
neckties, scarves, and similar
loose clothing before getting
near cooling fans.
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
75
Maintenance
OWNER MAINTENANCE
The following lists are vehicle checks
and inspections that should be per-
formed by the owner or an author-
ized Kia dealer at the frequencies
indicated to help ensure safe,
dependable operation of your vehi-
cle.
Any adverse conditions should be
brought to the attention of your deal-
er as soon as possible.
These Owner Maintenance Checks
are generally not covered by war-
ranties and you may be charged for
labor, parts and lubricants used.
Owner maintenance schedule
When you stop for fuel:
• Check the coolant level in the
coolant reservoir.
• Check the windshield washer fluid
level.
• Look for low or under-inflated tires.
Check if the front of the radiator
and condenser are clean and not
blocked with leaves, dirt or insects
etc. If any of the above parts are
extremely dirty or you are not sure
of their condition, take your vehicle
to an authorized Kia dealer.
While operating your vehicle:
• Check for vibrations in the steering
wheel. Notice any increased steer-
ing effort or looseness in the steer-
ing wheel, or change in its straight-
ahead position.
• Notice if your vehicle constantly
turns slightly or “pulls” to one side
when traveling on smooth, level
road.
• When stopping, listen and check
for unusual sounds, pulling to one
side, increased brake pedal travel
or “hard-to-push” brake pedal.
• If any slipping or changes in the
operation of your transaxle occurs,
check the transaxle fluid level.
• Check the reduction gear P (Park)
function.
• Check the parking brake.
• Check for fluid leaks under your
vehicle (water dripping from the air
conditioning system during or after
use is normal).
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
Maintenance
67
At least monthly:
• Check the coolant level in the
coolant reservoir.
• Check the operation of all exterior
lights, including the stoplights, turn
signals and hazard warning flash-
ers.
• Check the inflation pressures of all
tires including the spare.
At least twice a year
(i.e., every Spring and Fall):
• Check the radiator, heater and air
conditioning hoses for leaks or
damage.
• Check the windshield washer
spray and wiper operation. Clean
the wiper blades with clean cloth
dampened with washer fluid.
• Check the headlight alignment.
• Check the muffler, exhaust pipes,
shields and clamps.
• Check the lap/shoulder belts for
wear and function.
• Check for worn tires and loose
wheel lug nuts.
At least once a year:
• Clean the body and door drain
holes.
• Lubricate the door hinges and
checks, and hood hinges.
• Lubricate the door and hood locks
and latches.
• Lubricate the door rubber weather-
strips.
• Check the air conditioning system.
• Inspect and lubricate the reduction
gear linkage and controls.
• Clean the battery and terminals.
• Check the brake fluid level.
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
77
Maintenance
SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE SERVICE
Follow the Normal Maintenance
Schedule if the vehicle is usually
operated where none of the following
conditions apply. If any of the follow-
ing conditions apply, follow the
Maintenance Under Severe Usage
Conditions.
• Repeated short distance driving.
• Driving in dusty conditions or
sandy areas.
• Extensive use of brakes.
• Driving in areas where salt or other
corrosive materials are being used.
• Driving on rough or muddy roads.
• Driving in mountainous areas.
• Extended periods of idling or low
speed operation.
• Driving for a prolonged period in
cold temperatures and/or extreme-
ly humid climates.
• More than 50% driving in heavy
city traffic during hot weather
above 90°F (32°C).
If your vehicle is operated under the
above conditions, you should
inspect, replace or refill more fre-
quently than the following Normal
Maintenance Schedule. After 120
months or 150,000 miles continue to
follow the prescribed maintenance
intervals.
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
Maintenance
87
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
The following maintenance services must be performed to ensure good emission control and performance. Keep
receipts for all vehicle emission services to protect your warranty. Where both mileage and time are shown, the fre-
quency of service is determined by whichever occurs first.
*
1
: When adding coolant, use only deionized water or soft water for your vehicle and never mix hard water in the coolant filled at
the factory. An improper coolant mixture can result in serious malfunction or motor compartment damage.
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
79
Maintenance
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.
7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 6 months
❑ Inspect air conditioning compressor, air conditioner refriger-
ant and performance (if equipped)
❑ Inspect cooling system *
1
❑ Inspect 12V battery condition
❑ Inspect brake lines, hoses and connections
❑ Inspect brake fluid
❑ Inspect disc brakes and pads
❑ Inspect suspension ball joints & mounting bolts
❑ Inspect steering gear rack, linkage and boots
❑ Inspect brake pedal
❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots
❑ Rotate tires - including tire pressure and tread wear
(Every 3,750 miles (6,000 km) or 6 months)
❑ Replace climate control air filter (if equipped)
15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 12 months
❑ Inspect air conditioning compressor, air conditioner refriger-
ant and performance (if equipped)
❑ Inspect cooling system *
1
❑ Inspect 12V battery condition
❑ Inspect brake lines, hoses and connections
❑ Inspect brake fluid
❑ Inspect disc brakes and pads
❑ Inspect suspension ball joints & mounting bolts
❑ Inspect steering gear rack, linkage and boots
❑ Inspect brake pedal
❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots
❑ Rotate tires - including tire pressure and tread wear
(Every 3,750 miles (6,000 km) or 6 months)
❑ Replace climate control air filter (if equipped)
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
Maintenance
107
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.
22,500 miles (36,000 km) or 18 months
❑ Rotate tires - including tire pressure and tread wear
(Every 3,750 miles (6,000 km) or 6 months)
30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 24 months
❑ Inspect air conditioning compressor, air conditioner refriger-
ant and performance (if equipped)
❑ Inspect cooling system *
1
❑ Inspect 12V battery condition
❑ Inspect brake lines, hoses and connections
❑ Inspect brake fluid
❑ Inspect disc brakes and pads
❑ Inspect suspension ball joints & mounting bolts
❑ Inspect steering gear rack, linkage and boots
❑ Inspect brake pedal
❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots
❑ Rotate tires - including tire pressure and tread wear
(Every 3,750 miles (6,000 km) or 6 months)
❑ Replace climate control air filter (if equipped)
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
711
Maintenance
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.
37,500 miles (60,000 km) or 30 months
❑ Inspect reduction gear oil
❑ Rotate tires - including tire pressure and tread wear
(Every 3,750 miles (6,000 km) or 6 months)
45,000 miles (72,000 km) or 36 months
❑ Inspect air conditioning compressor, air conditioner refriger-
ant and performance (if equipped)
❑ Inspect cooling system *
1
❑ Inspect 12V battery condition
❑ Inspect brake lines, hoses and connections
❑ Inspect brake fluid
❑ Inspect disc brakes and pads
❑ Inspect suspension ball joints & mounting bolts
❑ Inspect steering gear rack, linkage and boots
❑ Inspect brake pedal
❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots
❑ Rotate tires - including tire pressure and tread wear
(Every 3,750 miles (6,000 km) or 6 months)
❑ Replace climate control air filter (if equipped)
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
Maintenance
127
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)
52,500 miles (84,000 km) or 42 months
❑ Rotate tires - including tire pressure and tread wear
(Every 3,750 miles (6,000 km) or 6 months)
60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 48 months
❑ Inspect air conditioning compressor, air conditioner refriger-
ant and performance (if equipped)
❑ Inspect cooling system *
1
❑ Inspect 12V battery condition
❑ Inspect brake lines, hoses and connections
❑ Inspect brake fluid
❑ Inspect disc brakes and pads
❑ Inspect suspension ball joints & mounting bolts
❑ Inspect steering gear rack, linkage and boots
❑ Inspect brake pedal
❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots
❑ Rotate tires - including tire pressure and tread wear
(Every 3,750 miles (6,000 km) or 6 months)
❑ Replace climate control air filter (if equipped)
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
713
Maintenance
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)
67,500 miles (108,000 km) or 54 months
❑ Rotate tires - including tire pressure and tread wear
(Every 3,750 miles (6,000 km) or 6 months)
75,000 miles (120,000 km) or 60 months
❑ Inspect air conditioning compressor, air conditioner refriger-
ant and performance (if equipped)
❑ Inspect cooling system *
1
❑ Inspect 12V battery condition
❑ Inspect brake lines, hoses and connections
❑ Inspect brake fluid
❑ Inspect disc brakes and pads
❑ Inspect suspension ball joints & mounting bolts
❑ Inspect steering gear rack, linkage and boots
❑ Inspect brake pedal
❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots
❑ Inspect reduction gear oil
❑ Rotate tires - including tire pressure and tread wear
(Every 3,750 miles (6,000 km) or 6 months)
❑ Replace climate control air filter (if equipped)
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
Maintenance
147
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)
82,500 miles (132,000 km) or 66 months
❑ Rotate tires - including tire pressure and tread wear
(Every 3,750 miles (6,000 km) or 6 months)
90,000 miles (144,000 km) or 72 months
❑ Inspect air conditioning compressor, air conditioner refriger-
ant and performance (if equipped)
❑ Inspect cooling system *
1
❑ Inspect 12V battery condition
❑ Inspect brake lines, hoses and connections
❑ Inspect brake fluid
❑ Inspect disc brakes and pads
❑ Inspect suspension ball joints & mounting bolts
❑ Inspect steering gear rack, linkage and boots
❑ Inspect brake pedal
❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots
❑ Rotate tires - including tire pressure and tread wear
(Every 3,750 miles (6,000 km) or 6 months)
❑ Replace climate control air filter (if equipped)
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
715
Maintenance
97,500 miles (156,000 km) or 78 months
❑ Rotate tires - including tire pressure and tread wear
(Every 3,750 miles (6,000 km) or 6 months)
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)
105,000 miles (168,000 km) or 84 months
❑ Inspect air conditioning compressor, air conditioner refriger-
ant and performance (if equipped)
❑ Inspect cooling system *
1
❑ Inspect 12V battery condition
❑ Inspect brake lines, hoses and connections
❑ Inspect brake fluid
❑ Inspect disc brakes and pads
❑ Inspect suspension ball joints & mounting bolts
❑ Inspect steering gear rack, linkage and boots
❑ Inspect brake pedal
❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots
❑ Rotate tires - including tire pressure and tread wear
(Every 3,750 miles (6,000 km) or 6 months)
❑ Replace climate control air filter (if equipped)
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
Maintenance
167
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.
112,500 miles (180,000 km) or 90 months
❑ Rotate tires - including tire pressure and tread wear
(Every 3,750 miles (6,000 km) or 6 months)
❑ Inspect reduction gear oil
120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 96 months
❑ Inspect air conditioning compressor, air conditioner refriger-
ant and performance (if equipped)
❑ Inspect cooling system *
1
❑ Inspect 12V battery condition
❑ Inspect brake lines, hoses and connections
❑ Inspect brake fluid
❑ Inspect disc brakes and pads
❑ Inspect suspension ball joints & mounting bolts
❑ Inspect steering gear rack, linkage and boots
❑ Inspect brake pedal
❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots
❑ Rotate tires - including tire pressure and tread wear
(Every 3,750 miles (6,000 km) or 6 months)
❑ Replace climate control air filter (if equipped)
❑ Replace coolant
(First at 120,000 miles (192,000 km) then
after every 30,000 miles (48,000km))
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
717
Maintenance
MAINTENANCE UNDER SEVERE USAGE CONDITIONS
The following items must be serviced more frequently on cars mainly used under severe driving conditions.
Refer to the chart below for the appropriate maintenance intervals.
R : Replace I : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace
Maintenance item
Maintenance
operation
Maintenance intervals
Driving
condition
Reduction gear oil R Every 75,000 miles (120,000 km)
C, D, E, G,
H, I, K
Steering gear rack, linkage and boots I
Inspect more frequently
depending on the condition
C, D, E, F, G
Front suspension ball joints I
Inspect more frequently
depending on the condition
C, D, E, F, G
Disc brakes and pads I
Inspect more frequently
depending on the condition
C, D, E, G, H
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
Maintenance
187
SEVERE DRIVING CONDITIONS
A : Repeatedly driving short distance of less than 8 km (5
miles) in normal temperature or less than 16 km (10 miles)
in freezing temperature.
B : Extensive low speed driving for long distances.
C : Driving on rough, dusty, muddy, unpaved, graveled or salt-
spread roads.
D : Driving in areas using salt or other corrosive
materials or in very cold weather
E : Driving in sandy areas
F : Driving in heavy traffic area over 32
°C (90 °F)
G : Driving on uphill, downhill, or mountain roads.
H : Towing a trailer or using a camper on roof rack.
I : Driving for patrol car, taxi, commercial car or vehicle towing.
J : Driving in very cold weather.
K : Driving over 170 km/h (106 mile/h).
L : Frequently driving in stop-and-go conditions.
Maintenance item
Maintenance
operation
Maintenance intervals
Driving
condition
Drive shaft and boots I
Inspect more frequently
depending on the condition
C, D, E, F,
G, H, I, K
Climate control air filter (if equipped) R
Replace more frequently
depending on the condition
C, E, G
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
719
Maintenance
EXPLANATION OF SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE ITEMS
Cooling system
Check the cooling system compo-
nents, such as the radiator, coolant
reservoir, hoses and connections ,
coolant 3way valve, chiller for leak-
age and damage. Replace any dam-
aged parts.
Coolant
The coolant should be changed at
the intervals specified in the mainte-
nance schedule.
Brake hoses and lines
Visually check for proper installation,
chafing, cracks, deterioration and
any leakage. Replace any deteriorat-
ed or damaged parts immediately.
Brake fluid
Check the brake fluid level in the
brake fluid reservoir.The level should
be between “MIN” and “MAX” marks
on the side of the reservoir. Use only
hydraulic brake fluid conforming to
DOT 3 or DOT 4 specification.
Brake discs, pads, calipers
and rotors
Check the pads for excessive wear,
discs for run out and wear, and
calipers for fluid leakage.
For more information on checking
the pads or lining wear limit, we rec-
ommend you to refer to the Kia web-
site.
(http://www
.kiatechinfo.com)
Suspension mounting bolts
Check the suspension connections
for looseness or damage. Retighten
to the specified torque.
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
Maintenance
207
Steering gear box, linkage &
boots/lower arm ball joint
With the vehicle stopped and off,
check for excessive free-play in the
steering wheel.
Check the linkage for bends or dam-
age. Check the dust boots and ball
joints for deterioration, cracks, or
damage. Replace any damaged
parts.
Drive shafts and boots
Check the drive shafts, boots and
clamps for cracks, deterioration, or
damage. Replace any damaged
parts and, if necessary, repack the
grease.
Air conditioning refrigerant
Check the air conditioning lines and
connections for leakage and dam-
age.
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
721
Maintenance
COOLANT
The high-pressure cooling system
has a reservoir filled with year round
antifreeze coolant. The reservoir is
filled at the factory.
Check the antifreeze protection and
coolant level at least once a year, at
the beginning of the winter season,
and before traveling to a colder cli-
mate.
Checking the coolant level
Turn the vehicle off and wait until it
cools down. Use extreme care when
removing the radiator cap. Wrap a
thick towel around it, and turn it
counterclockwise slowly to the first
stop. Step back while the pressure is
released from the cooling system.
When you are sure all the pressure
has been released, press down on
the cap, using a thick towel, and con-
tinue turning counterclockwise to
remove it.
WARNING
Removing radiator
cap
Never attempt to remove the
radiator cap while the motor
compartment is operating or
hot. Doing so might lead to
cooling system damage and
could result in serious personal
injury from escaping hot
coolant or steam.
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
Maintenance
227
Check the condition and connections
of all cooling system hoses and
heater hoses. Replace any swollen
or deteriorated hoses.
The coolant level should be filled
between F and L marks on the side
of the coolant reservoir when the
motor room is cool.
If the coolant level is low, add enough
specified coolant to provide protec-
tion against freezing and corrosion.
Bring the level to F, but do not over-
fill. If frequent additions are required,
see an authorized Kia dealer for a
cooling system inspection.
Recommended coolant
• When adding coolant, use only
deionized water or soft water for
your vehicle and never mix hard
water in the coolant filled at the fac-
tory. An improper coolant mixture
can result in serious malfunction or
damage.
• DO NOT USE alcohol or methanol
coolant or mix them with the spec-
ified coolant.
• Do not use a solution that contains
more than 60% antifreeze or less
than 35% antifreeze, which would
reduce the effectiveness of the
solution.
• The cooling circuit of a vehicle
equipped with a heat pump system
may freeze in extremely low tem-
perature when the concentration of
the antifreezing liquid is below
45%.
OPSE074002
WARNING - Cooling fan
Use caution when
working near the
blade of the cooling
fan. The electric
motor (cooling fan) is
controlled by coolant tempera-
ture, refrigerant pressure and
vehicle speed. it may some-
times operate even when the
vehicle is not running.
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
723
Maintenance
For mixture percentage, refer to the
following table.
Changing the coolant
Have the coolant changed by an
authorized Kia dealer according to
the Maintenance Schedule at the
beginning of this chapter.
Put a thick cloth around the radiator
cap before refilling the coolant in
order to prevent the coolant from
overflowing into motor compartment.
OPSE074002
Ambient
Temperature
Mixture Percentage
(volume)
Antifreeze Water
5°F (-15°C)
35 65
-13°F (-25°C)
40 60
-31°F (-35°C)
50 50
-49°F (-45°C)
60 40
WARNING
Radiator cap
Do not remove the radiator cap
when the motor compartment
and radiator are hot. Scalding
hot coolant and steam may
blow out under pressure which
may result in serious injury.
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
Maintenance
247
BRAKE FLUID
Checking the brake fluid level
Check the fluid level in the reservoir
periodically. The fluid level should be
between MAX and MIN marks on the
side of the reservoir.
Before removing the reservoir cap
and adding brake fluid, clean the
area around the reservoir cap thor-
oughly to prevent brake fluid contam-
ination.
If the level is low, add fluid to the
MAX level. The level will fall with
accumulated mileage. This is a nor-
mal condition associated with the
wear of the brake linings. If the fluid
level is excessively low, have the
brake system checked by an author-
ized Kia dealer.
Use only the specified brake fluid.
(Refer to “Recommended lubricants
and capacities” in chapter 8.)
Never mix different types of fluid.
In the event the brake system
requires frequent additions of fluid,
the vehicle should be inspected by
an authorized Kia dealer.
When changing and adding brake
fluid, handle it carefully. Do not let it
come in contact with your eyes. If
brake fluid should come in contact
with your eyes, immediately flush
them with a large quantity of fresh
tap water. Have your eyes examined
by a doctor as soon as possible.
OPSE074003
CAUTION - Proper fluid
Only use brake fluid in brake
system. Small amounts of
improper fluids can cause dam-
age to the brake system.
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
725
Maintenance
Brake fluid, which has been exposed
to open air for an extended time
should never be used as its quality
cannot be guaranteed. It should be
disposed of properly.
CAUTION - Brake fluid
Do not allow brake fluid to con-
tact the vehicle's body paint, as
paint damage will result.
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
Maintenance
267
WASHER FLUID
Checking the washer fluid
level
The reservoir is translucent so that
you can check the level with a quick
visual inspection.
Check the fluid level in the washer
fluid reservoir and add fluid if neces-
sary. Plain water may be used if
washer fluid is not available.
However, use washer solvent with
antifreeze characteristics in cold cli-
mates to prevent freezing.
OPSE074004
WARNING - Flammable
Fluid
Do not allow the washer fluid to
come in contact with open
flames or sparks.The windshield
washer fluid reservoir is flamma-
ble under certain circumstances.
This can result in a fire.
WARNING - Coolant
• Do not use radiator coolant or
antifreeze in the washer fluid
reservoir.
• Radiator coolant can severely
obscure visibility when sprayed
on the windshield and may
cause loss of vehicle control.
WARNING - Windshield
fluid
Do not drink the windshield
washer fluid. The windshield
washer fluid is poisonous to
humans and animals.
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
727
Maintenance
CLIMATE CONTROL AIR FILTER
Filter inspection & replacement
The climate control air filter should
be replaced according to the mainte-
nance schedule. If the vehicle is
operated in severely air-polluted
cities or on dusty rough roads for a
long period, it should be inspected
more frequently and replaced earlier.
When you replace the climate control
air filter, replace it performing the fol-
lowing procedure, and be careful to
avoid damaging other components.
1. Open the glove box. 2. With the glove box open, remove
the Air filter cover.
OPS073009OPSE074032
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
Maintenance
287
3. Remove the climate control air fil-
ter case by pulling out both sides
of the cover.
4. Replace the climate control air filter.
5. Reassemble in the reverse order
of disassembly.
When replacing the climate control
air filter install it properly. Otherwise,
the system may produce noise and
the effectiveness of the filter may be
reduced.
OPSE074021 OPS073011
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
729
Maintenance
WIPER BLADES
Blade inspection
Commercial hot waxes applied by
automatic vehicle washes have been
known to make the windshield diffi-
cult to clean.
Contamination of either the wind-
shield or the wiper blades with for-
eign matter can reduce the effective-
ness of the windshield wipers.
Common sources of contamination
are insects, tree sap, and hot wax
treatments used by some commer-
cial vehicle washes. If the blades are
not wiping properly, clean both the
window and the blades with a good
cleaner or mild detergent, and rinse
thoroughly with clean water.
Blade replacement
When the wipers no longer clean
adequately, the blades may be worn
or cracked, and require replacement.
To prevent damage to the wiper arms
or other components, do not attempt
to move the wipers manually.
The use of a non-specified wiper
blade could result in wiper malfunc-
tion and failure.
1JBA5122
CAUTION - Wiper blades
To prevent damage to the wiper
blades, do not use gasoline,
kerosene, paint thinner, or other
solvents on or near them.
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
Maintenance
307
Front windshield wiper blade
Type A
1. Raise the wiper arm and turn the
wiper blade assembly to expose
the plastic locking clip.
2. Compress the clip and slide the
blade assembly downward.
3. Lift it off the arm.
4. Install the blade assembly in the
reverse order of removal.
Type B
1. Raise the wiper arm.
1LDA5023
CAUTION - Wiper arms
Do not allow the wiper arm to
fall against the windshield,
since it may chip or crack the
windshield.
1JBA7037
1JBA7038
OHM078059
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
731
Maintenance
2. Turn the wiper blade clip. Then lift
up the blade clip.
3. Push the clip (1) and push up the
wiper arm (2).
4. Push down the wiper arm (3) and
install the new blade assembly in
the reverse order of removal.
5. Return the wiper arm on the wind-
shield.
Rear window wiper blade
1. Raise the wiper arm and pull out
the wiper blade assembly.
OHM078062
OSBL071001
OSBL071003
OSBL071002
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
Maintenance
327
2. Install the new blade assembly by
inserting the center part into the
slot in the wiper arm until it clicks
into place.
3. Make sure the blade assembly is
installed firmly by trying to pull it
slightly.
To prevent damage to the wiper arms
or other components, have an
authorized Kia dealer replace the
wiper blade.
OHM078063
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
733
Maintenance
BATTERY
For best battery service
• Keep the battery securely mount-
ed.
• Keep the battery top clean and dry.
• Keep the terminals and connec-
tions clean, tight, and coated with
petroleum jelly or terminal grease.
• Rinse any spilled electrolyte from
the battery immediately with a
solution of water and baking soda.
• If the vehicle is not going to be
used for an extended time, discon-
nect the battery cables.
Always read the following
instructions carefully when
handling a battery.
If any electrolyte gets into
your eyes, flush your eyes
with clean water for at least
15 minutes and get immedi-
ate medical attention.
If electrolyte gets on your
skin, thoroughly wash the
contacted area. If you feel
pain or burning sensation,
get medical attention imme-
diately.
An inappropriately disposed
battery can be harmful to the
environment and human
health. Dispose the battery
according to your local law(s)
or regulation.
Never attempt to recharge the bat-
tery when the battery cables are con-
nected.
OPSE074005
WARNING - Risk of
explosion
Keep lit cigarettes and
all other flames or
sparks away from the
battery.
The battery contains
hydrogen -- a highly
combustible gas which
will explode if it comes
in contact with a flame or
spark.
Keep batteries out of the
reach of children
because batteries con-
tain highly corrosive
SULFURIC ACID and
electrolytes. Do not
allow battery acid to
contact your skin, eyes,
clothing or paint finish.
Wear eye protection
when charging or work-
ing near a battery.
Always provide ventila-
tion when working in an
enclosed space.
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
Maintenance
347
✽✽
NOTICE
If you connect unauthorized elec-
tronic devices to the battery, the bat-
tery may be discharged. Never use
unauthorized devices.
Battery recharging
Your vehicle has a maintenance-free,
calcium-based battery.
• If the battery becomes discharged
in a short time (because, for exam-
ple, the headlights or interior lights
were left on while the vehicle was
not in use), recharge it by slow
charging (trickle) for 10 hours.
• If the battery gradually discharges
because of high electric load while
the vehicle is being used, recharge
it at 20-30A for two hours.
CALIFORNIA PROPO-
SITION 65 WARNING
Battery posts, terminals, and
related accessories contain
lead and lead compounds,
chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer, birth
defects and reproductive harm.
Batteries also contain other
chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer.
Wash hands after handling.
WARNING - Risk of elec-
trocution
Never touch the electrical igni-
tion system while the vehicle is
running. This system works
with high voltage which can
"zap" you.
WARNING - Recharging
battery
Never attempt to recharge the
battery when the battery cables
are connected.
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
735
Maintenance
When recharging the battery,
observe the following precautions:
• The battery must be removed from
the vehicle and placed in an area
with good ventilation.
• Do not allow cigarettes, sparks, or
flame near the battery.
• Watch the battery during charging,
and stop or reduce the charging
rate if the battery cells begin
gassing (boiling) violently or if the
temperature of the electrolyte of
any cell exceeds 120°F (49°C).
• Wear eye protection when check-
ing the battery during charging.
• Disconnect the battery charger in
the following order.
1.Turn off the battery charger main
switch.
2.Unhook the negative clamp from
the negative battery terminal.
3.Unhook the positive clamp from
the positive battery terminal.
• Before performing maintenance or
recharging the battery, turn off all
accessories and stop the vehicle.
• The negative battery cable must be
removed first and installed last
when the battery is disconnected.
Reset items
Items should be reset after the bat-
tery has been discharged or the bat-
tery has been disconnected.
• Auto up/down window
(See chapter 4)
• Trip computer (See chapter 4)
• Climate control system
(See chapter 4)
• Audio (See chapter 4)
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
Maintenance
367
TIRES AND WHEELS
Tire care
For proper maintenance, safety, and
maximum fuel economy, you must
always maintain recommended tire
inflation pressures and stay within
the load limits and weight distribution
recommended for your vehicle.
Recommended cold tire infla-
tion pressures
All tire pressures should be checked
when the tires are cold. “Cold Tires”
means the vehicle has not been driv-
en for at least three hours or driven
less than one mile (1.6 km).
Recommended pressures must be
maintained for the best ride, vehicle
handling, and minimum tire wear.
For recommended inflation pressure,
refer to “Tire and wheels” in chapter
8.
All specifications (sizes and pres-
sures) can be found on a label
attached to the driver’s side center
pillar.
OPSE084003L
WARNING - Tire under
inflation
Inflate your tire consistent with
the instructions provided in this
manual. Severe under inflation
can lead to severe heat build-
up, causing blowouts, tread
separation and other tire fail-
ures that can result in the loss
of vehicle control. This risk is
much higher on hot days and
when driving for long periods at
high speeds.
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
737
Maintenance
• Underinflation also results in
excessive wear, poor handling and
reduced fuel economy. Wheel
deformation also is possible. Keep
your tire pressures at the proper
levels. If a tire frequently needs
refilling, have it checked by an
authorized Kia dealer.
• Overinflation produces a harsh
ride, excessive wear at the center
of the tire tread, and a greater pos-
sibility of damage from road haz-
ards.
• Warm tires normally exceed rec-
ommended cold tire pressures by 4
to 6 psi (28 to 41 kPa). Do not
release air from warm tires to
adjust the pressure or the tires will
be underinflated.
• Be sure to reinstall the tire inflation
valve caps. Without the valve cap,
dirt or moisture could get into the
valve core and cause air leakage. If
a valve cap is missing, install a
new one as soon as possible.
Always observe the following:
• Check tire pressure when the tires
are cold. (After vehicle has been
parked for at least three hours or
hasn't been driven more than one
mile (1.6 km) since startup.)
• Never overload your vehicle. Be
careful not to overload a vehicle
luggage rack if your vehicle is
equipped with one.
Checking tire inflation pressure
Check your tires once a month or
more.
How to check
Use a good quality gauge to check
tire pressure. You cannot tell if your
tires are properly inflated simply by
looking at them. Radial tires may
look properly inflated even when
they're underinflated.
Check the tire's inflation pressure
when the tires are cold. - "Cold"
means your vehicle has been sitting
for at least three hours or driven no
more than 1 mile (1.6 km).
WARNING - Tire Inflation
Overinflation or underinflation
can reduce tire life, adversely
affect vehicle handling, and
lead to sudden tire failure. This
could result in loss of vehicle
control and potential injury.
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
Maintenance
387
Remove the valve cap from the tire
valve stem. Press the tire gauge firm-
ly onto the valve to get a pressure
measurement. If the cold tire inflation
pressure matches the recommended
pressure on the tire and loading
information label, no further adjust-
ment is necessary. If the pressure is
low, add air until you reach the rec-
ommended amount.
If you overfill the tire, release air by
pushing on the metal stem in the
center of the tire valve. Recheck the
tire pressure with the tire gauge. Be
sure to put the valve caps back on
the valve stems. They help prevent
leaks by keeping out dirt and mois-
ture.
• Inspect your tires frequently for
proper inflation as well as wear and
damage. Always use a tire pres-
sure gauge.
• Tires with too much or too little
pressure wear unevenly causing
poor handling, loss of vehicle con-
trol, and sudden tire failure leading
to accidents, injuries, and even
death. The recommended cold tire
pressure for your vehicle can be
found in this manual and on the tire
label located on the driver's side
center pillar.
Tire rotation
To equalize tread wear, it is recom-
mended that the tires be rotated every
7,500 miles (12,000 km) or sooner if
irregular wear develops.
During rotation, check the tires for cor-
rect balance.
When rotating tires, check for uneven
wear and damage. Abnormal wear is
usually caused by incorrect tire pres-
sure, improper wheel alignment, out-
of-balance wheels, severe braking or
severe cornering. Look for bumps or
bulges in the tread or side of tire.
Replace the tire if you find either of
these conditions. Replace the tire if
fabric or cord is visible. After rotation,
be sure to bring the front and rear tire
pressures to specification and check
lug nut tightness.
Refer to “Tire and wheels” in chapter 8.
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
739
Maintenance
Disc brake pads should be inspected
for wear whenever tires are rotated.
Rotate radial tires that have an
asymmetric tread pattern only from
front to rear and not from right to left.
Wheel alignment and tire bal-
ance
The wheels on your vehicle were
aligned and balanced carefully at the
factory to give you the longest tire life
and best overall performance.
In most cases, you will not need to
have your wheels aligned again.
However, if you notice unusual tire
wear or your vehicle pulling one way
or the other, the alignment may need
to be reset.
If you notice your vehicle vibrating
when driving on a smooth road, your
wheels may need to be rebalanced.
CAUTION - Wheel weight
Improper wheel weights can
damage your vehicle's alu-
minum wheels. Use only
approved wheel weights.
WARNING - Mixing tires
Do not mix bias ply and radial
ply tires under any circum-
stances.This may cause unusu-
al handling characteristics.
S2BLA790A
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
Maintenance
407
Tire replacement
If the tire is worn evenly, a tread wear
indicator will appear as a solid band
across the tread. This shows there is
less than 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread
left on the tire. Replace the tire when
this happens.
Do not wait for the band to appear
across the entire tread before replac-
ing the tire.
The ABS works by comparing the
speed of the wheels. The tire size
affects wheel speed. When replacing
tires, all 4 tires must use the same
size originally supplied with the vehi-
cle. Using tires of a different size can
cause the ABS (Anti-lock Brake
System) and ESC (Electronic
Stability Control) to work irregularly.
✽✽
NOTICE
We recommend that when replacing
tires, use the same originally sup-
plied with the vehicles. If not, that
affects driving performance.
Wheel replacement
When replacing the metal wheels for
any reason, make sure the new
wheels are equivalent to the original
factory units in diameter, rim width
and offset.
A wheel that is not the correct size
may adversely affect wheel and
bearing life, braking and stopping
abilities, handling characteristics,
ground clearance, body-to-tire clear-
ance, snow chain clearance,
speedometer and odometer calibra-
tion, headlight aim and bumper
height.
OEN076053
Tread wear indicator
CAUTION - Wheels
Wheels that do not meet Kia
specifications may fit poorly
and result in damage to the
vehicle or unusual handling and
poor vehicle control.
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
741
Maintenance
Tire traction
Tire traction can be reduced if you
drive on worn tires, tires that are
improperly inflated or on slippery
road surfaces. Tires should be
replaced when tread wear indicators
appear. Slow down whenever there
is rain, snow or ice on the road to
reduce the possibility of losing con-
trol of the vehicle.
Tire maintenance
In addition to proper inflation, correct
wheel alignment helps to decrease
tire wear. If you find a tire is worn
unevenly, have your dealer check the
wheel alignment.
When you have new tires installed,
make sure they are balanced. This
will increase vehicle ride comfort and
tire life. Additionally, a tire should
always be rebalanced if it is removed
from the wheel.
Tire sidewall labeling
This information identifies and
describes the fundamental charac-
teristics of the tire and also provides
the tire identification number (TIN)
for safety standard certification. The
TIN can be used to identify the tire in
case of a recall.
1. Manufacturer or brand name
Manufacturer or Brand name is
shown.
2.Tire size designation
A tire’s sidewall is marked with a tire
size designation. You will need this
information when selecting replace-
ment tires for your vehicle. The fol-
lowing explains what the letters and
numbers in the tire size designation
mean.
Example tire size designation:
(These numbers are provided as an
example only; your tire size designa-
tor could vary depending on your
vehicle.)
P235/65R17 108T
I030B04JM
1
1
2
3
4
5,6
7
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
Maintenance
427
P - Applicable vehicle type (tires
marked with the prefix “P’’ are
intended for use on passenger
vehicles or light trucks; however,
not all tires have this marking).
235 - Tire width in millimeters.
65 - Aspect ratio. The tire’s section
height as a percentage of its
width.
R - Tire construction code (Radial).
17 - Rim diameter in inches.
108 - Load Index, a numerical code
associated with the maximum
load the tire can carry.
T - Speed Rating Symbol. See the
speed rating chart in this section
for additional information.
Wheel size designation
Wheels are also marked with impor-
tant information that you need if you
ever have to replace one. The follow-
ing explains what the letters and
numbers in the wheel size designa-
tion mean.
Example wheel size designation:
7.0JX17
7.0 - Rim width in inches.
J - Rim contour designation.
17 - Rim diameter in inches.
Tire speed ratings
The chart below lists many of the dif-
ferent speed ratings currently being
used for passenger vehicle tires. The
speed rating is part of the tire size
designation on the sidewall of the
tire. This symbol corresponds to that
tire's designed maximum safe oper-
ating speed.
S 112 mph (180 km/h)
T 118 mph (190 km/h)
H 130 mph (210 km/h)
V 149 mph (240 km/h)
Z Above 149 mph (240 km/h)
Maximum Speed
Speed
Rating
Symbol
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
743
Maintenance
3. Checking tire life (TIN :Tire
Identification Number)
Any tires that are over 6 years old,
based on the manufacturing date,
should be replaced by new ones.You
can find the manufacturing date on
the tire sidewall (possibly on the
inside of the wheel), displaying the
DOT Code. The DOT Code is a
series of numbers on a tire consist-
ing of numbers and English letters.
The manufacturing date is designat-
ed by the last four digits (characters)
of the DOT code.
DOT : XXXX XXXX OOOO
The front part of the DOT means a
plant code number, tire size and
tread pattern and the last four num-
bers indicate week and year manu-
factured.
For example:
DOT XXXX XXXX 1615 represents
that the tire was produced in the 16th
week of 2015.
4.Tire ply composition and mate-
rial
The number of layers or plies of rub-
ber-coated fabric in the tire. Tire
manufacturers also must indicate the
materials in the tire, which include
steel, nylon, polyester, and others.
The letter "R" means radial ply con-
struction; the letter "D" means diago-
nal or bias ply construction; and the
letter "B" means belted-bias ply con-
struction.
5. Maximum permissible inflation
pressure
This number is the greatest amount
of air pressure that should be put in
the tire. Do not exceed the maximum
permissible inflation pressure. Refer
to the Tire and Loading Information
label for recommended inflation
pressure.
WARNING - Tire age
Replace tires within the recom-
mended time frame. Failure to
replace tires as recommended
can result in sudden tire failure,
which could lead to a loss of
control and an accident.
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
Maintenance
447
6. Maximum load rating
This number indicates the maximum
load in kilograms and pounds that
can be carried by the tire. When
replacing the tires on the vehicle,
always use a tire that has the same
load rating as the factory installed
tire.
7. Uniform tire quality grading
Quality grades can be found where
applicable on the tire sidewall
between tread shoulder and maxi-
mum section width.
For example:
TREADWEAR 200
TRACTION AA
TEMPERATURE A
Tires degrade over time, even when
they are not being used. Regardless
of the remaining tread, we recom-
mend that tires be replaced after
approximately six (6) years of normal
service. Heat caused by hot climates
or frequent high loading conditions
can accelerate the aging process.
Tread wear
The tread wear grade is a compara-
tive rating based on the wear rate of
the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified govern-
ment test course. For example, a tire
graded 150 would wear one-and-a-
half times (1½) as well on the gov-
ernment course as a tire graded 100.
The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions
of their use, however, and may
depart significantly from the norm
due to variations in driving habits,
service practices and differences in
road characteristics and climate.
These grades are molded on the
side-walls of passenger vehicle tires.
The tires available as standard or
optional equipment on your vehicle
may vary with respect to grade.
Traction - AA, A, B & C
The traction grades, from highest to
lowest, are AA, A, B and C. Those
grades represent the tire’s ability to
stop on wet pavement as measured
under controlled conditions on spec-
ified government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire marked
C may have poor traction perform-
ance.
The traction grade assigned to this
tire is based on straight-ahead brak-
ing traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering,
hydroplaning, or peak traction char-
acteristics.
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
745
Maintenance
Temperature -A, B & C
The temperature grades are A (the
highest), B and C representing the
tire’s resistance to the generation of
heat and its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled condi-
tions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can
cause the material of the tire to
degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tire failure. The grade C cor-
responds to a level of performance
which all passenger vehicle tires
must meet under the Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109.
Grades B and A represent higher
levels of performance on the labora-
tory test wheel than the minimum
required by law.
Tire terminology and definitions
Air Pressure: The amount of air
inside the tire pressing outward on
the tire. Air pressure is expressed in
pounds per square inch (psi) or kilo-
pascal (kPa).
Accessory Weight: This means the
combined weight of optional acces-
sories. Some examples of optional
accessories are, automatic
transaxle, power seats, and air con-
ditioning.
Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a
tire's height to its width.
Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords
that is located between the plies and
the tread. Cords may be made from
steel or other reinforcing materials.
Bead: The tire bead contains steel
wires wrapped by steel cords that
hold the tire onto the rim.
Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in
which the plies are laid at alternate
angles less than 90 degrees to the
centerline of the tread.
Cold Tire Pressure: The amount of
air pressure in a tire, measured in
pounds per square inch (psi) or kilo-
pascals (kPa) before a tire has built
up heat from driving.
Curb Weight: This means the weight
of a motor vehicle with standard and
optional equipment including the
maximum capacity of fuel, oil and
coolant, but without passengers and
cargo.
DOT Markings: A code molded into
the sidewall of a tire signifying that
the tire is in compliance with the U.S.
Department of Transportation motor
vehicle safety standards. The DOT
code includes the Tire Identification
Number (TIN), an alphanumeric des-
ignator which can also identify the
tire manufacturer, production plant,
brand and date of production.
GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight
Rating for the Front Axle.
GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight
Rating for the Rear axle.
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
Maintenance
467
Intended Outboard Sidewall: The
side of an asymmetrical tire, that
must always face outward when
mounted on a vehicle.
Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for
air pressure.
Light truck (LT) tire: A tire designat-
ed by its manufacturer as primarily
intended for use on lightweight trucks
or multipurpose passenger vehicles.
Load ratings: The maximum load
that a tire is rated to carry for a given
inflation pressure.
Load Index: An assigned number
ranging from 1 to 279 that corre-
sponds to the load carrying capacity
of a tire.
Maximum Inflation Pressure: The
maximum air pressure to which a
cold tire may be inflated. The maxi-
mum air pressure is molded onto the
sidewall.
Maximum Load Rating: The load
rating for a tire at the maximum per-
missible inflation pressure for that tire.
Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight:
The sum of curb weight; accessory
weight; vehicle capacity weight; and
production options weight.
Normal Occupant Weight: The
number of occupants a vehicle is
designed to seat multiplied by 150
pounds (68 kg).
Occupant Distribution: Designated
seating positions.
Outward Facing Sidewall: The side
of a asymmetrical tire that has a par-
ticular side that faces outward when
mounted on a vehicle. The outward
facing sidewall bears white lettering
or bears manufacturer, brand, and/or
model name molding that is higher or
deeper than the same moldings on
the inner facing sidewall.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire
used on passenger cars and some
light duty trucks and multipurpose
vehicles.
Ply: A layer of rubber-coated parallel
cords.
Pneumatic tire: A mechanical
device made of rubber, chemicals,
fabric and steel or other materials,
that, when mounted on an automo-
tive wheel, provides the traction and
contains the gas or fluid that sustains
the load.
Production options weight: The
combined weight of installed regular
production options weighing over 5
lb.(2.3 kg) in excess of the standard
items which they replace, not previ-
ously considered in curb weight or
accessory weight, including heavy
duty brakes, ride levelers, roof rack,
heavy duty battery, and special trim.
Recommended Inflation Pressure:
Vehicle manufacturer's recommend-
ed tire inflation pressure and shown
on the tire placard.
Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in
which the ply cords that extend to the
beads are laid at 90 degrees to the
centerline of the tread.
Rim: A metal support for a tire and
upon which the tire beads are seated.
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
747
Maintenance
Sidewall: The portion of a tire
between the tread and the bead.
Speed Rating: An alphanumeric
code assigned to a tire indicating the
maximum speed at which a tire can
operate.
Traction: The friction between the
tire and the road surface. The
amount of grip provided.
Tread: The portion of a tire that
comes into contact with the road.
Treadwear Indicators: Narrow
bands, sometimes called "wear bars,"
that show across the tread of a tire
when only 2/32 inch of tread remains.
UTQGS: Uniform Tire Quality
Grading Standards, a tire information
system that provides consumers with
ratings for a tire's traction, tempera-
ture and treadwear. Ratings are
determined by tire manufacturers
using government testing proce-
dures. The ratings are molded into
the sidewall of the tire.
Vehicle Capacity Weight: The num-
ber of designated seating positions
multiplied by 150 lbs. (68 kg) plus the
rated cargo and luggage load.
Vehicle Maximum Load on the
Tire: Load on an individual tire due
to curb and accessory weight plus
maximum occupant and cargo
weight.
Vehicle Normal Load on the Tire:
Load on an individual tire that is
determined by distributing to each
axle its share of the curb weight,
accessory weight, and normal occu-
pant weight and driving by 2.
Vehicle Placard: A label permanent-
ly attached to a vehicle showing the
original equipment tire size and rec-
ommended inflation pressure.
All season tires
Kia specifies all season tires on
some models to provide good per-
formance for use all year round,
including snowy and icy road condi-
tions. All season tires are identified
by ALL SEASON and/or M+S (Mud
and Snow) on the tire sidewall. Snow
tires have better snow traction than
all season tires and may be more
appropriate in some areas.
Summer tires
Kia specifies summer tires on some
models to provide superior perform-
ance on dry roads. Summer tire per-
formance is substantially reduced in
snow and ice. Summer tires do not
have the tire traction rating M+S
(Mud and Snow) on the tire side wall.
if you plan to operate your vehicle in
snowy or icy conditions, Kia recom-
mends the use of snow tires or all
season tires on all four wheels.
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
Maintenance
487
Snow tires
If you equip your vehicle with snow
tires, they should be the same size
and have the same load capacity as
the original tires. Snow tires should
be installed on all four wheels; other-
wise, poor handling may result.
Snow tires should carry 4 psi (28
kPa) more air pressure than the
pressure recommended for the stan-
dard tires on the tire label on the dri-
ver's side of the center pillar, or up to
the maximum pressure shown on the
tire sidewall, whichever is less.
Do not drive faster than 75 mph (120
km/h) when your vehicle is equipped
with snow tires.
Tire chains
Tire chains, if necessary, should be
installed on the front wheels.
Be sure that the chains are installed
in accordance with the manufactur-
er's instructions.
To minimize tire and chain wear, do
not continue to use tire chains when
they are no longer needed.
• When driving on roads covered
with snow or ice, drive at less than
20 mph (30 km/h).
• Use the SAE “S” class or wire
chains.
• If you hear noise caused by chains
contacting the body, retighten the
chain to avoid contact with the
vehicle body.
• To prevent body damage, retighten
the chains after driving 0.3~0.6
miles (0.5~1.0 km).
• Do not use tire chains on vehicles
equipped with aluminum wheels.
In unavoidable circumstance, use
a wire type chain.
• Use wire chains less than 0.59
inches (15 mm) to prevent damage
to the chain’s connection.
Radial-ply tires
Radial-ply tires provide improved
tread life, road hazard resistance and
smoother high speed ride. The radi-
al-ply tires used on this vehicle are of
belted construction, and are selected
to complement the ride and handling
characteristics of your vehicle.
Radial-ply tires have the same load
carrying capacity, as bias-ply or bias
belted tires of the same size, and use
the same recommended inflation
pressure. Mixing of radial-ply tires
with bias-ply or bias belted tires is
not recommended. Any combina-
tions of radial-ply and bias-ply or bias
belted tires when used on the same
vehicle will seriously deteriorate
vehicle handling. The best rule to fol-
low is: Identical radial-ply tires should
always be used as a set of four.
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
749
Maintenance
Longer wearing tires can be more
susceptible to irregular tread wear. It
is very important to follow the tire
rotation interval shown in this section
to achieve the tread life potential of
these tires. Cuts and punctures in
radial-ply tires are repairable only in
the tread area, because of sidewall
flexing. Consult your tire dealer for
radial-ply tire repairs.
Low aspect ratio tire
(if equipped)
Low aspect ratio tires, whose aspect
ratio is lower than 50, are provided
for sporty looks.
Because the low aspect ratio tires
are optimized for handling and brak-
ing, it may be more uncomfortable to
ride in and there is more noise com-
pare with normal tires.
CAUTION
Because the sidewall of the low
aspect ratio tire is shorter than
the normal, the wheel and tire of
the low aspect ratio tire is easi-
er to be damaged. So, follow the
instructions below.
- When driving on a rough road
or off road, drive cautiously
because tires and wheels may
be damaged. And after driving,
inspect tires and wheels.
- When passing over a pothole,
speed bump, manhole, or curb
stone, drive slowly so that the
tires and wheels are not dam-
aged.
- If the tire is impacted, we rec-
ommend that you inspect the
tire condition or contact an
authorized Kia dealer.
- To prevent damage to the tire,
inspect the tire condition and
pressure every 1,900 miles
(3,000 km).
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
Maintenance
507
• It is not easy to recognize the tire
damage with your own eyes. But if
there is the slightest hint of tire
damage, even though you cannot
see the tire damage with your own
eyes, have the tire checked or
replaced because the tire damage
may cause air leakage from the
tire.
• If the tire is damaged by driving on
a rough road, off road, pothole,
manhole, or curb stone, it will not
be covered by the warranty.
• You can find out the tire information
on the tire sidewall.
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
751
Maintenance
FUSES
A vehicle’s electrical system is pro-
tected from electrical overload dam-
age by fuses.
This vehicle has 3 (or 4) fuse panels,
one located in the driver’s side panel
bolster, the other in the motor com-
partment near the battery.
If any of your vehicle’s lights, acces-
sories, or controls do not work, check
the appropriate circuit fuse. If a fuse
has blown, the element inside the
fuse will melt.
If the electrical system does not
work, first check the driver’s side
fuse panel.
Always replace a blown fuse with
one of the same rating.
If the replacement fuse blows, this
indicates an electrical problem. Avoid
using the system involved and imme-
diately consult an authorized Kia
dealer.
Three kinds of fuses are used: micro
mini type for lower amperage rating,
cartridge type, and multi fuse for
higher amperage ratings.
• Replace the fuse with the ignition
“OFF”, switch off of all electrical
devices and then separation (-) ter-
minal from the battery in a safe
place.
• Do not arbitrarily modify or add-on
electric wiring of the vehicle.
WARNING - Fuse
replacement
• Never replace a fuse with any-
thing but another fuse of the
same rating.
• A higher capacity fuse could
cause damage and possibly a
fire.
• Never install a wire or alu-
minum foil instead of the
proper fuse - even as a tem-
porary repair. It may cause
extensive wiring damage and
a possible fire.
OPS073054
Normal
Normal
■ Micro mini type
■ Cartridge type
■ Multi fuse
Blown
Blown
Normal
Blown
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
Maintenance
527
✽✽
NOTICE
The actual fuse/relay panel label
may differ depending on equip-
ment/options.
CAUTION - Fuse
Replacement
Do not use a screwdriver or any
other metal object to remove
fuses because it may cause a
short circuit and damage the
system.
CAUTION - Fuse
Replacement
Do not input any other objects
except fuses or relays into
fuse/relay terminals such as a
driver or wiring. It may cause
contact failure and system mal-
function.
WARNING - Fuse fire
• When replacing a blown fuse
or relay with a new one, make
sure the new fuse or relay fits
tightly into the clips The
incomplete fastening fuse or
relay may cause the vehicle
wiring and electric systems
damage and a possible fire.
• Do not remove fuses, relays
and terminals fastened with
bolts or nuts.The fuses, relays
and terminals may be fastened
incompletely, and it may cause
a possible fire. If fuses, relays
and terminals fastened with
bolts or nuts are blown, we
recommend that you consult
with an authorized Kia dealer.
WARNING - Electrical Fire
• Always ensure replacements
fuses and relays are securely
fastened when installed.
Failure to do so can result in a
vehicle fire.
• We recommend that you do not
remove fuses, relays and termi-
nals that are fastened with
bolts or nuts. If they are not
completely re-installed, such
looseness may cause electrical
arcing and a possible fire. If
fuses, relays and terminals fas-
tened with bolts or nuts need
replacement, consult with an
authorized Kia dealer.
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
753
Maintenance
Inner panel fuse replacement
1. Turn the ignition switch and all
other switches off.
2. Open the fuse panel cover.
3. Pull the suspected fuse straight
out. Use the fuse puller provided
on the motor compartment fuse
panel cover.
4. Check the removed fuse; replace it
if it is blown.
Spare fuses are provided in the
motor compartment fuse panel.
5. Push in a new fuse of the same
rating, and make sure it fits tightly
in the clips.
If it fits loosely, consult an authorized
Kia dealer.
If you do not have a spare, use a
fuse of the same rating from a circuit
you may not need for operating the
vehicle, such as the power outlet
fuse.
If the headlights or other electrical
components do not work and the
fuses are OK, check the fuse panel
in the motor compartment. If a fuse is
blown, it must be replaced.
OPSE074007
OPSE075006N
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
Maintenance
547
Fuse switch
Always, put the fuse switch at the ON
position.
If you move the switch to the OFF
position, some items such as audio
and digital clock must be reset and
transmitter (or smart key) may not
work properly.
✽✽
NOTICE
If you need to park your vehicle for
prolonged periods more than 1
month, move the transportation fuse
switch to the OFF position to pre-
vent the battery being discharged.
Motor compartment fuse
replacement
1. Turn the ignition switch and all
other switches off.
2. Remove the fuse panel cover by
pressing the tab and pulling the
cover up.
3. Check the removed fuse; replace it
if it is blown. To remove or insert
the fuse, use the fuse puller in the
motor compartment fuse panel.
4. Push in a new fuse of the same
rating, and make sure it fits tightly
in the clips. If it fits loosely, consult
an authorized Kia dealer.
OPSE074009
OPSE075008N
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
755
Maintenance
Multi fuse
If the multi fuse is blown, it must be
removed as follows:
1. Turn off the vehicle.
2. Disconnect the negative battery
cable.
3. Remove the nuts shown in the pic-
ture above.
4. Replace the fuse with a new one
of the same rating.
5. Reinstall in the reverse order of
removal.
✽✽
NOTICE
If the multi fuse is blown, consult an
authorized Kia dealer.
OPSE074033
CAUTION - Fuse panel
covers
After checking the fuse panel in
the motor compartment, secure-
ly install the fuse panel cover
with using cover locking sound.
If not, electrical failures may
occur from water contact.
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
Maintenance
567
Fuse/relay panel description
Inside the fuse/relay panel covers,
you can find the fuse/relay label
describing fuse/relay name and
capacity.
✽✽
NOTICE
Not all fuse panel descriptions in
this manual may be applicable to
your vehicle. It is accurate at the
time of printing. When you inspect
the fuse panel in your vehicle, refer
to the fuse panel label.
OPSE075010N
OPSE074028L
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
757
Maintenance
Instrument panel (Driver’s side fuse panel)
Fuse Name Fuse rating Circuit Protected
POWER OUTLET 2 20A Front Power Outlet
ACC 10A
BCM, Mood Lamp Module, A/V & Navigation Head Unit, Smart Key Control Module, Power Outside Mirror
Switch, E/R Junction Block (Power Outlet Relay)
POWER OUTLET 1 20A Rear Power Outlet
DRL 10A BCM
MODULE 6 7.5A Front Seat Warmer Module, Driver Air Ventilation Seat Control Module
WIPER FRT 1 25A E/R Junction Block (Front Wiper Low Relay)
WIPER RR 15A Rear Wiper Motor, Multifunction Switch
MODULE 5 7.5A BCM, Smart Key Control Module
WIPER FRT 2 10A BCM, Multifunction Switch, PCB Block (Front Wiper High Relay)
HTD STRG 15A Clock Spring (Steering Wheel Heated)
A/CON 7.5A A/C Control Module, Heater Assembly (Cluster Ionizer)
HTD MIRR 10A A/C Control Module, Driver/Passenger Power Outside Mirror, Rear Defogger
TAIL GATE OPEN 15A Tail Gate Open Relay
S/HEATER FRT 25A Front Seat Warmer Module, Driver Air Ventilation Seat Control Module
DR LOCK 20A Door Lock Relay, Door Unlock Relay, Two Turn Unlock Relay
A/BAG IND 7.5A Instrument Cluster
AIR BAG 15A SRS Control Module
MODULE 4 10A Electro Chromic Mirror, Front Seat Warmer Module, Driver Air Ventilation Seat Control Module
STOP LAMP 15A Stop Signal Electronic Module
MODULE 7 10A Sport Mode Switch, ICM Relay Box
P/WINDOW RH 25A Power Window RH Relay
P/WINDOW LH 25A Power Window LH Relay, Driver Safety Power Window Module
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
Maintenance
587
Fuse Name Fuse rating Circuit Protected
MODULE 1 10A BCM
IBAU 10A Integrated Brake Actuation Unit
MODULE 2 10A
Tire Pressure Monitoring Module, Crash Pad Switch, Center Fascia Switch, Electronic Parking Brake
Module, Stop Lamp Switch, Rear Parking Assist Sensor RH/LH (IN/OUT), Front Parking Assit Sensor
LH/RH (OUT/IN)
MODULE 3 10A ATM Lever Indicator, Multipurpose Check Connector, PCB Block (IG3 #4 Relay)
PDM 3 7.5A Smart Key Control Module
IOD 2 15A A/V & Navigation Head Unit
IOD 3 7.5A ICM Relay Box (Outside Mirror Folding Relay, Outside Mirror Unfolding Relay)
CLUSTER 10A Instrument Cluster
IG1 15A EPCU
IOD 4 7.5A
Instrument Cluster, Tire Pressure Monitoring Module, Data Link Connector, Multipurpose Check Connector,
A/C Control Module, BCM
MDPS 7.5A MDPS Unit
START 7.5A Transaxle Range Switch
IOD 1 7.5A Overhead Console Lamp, Vanity Lamp LH/RH, Room Lamp, Glove Box Lamp, Luggage Lamp
PDM 2 7.5A Smart Key Control Module
PDM 1 20A Smart Key Control Module
BRAKE SWITCH 10A Smart Key Control Module, Stop Lamp Switch
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
Maintenance
607
Fuse Name Fuse rating Circuit Protected
MDPS 80A MDPS Unit
ALT 150A Alternator
B+1 50A
Smart Junction Block (Fuse - (S/HEATER FRT, TAIL GATE OPEN, DR LOCK, P/WINDOW LH, P/WINDOW
RH, MODULE 7))
B+2 50A Smart Junction Block (Fuse - (STOP LAMP) Arisu-LT2)
B+3 50A
Smart Junction Block (Fuse - (PDM 1, PDM 2, BRAKE SWITCH, Leak Current Autocut Device) IPS1,
Arisu-LT1)
IG2 40A PCB Block (Button Start (IG2) Relay)
POWER OUTLET 20A Power Outlet Relay
OBC 10A OBC Unit, Rear Heated Relay
BMS 10A BMS Control Module
EPCU 20A EPCU
CHARGER 2 10A Normal Charge Port Lmap
C/FAN 40A COOLING FAN 1 Relay, COOLING FAN 2 Relay
RR HTD 40A Rear Heated Relay
IBAU 2 30A Integrated Brake Actuation Unit
IBAU 1 40A Integrated Brake Actuation Unit
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
761
Maintenance
Fuse Name Fuse rating Circuit Protected
IG1 40A Button Start (ACC) Relay, Button Start (IG1) Relay
BLOWER 40A Blower Relay
IG3 1 30A IG3 #1/#2/#3/#4/#5 Relay
EPB 1 30A Electronic Parking Brake Module
EPB 2 30A Electronic Parking Brake Module
IG3 2 10A
Blower Relay, A/C Control Module, A/C Compressor, E/R Junction Block (Cooling Fan 1/2 Relay), Heater
Assembly (PTC Heater)
CHARGER 1 10A OBC Unit, BMS Control Module
EWP 10A Electronic Water Pump
IG3 3 15A EPCU, Transaxle Range Switch, A/V & Navigation Head Unit, Instrument Cluster
HORN 15A Horn Relay
B/UP LAMP 10A Transaxle Range Switch, EPCU
BATTERY C/FAN 25A Battery C/FAN Relay
No. Relay Name Type
E41 Power Outlet Relay PLUG MICRO
E42 C/FAN 1 Relay PLUG MICRO
E43 RR HTD Relay PLUG MICRO
E44 C/FAN 2 Relay PLUG MINI
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
763
Maintenance
LIGHT BULBS
Use only the bulbs of the specified
wattage.
• If you don’t have necessary tools,
the correct bulbs and the expertise,
consult an authorized Kia dealer. In
many cases, it is difficult to replace
vehicle light bulbs because other
parts of the vehicle must be
removed before you can get to the
bulb. This is especially true if you
have to remove the headlight
assembly to get to the bulb(s).
Removing/installing the headlight
assembly can result in damage to
the vehicle.
• Do not install additional bulb or
LED. If you install that, the lamp
may not be operated properly and
fuse box or electric wiring system
may have problem.
WARNING - Lights
Prior to working on the light,
firmly apply the parking brake,
ensure that the ignition switch
is turned to the LOCK position
and turn off the lights to avoid
sudden movement of the vehi-
cle and burning your fingers or
receiving an electric shock.
CAUTION - Light
replacement
Be sure to replace the burned-
out bulb with one of the same
wattage rating. Otherwise, it
may cause damage to the fuse
or electric wiring system.
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
Maintenance
647
Front light replacement
(1) Headlight (High)
(2) Headlight (Low)
(3) Front position light/
Daytime running light
(if equipped)
(4) Front turn signal
(5) Front side marker light
(6) Front fog light (if equipped)
If the headlight aiming adjustment is
necessary after the headlight
assembly is reinstalled, consult an
authorized Kia dealer.
OPS073020
OHD076046
WARNING - Halogen
bulbs
Handle halogen bulbs with care.
• Halogen bulbs contain pres-
surized gas that will produce
flying pieces of glass if bro-
ken.
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
765
Maintenance
• Always handle them carefully, and
avoid scratches and abrasions. If
the bulbs are lit, avoid contact with
liquids. Never touch the glass with
bare hands. Residual oil may
cause the bulb to overheat and
burst when lit. A bulb should be
operated only when installed in a
headlight.
• If a bulb becomes damaged or
cracked, replace it immediately
and carefully dispose of it.
• Wear eye protection when chang-
ing a bulb. Allow the bulb to cool
down before handling it.
1. Turn off the vehicle and open the
hood.
2. Disconnect the power connector
from the back of the headlight
assembly.
3. Disconnect the negative battery
cable.
4. Loosen the retaining bolts.
OPSE074018
OPSE074019
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
Maintenance
667
5. Pull out the end of the front
bumper.
If you can reach the bulb without
removing the headlight assembly,
you do not need to do step 4,5 and 6.
6. Remove the headlight assembly
from the body of the vehicle.
Headlight bulb (High, Low)
Follow the steps 1 to 6 from the pre-
vious page.
7. Remove the headlight bulb cover
by turning it counterclockwise.
8. Disconnect the headlight bulb
socket-connector.
9. Unsnap the headlight bulb retain-
ing wire by depressing the end
and pushing it upward.
10. Remove the bulb from the head-
light assembly.
11. Install a new headlight bulb and
snap the headlight bulb retaining
wire into position by aligning the
wire with the groove on the bulb.
12. Connect the headlight bulb sock-
et connector.
13. Install the headlight bulb cover by
turning it clockwise.
14. Connect the power connector to
the back of the headlight assem-
bly.
15. Reinstall the headlight assembly
to the body of the vehicle.
OPSE074031L
High
Low
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
767
Maintenance
Front turn signal / position light /
DRL
LED type
If the light bulb is not operating, have
the vehicle checked by an authorized
Kia dealer.
Front side marker
Follow the steps 1 to 6 from the pre-
vious page.
7.Remove the socket from the
assembly by turning the socket
counterclockwise until the tabs on
the socket align with the slots on
the assembly.
8.Pull the bulb out of the socket.
9.Insert a new bulb into the socket.
10. Install the socket into the assem-
bly by aligning the tabs on the
socket with the slots on the
assembly and turning the socket
clockwise.
Front fog lamp bulbs
(if equipped)
1. Remove the front bumper under
cover.
2. Reach your hand into the back of
the front bumper.
OPSE074017
Position
light/DRL
Turn signal
light
OPS073028
OPSE074029L
OPS073025
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
Maintenance
687
3. Disconnect the power connector
from the socket.
4. Remove the bulb-socket from the
housing by turning the socket
counter clockwise until the tabs on
the socket align with the slots on
the housing.
5. Install the new bulb-socket into the
housing by aligning the tabs on
the socket with the slots in the
housing. Push the socket into the
housing and turn the socket clock-
wise.
6. Connect the power connector to
the socket.
7. Reinstall the front bumper under
cover.
✽✽
NOTICE
If the headlight aiming adjustment
is necessary after the headlight
assembly is reinstalled, consult an
authorized Kia dealer.
Side repeater light bulb
replacement (if equipped)
If the light bulb is not operating, have
the vehicle checked by an authorized
Kia dealer.
Rear combination light bulb
replacement
(1) Tail and stop light/
Side marker light (LED)
(2) Tail and side marker light(LED)
(3) Rear turn signal light
(4) Back-up light
OPS073035 OPSE074020
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
769
Maintenance
1. Open the tailgate.
2. Loosen the light assembly retain-
ing screws with a philips head
screwdriver.
3. Remove the rear combination light
assembly from the body of the
vehicle.
Turn signal light
4. Remove the socket from the
assembly by turning the socket
counterclockwise until the tabs on
the socket align with the slots on
the assembly.
5. Remove the bulb from the socket
by pressing it in and rotating it
counterclockwise until the tabs on
the bulb align with the slots in the
socket.
6. Insert a new bulb by inserting it
into the socket and rotating it until
it locks into place.
7. Install the socket in the assembly
by aligning the tabs on the socket
with the slots in the assembly and
turning the socket clockwise.
8. Reinstall the light assembly to the
body of the vehicle.
OPS073031
OPS073034
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
Maintenance
707
Back-up light
Follow the steps 1 to 3 from the pre-
vious page.
4. Remove the socket from the
assembly by turning the socket
counterclockwise until the tabs on
the socket align with the slots on
the assembly.
5. Pull the bulb out of the socket.
6. Insert a new bulb into the socket.
7. Install the socket into the assem-
bly by aligning the tabs on the
socket with the slots on the
assembly and turning the socket
clockwise.
8. Reinstall the light assembly to the
body of the vehicle.
Tail,stop light and side marker light
(LED type)
If the light does not operate, have the
system be checked by an authorized
Kia dealer.
High mounted stop light
replacement
1. Open the tailgate.
2. Remove the cover.
3. Loosen the retaining bolts.
OPS073036
OPS073052
OPS073045
Back-up
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
771
Maintenance
LED type
4.Pull out the module from the high
mounted stop light assembly by
pulling both clips.
5.Replace the LED with new one.
6.Reinstall in the reverse order.
License plate light bulb
replacement
1. Remove the lens by pressing the
tabs.
2. Remove the socket from the lens.
3. Remove the bulb by turning it
counter clockwise.
4. Install a new bulb in the socket
and install the socket to the lens.
5. Reinstall the lens securely.
OPS073053
OPS073050
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
Maintenance
727
Interior light bulb replacement
1. Using a flat-blade screwdriver,
gently pry the lens from the interi-
or light housing.
2. Remove the bulb by pulling it
straight out.
3. Install a new bulb in the socket.
4. Align the lens tabs with the interior
light housing notches and snap
the lens into place.
Map lamp
Room lamp
Glove box lamp
Luggage lamp
Vanity mirror lamp
OPS073041/OPS073042/OPS073043/
OPS073044/OXM079041
WARNING - Interior lights
Prior to working on the Interior
Lights, ensure that the “OFF”
button is depressed to avoid
burning your fingers or receiv-
ing an electric shock.
CAUTION
Be careful not to dirty or dam-
age the lens, lens tab, and plas-
tic housings.
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
773
Maintenance
APPEARANCE CARE
Exterior care
Exterior general caution
It is very important to follow the label
directions when using any chemical
cleaner or polish. Read all warning
and caution statements that appear
on the label.
Finish maintenance
Washing
To help protect your vehicle’s finish
from rust and deterioration, wash it
thoroughly and frequently at least once
a month with lukewarm or cold water.
If you use your vehicle for off-road
driving, you should wash it after each
off-road trip. Pay special attention to
the removal of any accumulation of
salt, dirt, mud, and other foreign mate-
rials. Make sure the drain holes in the
lower edges of the doors and rocker
panels are kept clear and clean.
Insects, tar, tree sap, bird droppings,
industrial pollution and similar
deposits can damage your vehicle’s
finish if not removed immediately.
Even prompt washing with plain
water may not completely remove all
these deposits. A mild soap, safe for
use on painted surfaces, may be
used.
After washing, rinse the vehicle thor-
oughly with lukewarm or cold water.
Do not allow soap to dry on the fin-
ish.
After washing the vehicle, test the
brakes while driving slowly to see if
they have been affected by water. If
braking performance is impaired, dry
the brakes by applying them lightly
while maintaining a slow forward
speed.
CAUTION
• Do not use strong soap, chem-
ical detergents or hot water,
and do not wash the vehicle in
direct sunlight or when the
body of the vehicle is warm.
• Be careful when washing the
side windows of your vehicle.
Especially, with high-pressure
water. Water may leak through
the windows and wet the inte-
rior.
• To prevent damage to the
plastic parts and lamps, do
not clean with chemical sol-
vents or strong detergents.
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
Maintenance
747
High-pressure washing
• When using high-pressure wash-
ers, make sure to maintain suffi-
cient distance from the vehicle.
Insufficient clearance or excessive
pressure can lead to component
damage or water penetration.
• Do not spray the camera, sensors
or its surrounding area directly with
a high pressure washer. Shock
applied from high pressure water
may cause the device to not oper-
ate normally.
• Do not bring the nozzle tip close to
boots (rubber or plastic covers) or
connectors as they may be dam-
aged if they come into contact with
high pressure water.
Waxing
Wax the vehicle when water will no
longer bead on the paint.
Always wash and dry the vehicle
before waxing. Use a good quality
liquid or paste wax, and follow the
manufacturer’s instructions. Wax all
metal trim to protect it and to main-
tain its luster.
Removing oil, tar, and similar materi-
als with a spot remover will usually
strip the wax from the finish. Be sure to
re-wax these areas even if the rest of
the vehicle does not yet need waxing.
CAUTION - Wetting motor
compartment
• Water washing in the motor-
compartment including high
pressure water washing may
cause the failure of electrical
circuits located in the motor
compartment.
• Never allow water or other liq-
uids to come in contact with
electrical/electronic compo-
nents inside the vehicle as
this may damage them.
OJB037800
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
775
Maintenance
Finish damage repair
Deep scratches or stone chips in the
painted surface must be repaired
promptly. Exposed metal will quickly
rust and may develop into a major
repair expense.
✽✽
NOTICE
If your vehicle is damaged and
requires any metal repair or
replacement, be sure the body shop
applies anti-corrosion materials to
the parts repaired or replaced.
Bright-metal maintenance
• To remove road tar and insects,
use a tar remover, not a scraper or
other sharp object.
• To protect the surfaces of bright-
metal parts from corrosion, apply a
coating of wax or chrome preser-
vative and rub to a high luster.
• During winter weather or in coastal
areas, cover the bright metal parts
with a heavier coating of wax or
preservative. If necessary, coat the
parts with non-corrosive petroleum
jelly or other protective compound.
Underbody maintenance
Corrosive materials used for ice and
snow removal and dust control may
collect on the underbody. If these
materials are not removed, acceler-
ated rusting can occur on underbody
parts such as the fuel lines, frame,
floor pan and exhaust system, even
though they have been treated with
rust protection.
Thoroughly flush the vehicle under-
body and wheel openings with luke-
warm or cold water once a month,
after off-road driving and at the end
of each winter. Pay special attention
to these areas because it is difficult
to see all the mud and dirt. It will do
more harm than good to wet down
the road grime without removing it.
The lower edges of the doors, rocker
panels, and frame members have
drain holes that should not be allowed
to clog with dirt; trapped water in
these areas can cause rusting.
CAUTION - Drying vehicle
• Wiping dust or dirt off the
body with a dry cloth will
scratch the finish.
• Do not use steel wool, abra-
sive cleaners, acid detergents
or strong detergents contain-
ing high alkaline or caustic
agents on chrome-plated or
anodized aluminum parts.
This may result in damage to
the protective coating and
cause discoloration or paint
deterioration.
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
Maintenance
767
Aluminum wheel maintenance
The aluminum wheels are coated
with a clear protective finish.
• Do not use any abrasive cleaner,
polishing compound, solvent, or
wire brushes on aluminum wheels.
They may scratch or damage the
finish.
• Clean the wheel when it has
cooled.
• Use only a mild soap or neutral
detergent, and rinse thoroughly
with water. Also, be sure to clean
the wheels after driving on salted
roads. This helps prevent corro-
sion.
• Avoid washing the wheels with
highspeed vehicle wash brushes.
• Do not use any alkaline or acid
detergents It may damage and cor-
rode the aluminum wheels coated
with a clear protective finish.
Corrosion protection
Protecting your vehicle from corro-
sion
By using the most advanced design
and construction practices to combat
corrosion, we produce vehicles of
the highest quality. However, this is
only part of the job. To achieve the
long-term corrosion resistance your
vehicle can deliver, the owner's
cooperation and assistance is also
required.
Common causes of corrosion
The most common causes of corro-
sion on your vehicle are:
• Road salt, dirt and moisture that is
allowed to accumulate underneath
the vehicle.
• Removal of paint or protective
coatings by stones, gravel, abra-
sion or minor scrapes and dents
which leave unprotected metal
exposed to corrosion.
High-corrosion areas
If you live in an area where your vehi-
cle is regularly exposed to corrosive
materials, corrosion protection is
particularly important. Some of the
common causes of accelerated cor-
rosion are road salts, dust control
chemicals, ocean air and industrial
pollution.
Moisture breeds corrosion
Moisture creates the conditions in
which corrosion is most likely to
occur. For example, corrosion is
accelerated by high humidity, partic-
ularly when temperatures are just
above freezing. In such conditions,
the corrosive material is kept in con-
tact with the vehicle’s surface by
moisture that evaporates slowly.
Mud is particularly corrosive
because it dries slowly and holds
moisture in contact with the vehicle.
Although the mud appears to be dry,
it can still retain the moisture and
promote corrosion.
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
777
Maintenance
High temperatures can also acceler-
ate corrosion of parts that are not
properly ventilated so the moisture
can be dispersed. For all these rea-
sons, it is particularly important to
keep your vehicle clean and free of
mud or accumulations of other mate-
rials. This applies not only to the vis-
ible surfaces but particularly to the
underside of the vehicle.
To help prevent corrosion
You can help prevent corrosion from
beginning by observing the following:
Keep your vehicle clean
The best way to prevent corrosion is
to keep your vehicle clean and free
of corrosive materials. Attention to
the underside of the vehicle is partic-
ularly important.
• If you live in a high-corrosion area
— where road salts are used, near
the ocean, areas with industrial
pollution, acid rain, etc.—, you
should take extra care to prevent
corrosion. In winter, hose off the
underside of your vehicle at least
once a month and be sure to clean
the underside thoroughly when
winter is over.
• When cleaning underneath the
vehicle, give particular attention to
the components under the fenders
and other areas that are hidden
from view. Do a thorough job; just
dampening the accumulated mud
rather than washing it away will
accelerate corrosion rather than
prevent it. Water under high pres-
sure and steam are particularly
effective in removing accumulated
mud and corrosive materials.
• When cleaning lower door panels,
rocker panels and frame members,
be sure that drain holes are kept
open so that moisture can escape
and not be trapped inside to accel-
erate corrosion.
Keep your garage dry
Don't park your vehicle in a damp,
poorly ventilated garage. This cre-
ates a favorable environment for cor-
rosion. This is particularly true if you
wash your vehicle in the garage or
drive it into the garage when it is still
wet or covered with snow, ice or
mud. Even a heated garage can con-
tribute to corrosion unless it is well
ventilated so moisture is dispersed.
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
Maintenance
787
Keep paint and trim in good con-
dition
Scratches or chips in the finish
should be covered with "touch-up"
paint as soon as possible to reduce
the possibility of corrosion. If bare
metal is showing through, the atten-
tion of a qualified body and paint
shop is recommended.
Bird droppings : Bird droppings are
highly corrosive and may damage
painted surfaces in just a few hours.
Always remove bird droppings as
soon as possible.
Don't neglect the interior
Moisture can collect under the floor
mats and carpeting and cause corro-
sion. Check under the mats periodi-
cally to be sure the carpeting is dry.
Use particular care if you carry fertil-
izers, cleaning materials or chemi-
cals in the vehicle.
These should be carried only in
proper containers and any spills or
leaks should be cleaned up, flushed
with clean water and thoroughly
dried.
Interior care
Interior general precautions
Prevent chemicals such as perfume,
cosmetic oil, sun cream, hand clean-
er, and air freshener from contacting
the interior parts because they may
cause damage or discoloration. If
they do contact the interior parts,
wipe them off immediately. If neces-
sary, use a vinyl cleaner, see product
instructions for correct usage.
CAUTION - Electrical
components
Never allow water or other liq-
uids to come in contact with
electrical/electronic compo-
nents inside the vehicle as this
may damage them.
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
779
Maintenance
Cleaning the upholstery and inte-
rior trim
Vinyl
Remove dust and loose dirt from
vinyl with a whisk broom or vacuum
cleaner. Clean vinyl surfaces with a
vinyl cleaner.
Fabric
Remove dust and loose dirt from fab-
ric with a whisk broom or vacuum
cleaner. Clean with a mild soap solu-
tion recommended for upholstery or
carpets. Remove fresh spots imme-
diately with a fabric spot cleaner. If
fresh spots do not receive immediate
attention, the fabric can be stained
and its color can be affected. Also, its
fire-resistant properties can be
reduced if the material is not proper-
ly maintained.
Using anything but recommended
cleaners and procedures may affect
the fabric’s appearance and fire-
resistant properties.
Cleaning the lap/shoulder belt
webbing
Clean the belt webbing with any mild
soap solution recommended for
cleaning upholstery or carpet. Follow
the instructions provided with the
soap. Do not bleach or re-dye the
webbing because this may weaken
it.
Cleaning the interior window glass
If the interior glass surfaces of the
vehicle become fogged (that is, cov-
ered with an oily, greasy or waxy
film), they should be cleaned with a
glass cleaner. Follow the directions
on the glass cleaner container.
CAUTION - Leather
When cleaning leather products
(steering wheel, seats etc.), use
neutral detergents or low alco-
hol content solutions. If you use
high alcohol content solutions
or acid/alkaline detergents, the
color of the leather may fade or
the surface may get stripped off.
CAUTION - Rear window
Do not scrape or scratch the
inside of the rear window. This
may result in damage of the rear
window defroster grid.
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
Maintenance
807
CALIFORNIA PERCHLORATE NOTICE
Perchlorate Material-special handling
may apply, See www.dtsc.ca.gov/haz-
ardouswaste/ perchlorate.
Notice to California Vehicle Dismantlers:
Perchlorate containing materials,
such as air bag inflators, seatbelt
pretensioners and keyless remote
entry batteries, must be disposed of
according to Title 22 California Code
of Regulations Section 67384.10 (a).
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
Specifications, Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Power electric specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Gross vehicle weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Luggage volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Air conditioning system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Bulb wattage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Tires and wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Recommended lubricants and capacities. . . . . . . . 8-6
Vehicle identification number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Vehicle certification label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Motor number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Tire specification and pressure label . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Air conditioner compressor label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Refrigerant label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
8
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
POWER ELECTRIC SPECIFICATIONS
Item in (mm)
Overall length
162.9 (4,140)
Overall width
70.9 (1,800)
Overall height
62.9 (1,600)
Front tread
205/60R16 62.1 ( 1,576)
Rear tread
205/60R16 62.4 ( 1,585)
Wheelbase
101.2 ( 2,570)
MOTOR
Max. Output (KW) 81.4
Max. Torque (Nm) 285
EPCU
INVERTER Input Voltage 240~413
LDC Max. Output (KW) 1.7
CHARGER (OBC)
Max. Output (KW) 6.6
Specifications, Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
28
DIMENSIONS
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
83
Specifications, Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
GROSS VEHICLE WEIGHT
LUGGAGE VOLUME
Item
Gross vehicle weight
lbs. (kg)
4,321 ( 1,960)
Item
Luggage volume (SAE)
l (cu ft)
532 (18.79)*
1
/ 1402 (49.51)*
2
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM
Item
Weight of volume
Classification
A/CON (STD) HEATPUMP (OPT)
Refrigerant
550±25g 900±25g R-134a
Compressor lubricant
180±10g POE (RB100EV)
We recommend that you contact an authorized Kia dealer for more details.
*
1
Back seat upright with luggage under tray
*
2
Back seat folded with luggage under tray
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
Specifications, Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
48
BULB WATTAGE
Light Bulb Wattage Bulb type
Front
Headlamps (High) 55 H7LL
Headlamps (Low) 55 H7LL
Front turn signal lamps LED LED
Front position lamps LED LED
Front fog lamps* 55 9006
Front day time running lamps* LED LED
Front side marker 5 W5W
Side Repeater lamps (Outside Mirror)* LED LED
Rear
Rear tail,stop lamps and side marker LED LED
Rear tail lamps and side marker LED LED
Rear turn signal lamps 27 PY27W
Back-up lamps 16 W16W
High mounted stop lamps LED LED
License plate lamps 5 W5W
Interior
Map lamps 8 (LED*) FESTOON (LED*)
Room lamps 8 (LED*) FESTOON (LED*)
Personal lamps* LED* LED*
Vanity mirror lamps 5 FESTOON
Glove box lamps 5 FESTOON
Luggage lamp 8 (LED*) FESTOON (LED*)
*: If equipped
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
85
Specifications, Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
TIRES AND WHEELS
*
1
: Load Index
*
2
: Speed Symbol
Item Tire size
Wheel
size
Load Capacity Speed capacity
Inflation pressure psi (kPa)
Wheel lug nut
torque
lb•ft, N•m (kg•m)
Normal load Maximum load
LI *
1
Kg SS *
2
Km/h Front Rear Front Rear
Full size
tire
205/60R16 6.5J×16 92 630 H 210 33 (230)
65~79, 88~107
(9~11)
CAUTION
When replacing tires, use the same size originally supplied with the vehicle.
Using tires of a different size can damage the related parts or make it work irregularly.
✽✽
NOTICE
We recommend that when replacing tires, use the same originally supplied with the vehicles.
If not, that affects driving performance.
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
Specifications, Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
68
Lubricant Volume Classification
Reduction gear oil
1.4±0.1 US qt.
(1.3±0.1l)
“75W/85,GL-4 or other brands meeting the GL-4
specification approved by Kia Motors Corp.”
Coolant
5.39 US qt.
(5.1l)
Mixture of antifreeze and water
(Ethylene glycol base coolant for aluminum radiator)
Brake fluid FMVSS116 DOT-3 or DOT-4
RECOMMENDED LUBRICANTS AND CAPACITIES
To help achieve proper performance, durability, use only lubricants of the proper quality for your vehicle.
These lubricants and fluids are recommended for use in your vehicle.
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
87
Specifications, Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN)
The vehicle identification number
(VIN) is the number used in register-
ing your vehicle and in all legal mat-
ters pertaining to its ownership, etc.
The number is punched on the floor
under the front passenger seat. To
check the number, remove the cover
(1).
The VIN is also on a plate attached
to the top of the dashboard. The
number on the plate can easily be
seen through the windshield from
outside.
The vehicle certification label
attached on the driver’s side center
pillar gives the vehicle identification
number (VIN).
OUN088001
■ Frame number
VEHICLE CERTIFICATION
LABEL
ORP082002
■ VIN label (if equipped)
ORP082004
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
Specifications, Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
88
The tires supplied on your new vehi-
cle are chosen to provide the best
performance for normal driving.
The tire label located on the driver's
side center pillar gives the tire pres-
sures recommended for your vehicle.
The motor number is stamped on the
motor compartment as shown in the
drawing.
A compressor label informs you the
type of compressor your vehicle is
equipped with such as model, suppli-
er part number, production number,
refrigerant and refrigerant oil.
TIRE SPECIFICATION AND
PRESSURE LABEL
MOTOR NUMBER
ORP082003
OPSE084001
AIR CONDITIONER
COMPRESSOR LABEL
OPSE084004N
OPSE084005N
■ Type A
■ Type B
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
Specifications, Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
108
Roadside Assistance is provided on all new current
model year Kia Vehicles from the date the vehicle is deliv-
ered to the first retail buyer or otherwise put into use (in-
service date), whichever is earlier, for a period of 60
months or 60,000 miles, whichever is earlier, subject to
the terms, conditions and exclusions set forth in the Kia
Warranty and Consumer Information Manual applicable
to your model year vehicle.
KMA reserves the right to limit or deny services or other
benefits to any owner or driver when, in KMA's judgment,
the claims and/or service requests are excessive in fre-
quency or type of occurrence.
Toll free consumer assistance
Kia's toll-free Consumer Assistance hot line is staffed
from 5:00 AM to 6:00 PM PST, Monday through Friday
and is accessible by dialing 1-800-333-4Kia (4542).
For more information regarding assistance available,
please refer to your Kia Warranty & Consumer
Information Manual.
Emergency roadside assistance
Kia's toll free Roadside Assistance hot line is staffed 24
hours a day, 365 days a year and is accessible by dialing
1-800-333-4Kia (4542).
Please note that you must provide your Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN) to verify coverage at the time
of your call. The VIN can be found on the dash of your
vehicle on the driver’s side, on the door jamb of the dri-
ver’s door, your vehicle’s registration or proof of insur-
ance card.
Kia utilizes a network of over 30,000 roadside assistance
providers. Should you accidentally, require a battery
jump, or need help changing a tire, a Kia Roadside
Assistance Representative will dispatch someone to,
change a flat tire with your inflated spare, or arrange a
battery jump to allow you to proceed to your destination.
We have access to a network of over 10,000 locksmiths
to help you should you become locked out of your Kia.
In the event that mechanical difficulty renders your vehi-
cle undriveable due to a warranty-related concern, Kia’s
Roadside Assistance Representative will arrange to
transport your vehicle to the nearest Kia dealer or to an
alternative service location.
CONSUMER ASSISTANCE (U.S. ONLY)
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
811
Specifications, Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
Your vehicle must be accessible to our dispatch transport
vehicle, as determined by our driver, to receive this serv-
ice.
✽✽
NOTICE
Roadside Assistance benefits are not available for any
Kia vehicle that has ever been or should be issued a “sal-
vage” title or similar “branded” title under any state’s
law or has been declared a “total loss” or equivalent by
a financial institution or insurance company.
Trip interruption
Trip interruption expense benefits are provided in the
event that a warranty-related disablement occurs more
than 150 miles from your home, and the repairs require
more than 24 hours to complete. Reasonable reimburse-
ment is included for meals, lodging, or rental vehicle
expenses. Trip interruption coverage is limited to $100
per day subject to a three day maximum limit per incident.
You must contact the Kia Roadside Assistance Center to
obtain pre-authorization of expenses. Once the Kia
Roadside Assistance Center gives authorization for trip
interruption benefits, they will assist you in making the
necessary arrangements. Insurance deductibles,
expenses, and claims paid by your insurance company or
other providers are not eligible for reimbursement.
Fleet vehicles are excluded from reimbursement under
Kia’s Trip Interruption Policy.
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
Specifications, Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
128
Registering your vehicle in a foreign country
If you plan to register your vehicle in a foreign country,
you should confirm that it conforms to the regulations in
that country. Even if you successfully register the vehicle
in a foreign country, you may experience the following
problems and should therefore consider the possibility of
having to deal with them:
1. The fuel specified for your vehicle may be unavailable.
2. We must, therefore, clearly state that when you leave
the country in which you purchased your Kia new and
register it in another country, vehicles like yours may
not be marketed in the new country of registration,
parts, servicing techniques and tools necessary to
maintain and repair your vehicle may be unavailable.
Even if vehicles like yours are sold there, mechanical
specifications required by the government may vary
enough from the country of purchase to cause addi-
tional problems.
3. There may not be an Authorized Kia Dealer in the area
in which you plan to register your vehicle. You may
additionally experience difficulty in obtaining services
in a foreign country for any number of reasons.
Further, we cannot assume any responsibility for prob-
lems that result from unsatisfactory service or lack of
service outside of the United States.
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
813
Specifications, Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
The electrical system of your vehicle is designed to per-
form under all reasonably expected operating conditions.
However, before any additional electrical equipment is
installed in your vehicle, consult an Authorized Kia
Dealer, in order to ensure that you do not void your war-
ranty.
Certain electrical equipment, or the way in which it is
installed, may adversely affect the operation of your vehi-
cle, including such systems as the engine control system,
the audio system and the electrical charging system and
thus potentially void all or part of your warranty.
We assume no responsibility for any expense you may
incur or for any malfunction of your vehicle or any of its
components or systems that may result from the installa-
tion of additional electrical equipment that is not supplied,
or recommended for installation by, Kia.
Installation of a mobile two-way radio system
If a mobile two-way radio system is installed improperly,
or if an excessively powerful type of system is used, other
electronic systems may be adversely affected. To avoid
damage to your vehicle, consult an Authorized Kia Dealer
concerning the proper equipment and installation.
Kia motor vehicles are designed and manufactured to
meet or exceed all applicable safety standards.
For your safety, however, we strongly urge you to read
and follow all directions in this Owner's Manual, particu-
larly the information under the headings "NOTICE",
"CAUTION" and "WARNING".
If, after reading this manual, you have any questions
regarding the operation of your vehicle, safety issues and
defects please contact your Kia's toll-free Consumer
Assistance hot line as below:
National Consumer Affairs Manager
Kia Motors America, Inc.
P.O. Box 52410
Irvine, CA 92619-2410
1-800-333-4Kia (4542)
ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT (U.S. ONLY)
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
Specifications, Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
148
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could
cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Kia
Motors America, Inc.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a
group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy cam-
paign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in indi-
vidual problems between you, your dealer, or Kia Motors
America, Inc.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety
Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-
9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:
Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Ave., SE., West
Building, Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain
other information about motor vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.
The following publications are available on
www.KiaTechinfo.com.
Service manual:
This manual covers maintenance and recommended pro-
cedures for repair to engine and chassis components. It
is written for the Journeyman mechanic, but is simple
enough for most mechanically inclined owners to under-
stand.
Electrical troubleshooting manual:
This manual complements the Service Manual by provid-
ing indepth troubleshooting information for each electrical
circuit in your vehicle.
Owner's manual:
This manual describes the overall features and operating
procedures for the vehicle.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
(U.S. ONLY)
ONLINE FACTORY AUTHORIZED MANUALS
(U.S. ONLY)
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
Index
2
I
A/V Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-48
Abnormal lamp operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-82
ACTIVE ECO SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Air bag warning label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-57
Air bag warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37
Air bags. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34
Air bag warning label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-57
Air bag warning light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37
Curtain air bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-50
Driver's and passenger's front air bag . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46
Inflation and non-inflation conditions . . . . . . . . . . . 3-51
Occupant Detection System (ODS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35
Side air bag. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-49
SRS components and functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38
Air conditioner compressor label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Airconditioning system
Automatic climate control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-94
Antenna. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-127
Anti-lock brake system (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
Appearance care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-73
Exterior care. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-73
Interior care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-78
Audio remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-128
Audio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-127
Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-127
Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-141
Audio remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-128
Aux, USB and iPod
®
port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-129
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-138
How vehicle audio works. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-131
Precautions for Safe Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-139
SiriusXM
®
Satellite Radio information . . . . . . . . . 4-151
Speaker lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-130
Using iPod
®
device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-137
Using the USB device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-135
Voice Recognition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-140
When connecting a Bluetooth
®
Phone. . . . . . . . . . 4-139
Speaker lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-130
Auto defogging system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-115
Auto door lock/unlock feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Auto light position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-83
Automatic climate control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-94
Air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-103
Automatic heating and air conditioning. . . . . . . . . . 4-96
Manual heating and air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-96
Aux, USB and iPod
®
port. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-129
Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-33
Battery replacement (smart key). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Battery saver function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-81
Before driving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
A
B
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
I
3
Index
Bonnet see the hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
Brake system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
Anti-lock brake system (ABS). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
Electric parking brake (EPB). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
Electronic stability control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
Hill-start assist control (HAC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29
Power brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
Vehicle stability management (VSM) . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28
Brakes fluid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-24
Bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-63
Bulb wattage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Camera see the Rear camera display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-80
Capacities (Lubricants). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Care
Care of seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
Exterior care. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-73
Interior care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-78
Tire care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-36
Care of seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
Cargo area cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-125
Center console storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-116
Central door lock switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Chains - Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-45
Checking tire inflation pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-37
Child restraint system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
Lower anchor system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32
Seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27
Tether anchor system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31
Child-protector rear door lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
Clean air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-114
Climate control air filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-27
Clothes hanger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-123
Combined instrument, see instrument cluster . . . . . . . 4-40
Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21
Cooling fluid, see engine coolant. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21
Cruise control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32
To set cruise control speed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33
Cup holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-118
Curtain air bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-50
Dashboard illumination, see instrument
panel illumination. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41
Dashboard, see instrument cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40
Day/night rearview mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
Daytime running light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-81
Defogging (Windscreen). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-111
Defogging (Windshield) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-111
Defogging logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-114
Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-93
Outside mirror defroster. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-93
Rear window defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-93
C
D
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
Index
4
I
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Display illumination, see instrument panel illumination. . 4-41
Displays, see instrument cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40
Door locks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Auto door lock/unlock feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Central door lock switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Child-protector rear door lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
from inside the vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
from outside the vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Impact sensing door unlock system. . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Speed sensing door lock system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Driver's and passenger's front air bag. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46
Driving at night. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41
Driving in flooded areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-42
Driving in the rain. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-42
Driving off-road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-43
Economical operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37
Electric chromic mirror (ECM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
Electric parking brake (EPB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
Electric power steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
Electronic stability control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
Emergency starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Emergency tailgate safety release. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
Emergency while driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Energy consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-61
EV information mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47
Explanation of scheduled maintenance items . . . . . . . 7-19
Exterior care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-73
Exterior overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
Tire Mobility Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
FLEX Steer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
Floor mat anchor(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-123
Fluid
Brakes fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-24
Washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-26
Fog light (Front) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-86
Front seat adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Fuse switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-53
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-51
Fuse switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-53
Fuse/relay panel description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-56
Instrument panel fuse. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-52
Multi fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-55
Gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42
Glove box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-116
E
F
G
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
I
5
Index
Glove box lamp. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-92
Gross vehicle weight. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Hazard warning flasher. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Hazardous driving conditions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39
Headlamp escort . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-81
Headlight bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-66
Headlight position. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-83
Headrest(front) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Heated steering wheel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
Heater
Automatic climate control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-94
High - beam operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-84
Hight adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
Highway driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-43
Hill-start assist control (HAC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
Immobilizer system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
Impact sensing door unlock system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Indicator Lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-72
Inside rearview mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
Instrument cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40
A/V Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-48
Energy consumption. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-61
EV information mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47
Gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42
Indicator Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-72
Instrument panel illumination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41
LCD Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46
LCD Display Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41
LCD Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46
One time driving information mode . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-63
Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-64
Service Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-48
Trip A/B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-62
Trip computer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-61
User settings mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49
Warning and Indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-65
Warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-65
Warning Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-52
Instrument panel fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-52
Instrument panel overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Interior care. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-78
Interior features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-118
Cargo area cover. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-125
Clothes hanger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-123
Cup holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-118
Floor mat anchor(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-123
Luggage net (holder) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-124
Power outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-122
H
I
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
Index
6
I
Rear seat warmer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-121
Seat air ventilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-121
Seat warmer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-119
Sunvisor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-118
Interior lamp auto cut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-90
Interior light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-90
Glove box lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-92
Interior lamp auto cut. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-90
Luggage room lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-92
Map lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-90
Room lamp. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-91
Vanity mirror lamp. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-92
Interior overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Jump starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Label
Air bag warning label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-57
Air conditioner compressor label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Tire sidewall labeling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-41
Tire specification and pressure label . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Lane change signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-85
Lap/shoulder belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
LCD Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46
LCD Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46
Light bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-63
Lighting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-81
Abnormal lamp operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-82
Battery saver function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-81
Daytime running light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-81
Front fog light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-86
Headlamp escort . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-81
High - beam operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-84
Lane change signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-85
Lighting control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-82
Turn signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-85
Lighting control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-82
Auto light position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-83
Headlight position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-83
Parking light position. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-83
Loss of the smart key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Lower anchor system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32
Lubricants and capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Luggage box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-117
Luggage net (holder) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-124
Luggage room lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-92
Luggage volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Maintenance
Explanation of scheduled maintenance items . . . . . 7-19
L
J
M
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
I
7
Index
Maintenance services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Owner maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Scheduled maintenance service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
Tire maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-41
Maintenance schedule. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
Maintenance services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Map lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-90
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
Mirrors
Day/night rearview mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
Electric chromic mirror (ECM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
Inside rearview mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
Outside mirror defroster. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39
Outside rearview mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36
Outside rearview mirror folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
Motor number. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Motor operation gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42
Motor room compartment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Multi fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-55
Occupant Detection System (ODS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
ODS see the Occupant Detection System . . . . . . . . . . 3-41
One time driving information mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-63
Outside mirror defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39
Outside rearview mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36
Outside rearview mirror folding. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
Outside Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44
Overheats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Owner maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Parking assist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-76
Non-operational conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-78
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-76
Parking light position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-83
Pedestrian Warning System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Power brakes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
POWER button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Illuminated POWER button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Pedestrian Warning System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
POWER button position. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Starting the vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Turing off the Vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
POWER button illumination. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
POWER button position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Power electric specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Power outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-122
Power window lock button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
Pre-tensioner seat belt. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
O
P
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
Index
8
I
Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-64
Rear camera display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-80
Rear seat adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Rear seat warmer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-121
Recommended cold tire inflation pressures . . . . . . . . . 7-36
Recommended lubricants and capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Record your key number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Reducing the risk of a rollover. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39
Reduction gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Shift-lock override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Transaxle ranges. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Reduction gear shift indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-45
Replacement light bulb. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-63
Road warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Rocking the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-40
Room lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-91
Rotation (Tire) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-38
Scheduled maintenance service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
Seat air ventilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-121
Seat belt warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Seat belts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
3 Point rear center belt. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
Care of seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
Hight adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
Lap/shoulder belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
Pre-tensioner seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
Seat belt warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Seat warmer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-119
Seatback pocket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Front seat adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Headrest(front) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Rear seat adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Seatback pocket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Service Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-48
Shift-lock override - Reduction gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Side air bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-49
Smart Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Battery replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Loss of the smart key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Record your key number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Smart key function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Smart key immobilizer system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
Smart key precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
Smart key function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Smart key immobilizer system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
Smart key precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
Smooth cornering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41
Snow tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-44
Speaker lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-130
S
R
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
I
9
Index
Special driving conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39
Driving at night . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41
Driving in flooded areas. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-42
Driving in the rain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-42
Driving off-road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-43
Hazardous driving conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39
Highway driving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-43
Reducing the risk of a rollover. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39
Rocking the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-40
Smooth cornering. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41
Speed sensing door lock system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42
SRS components and functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38
Starting difficulties, see vehicle will not start . . . . . . . . 6-4
Starting the vehicle - With a smart key . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
State of charge (SOC) gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43
Steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
Electric power steering. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
FLEX Steer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
Heated steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
Tilt and telescopic steering. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
Storage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-116
Center console storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-116
Glove box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-116
Luggage box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-117
Sunglass holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-117
Sunglass holder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-117
Sunvisor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-118
Tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Emergency tailgate safety release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
Tether anchor system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31
Tilt and telescopic steering. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
Tire chains. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-45
Tire Mobility Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
Checking the tire inflation pressure. . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
Components of the Tire Mobility Kit . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
Using the Tire Mobility Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17
Tire pressure monitoring system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
Tire rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-38
Tire specification and pressure label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Tires and wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Checking tire inflation pressure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-37
Low aspect ratio tire. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-49
Recommended cold tire inflation pressures. . . . . . . 7-36
Tire care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-36
Tire maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-41
Tire replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-40
Tire rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-38
Tire sidewall labeling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-41
Tire traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-41
Wheel alignment and tire balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-39
Wheel replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-40
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20
Emergency towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22
T
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
Index
10
I
Removable towing hook. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-47
Trip A/B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-62
Trip computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-61
Turing off the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Turn signals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-85
User settings mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49
Vanity mirror lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-92
Vehicle identification number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Vehicle load limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-48
Vehicle overheats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Vehicle stability management (VSM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28
Vehicle weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-53
Vehicle will not start. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Warning and Indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-65
Warning lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-65
Warning Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-52
Washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-26
Wheel alignment and tire balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-39
Wheel replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-40
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
Power window lock button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
Windscreen defrosting and defogging . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-111
Windscreen washers (front) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-87
Windscreen washers (rear) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-87
Windscreen wipers (front) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-87
Windscreen wipers (rear) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-87
Windshield defrosting and defogging. . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-111
Windshield washers (front). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-87
Windshield washers (rear) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-87
Windshield wipers (front). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-87
Windshield wipers (rear) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-87
Winter driving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-44
Snow tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-44
Tire chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-45
Wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-29
Wipers and washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-87
Windscreen washers (front) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-87
Windscreen washers (rear). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-87
Windscreen wipers (front) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-87
Windscreen wipers (rear) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-87
Windshield washers (front) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-87
Windshield washers (rear) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-87
Windshield wipers (front) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-87
Windshield wipers (rear) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-87
3 Point rear center belt. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
U
V
ETC
W
Downloaded from www.ManualsFile.com manuals search engine
